Introduction 1

Security recommendations 2

Description 3
SIMATIC NET
Technical basics 4
Industrial Wireless LAN
SCALANCE W700 5
IP addresses
according to IEEE 802.11ax
Web Based Management V2.4 Configuring with Web
Based Management 6
Configuration Manual

Upkeep and maintenance 7

Troubleshooting/FAQ 8
Appendix A "Supported
MIB Modules" A

Appendix B "Private MIBs" B

Appendix C "Underlying
Standards" C

Appendix D "Log Messages" D

Appendix E "Syslog
Messages" E
Appendix F "Encryption
methods used (ciphers)" F
Appendix G "Permitted
characters in names,
passwords and G
descriptions"

07/2024
C79000-G8976-C618-08
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. The remaining trademarks in
this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Document order number: C79000-G8900-C618 Copyright © Siemens 2021 - 2024.
Digital Industries Ⓟ 08/2024 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Purpose of the configuration manual.................................................................................... 9
1.2 Scope of validity .................................................................................................................. 9
1.3 Supplementary documentation.......................................................................................... 10
1.4 Further documentation...................................................................................................... 11
1.5 Terms used ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.6 SIMATIC NET glossary......................................................................................................... 11
1.7 Cybersecurity information .................................................................................................. 12
1.8 Firmware ........................................................................................................................... 12
1.9 Open source license conditions .......................................................................................... 13
1.10 Error/fault .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.11 Decommissioning .............................................................................................................. 13
1.12 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 13
1.13 Marken .............................................................................................................................. 13
2 Security recommendations.................................................................................................................. 15
2.1 Security recommendations................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Available services............................................................................................................... 19
3 Description........................................................................................................................................... 23
3.1 Product properties and hardware equipment ...................................................................... 23
3.2 Availability of the interfaces ............................................................................................... 25
3.3 Availability of the system functions .................................................................................... 25
3.4 Configuration limits ........................................................................................................... 28
3.5 Planned operating environment ......................................................................................... 29
3.6 Requirements for installation and operation ....................................................................... 29
3.7 Configuration License PLUG (CLP)....................................................................................... 29
3.8 PRESET PLUG...................................................................................................................... 31
3.9 Power over Ethernet (PoE).................................................................................................. 32
3.10 Digital input / output.......................................................................................................... 33
4 Technical basics ................................................................................................................................... 35
4.1 PROFINET........................................................................................................................... 35
4.2 VLAN ................................................................................................................................. 35

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 3
Table of contents

4.3 MAC-based communication ............................................................................................... 36

4.4 iFeatures ........................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.1 iPCF-2................................................................................................................................ 37
4.4.2 iPRP ................................................................................................................................... 38
4.5 SNMP ................................................................................................................................ 40
4.6 Spanning Tree.................................................................................................................... 42
4.6.1 RSTP, MSTP, CIST ................................................................................................................ 43
4.7 User management ............................................................................................................. 44
4.8 NAT ................................................................................................................................... 46
4.9 Network structures ............................................................................................................ 47
4.10 Possible applications .......................................................................................................... 49
4.11 IEEE 802.11r...................................................................................................................... 50
5 IP addresses ......................................................................................................................................... 51
5.1 IPv4 / IPv6 .......................................................................................................................... 51
5.2 IPv4 address....................................................................................................................... 53
5.2.1 Structure of an IPv4 address ............................................................................................... 53
5.2.2 Initial assignment of an IPv4 address .................................................................................. 54
5.2.3 Address assignment via DHCPv4......................................................................................... 55
5.2.4 Address assignment with SINEC PNI.................................................................................... 56
5.2.5 Address assignment with STEP 7 ........................................................................................ 56
5.2.6 Address assignment with SINEC NMS ................................................................................. 57
5.3 IPv6 address....................................................................................................................... 57
5.3.1 IPv6 terms ......................................................................................................................... 57
5.3.2 Structure of an IPv6 address ............................................................................................... 58
6 Configuring with Web Based Management......................................................................................... 61
6.1 Web Based Management.................................................................................................... 61
6.2 Login ................................................................................................................................. 63
6.3 "Information" menu ........................................................................................................... 66
6.3.1 Start page.......................................................................................................................... 66
6.3.2 Versions............................................................................................................................. 72
6.3.3 I&M ................................................................................................................................... 73
6.3.4 ARP / neighbors.................................................................................................................. 74
[Link] ARP-Tabelle ........................................................................................................................ 74
[Link] IPv6 Neighbor Table ........................................................................................................... 75
6.3.5 Log Tables ......................................................................................................................... 76
[Link] Event Log .......................................................................................................................... 76
[Link] WLAN authentication log ................................................................................................... 78
6.3.6 Faults ................................................................................................................................ 79
6.3.7 Redundancy....................................................................................................................... 80
6.3.8 Ethernet Statistics .............................................................................................................. 84
[Link] Interface Statistics.............................................................................................................. 84
[Link] Packet Size......................................................................................................................... 85
[Link] Packet Type........................................................................................................................ 86
[Link] Packet Error ....................................................................................................................... 86

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

4 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Table of contents

6.3.9 Learning Table ................................................................................................................... 87

6.3.10 LLDP .................................................................................................................................. 88
6.3.11 IPv4 Routing ...................................................................................................................... 89
6.3.12 IPv6-Routing ...................................................................................................................... 90
6.3.13 SNMP ................................................................................................................................ 91
6.3.14 Security ............................................................................................................................. 92
[Link] Overview ........................................................................................................................... 92
[Link] Supported Function Rights ................................................................................................. 95
[Link] Roles ................................................................................................................................. 95
[Link] Groups .............................................................................................................................. 96
[Link] Inter AP blocking................................................................................................................ 97
6.3.15 WLAN ................................................................................................................................ 97
[Link] Overview AP ...................................................................................................................... 97
[Link] Client List ........................................................................................................................ 100
[Link] Overlap AP....................................................................................................................... 101
[Link] Overview Client ............................................................................................................... 103
[Link] Available APs ................................................................................................................... 105
[Link] IP Mapping ...................................................................................................................... 107
6.3.16 WLAN Statistics................................................................................................................ 109
[Link] Errors .............................................................................................................................. 109
[Link] Data Sent......................................................................................................................... 110
[Link] Data Received .................................................................................................................. 111
6.3.17 WLAN iFeatures ............................................................................................................... 112
[Link] iPRP ................................................................................................................................. 112
6.4 "System" menu ................................................................................................................ 113
6.4.1 Configuration................................................................................................................... 113
6.4.2 General ........................................................................................................................... 119
[Link] Device ............................................................................................................................. 119
[Link] Coordinates ..................................................................................................................... 120
6.4.3 Agent IPv4 / IPv6 .............................................................................................................. 121
6.4.4 DNS ................................................................................................................................. 121
[Link] DNS Client ....................................................................................................................... 121
6.4.5 Restart............................................................................................................................. 124
[Link] Restart............................................................................................................................. 124
[Link] Sleep Mode...................................................................................................................... 126
6.4.6 Commit Control ............................................................................................................... 127
6.4.7 Load & Save ..................................................................................................................... 129
[Link] File list............................................................................................................................. 129
[Link] HTTP ............................................................................................................................... 135
[Link] TFTP ................................................................................................................................ 138
[Link] SFTP ................................................................................................................................ 141
[Link] Passwords........................................................................................................................ 144
6.4.8 Events ............................................................................................................................. 145
[Link] Configuration................................................................................................................... 145
[Link] Severity Filters ................................................................................................................. 149
6.4.9 SMTP client...................................................................................................................... 150
[Link] General ........................................................................................................................... 150
[Link] Recipient ......................................................................................................................... 153
6.4.10 DHCPv4 ........................................................................................................................... 154
[Link] DHCP Client ..................................................................................................................... 154
6.4.11 SNMP .............................................................................................................................. 156
[Link] General ........................................................................................................................... 156

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 5
Table of contents

[Link] SNMPv3 Users.................................................................................................................. 158

[Link] SNMPv3 User to Group mapping ...................................................................................... 161
[Link] SNMPv3 Access................................................................................................................ 162
[Link] SNMPv3 Views ................................................................................................................. 164
[Link] Notifications .................................................................................................................... 166
6.4.12 System Time .................................................................................................................... 168
[Link] Manual Setting ................................................................................................................ 168
[Link] DST Overview .................................................................................................................. 170
[Link] DST Configuration ............................................................................................................ 171
[Link] SNTP Client ...................................................................................................................... 174
[Link] NTP Client........................................................................................................................ 177
[Link] SIMATIC Time Client ......................................................................................................... 181
6.4.13 Auto Logout..................................................................................................................... 182
6.4.14 Syslog Client .................................................................................................................... 183
6.4.15 Fault Monitoring .............................................................................................................. 185
[Link] Power Supply................................................................................................................... 185
[Link] Link Change..................................................................................................................... 186
6.4.16 PROFINET......................................................................................................................... 187
6.4.17 PLUG ............................................................................................................................... 189
[Link] Configuration................................................................................................................... 189
[Link] License ............................................................................................................................ 192
6.4.18 Ping................................................................................................................................. 194
6.4.19 DCP Discovery.................................................................................................................. 195
6.4.20 Configuration Backup....................................................................................................... 198
6.4.21 TCP event......................................................................................................................... 199
6.5 "Interfaces" menu ............................................................................................................ 204
6.5.1 Ethernet .......................................................................................................................... 204
[Link] Overview ......................................................................................................................... 204
[Link] Configuration................................................................................................................... 206
6.5.2 WLAN .............................................................................................................................. 208
[Link] Basic................................................................................................................................ 208
[Link] Antennas&Power ............................................................................................................. 213
[Link] Advanced ........................................................................................................................ 218
[Link] Allowed Channels ............................................................................................................ 219
[Link] AP ................................................................................................................................... 221
[Link] Client............................................................................................................................... 225
[Link] Signal recorder ................................................................................................................ 227
6.5.3 Packet Capture ................................................................................................................ 236
6.6 "Layer 2" menu ................................................................................................................ 239
6.6.1 VLAN ............................................................................................................................... 239
[Link] General ........................................................................................................................... 239
[Link] Port Based VLAN .............................................................................................................. 242
6.6.2 Dynamic MAC Aging ........................................................................................................ 245
6.6.3 Spanning Tree.................................................................................................................. 246
[Link] General ........................................................................................................................... 246
[Link] CIST General .................................................................................................................... 247
[Link] CIST Port.......................................................................................................................... 249
[Link] MST General .................................................................................................................... 253
[Link] MST Port.......................................................................................................................... 255
6.6.4 DCP Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 257
6.6.5 LLDP ................................................................................................................................ 258

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

6 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Table of contents

6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"....................................................................................................... 259

6.7.1 Subnets ........................................................................................................................... 259
[Link] Overview ......................................................................................................................... 259
[Link] Configuration................................................................................................................... 262
6.7.2 Static Routes.................................................................................................................... 263
6.7.3 NAT ................................................................................................................................. 265
[Link] Masquerading.................................................................................................................. 265
[Link] NAPT ............................................................................................................................... 266
6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"....................................................................................................... 268
6.8.1 Subnets ........................................................................................................................... 268
6.8.2 Static Routes.................................................................................................................... 271
6.9 "Security" menu ............................................................................................................... 272
6.9.1 Users ............................................................................................................................... 272
[Link] Local Users ...................................................................................................................... 272
[Link] Roles ............................................................................................................................... 276
[Link] Groups ............................................................................................................................ 277
6.9.2 Passwords........................................................................................................................ 279
[Link] Options ........................................................................................................................... 281
6.9.3 AAA................................................................................................................................. 282
[Link] General ........................................................................................................................... 282
[Link] RADIUS-Client .................................................................................................................. 283
6.9.4 Brute Force Prevention ..................................................................................................... 287
6.9.5 WLAN .............................................................................................................................. 289
[Link] Basic (Access Point).......................................................................................................... 289
[Link] Basic (Client).................................................................................................................... 292
[Link] AP RADIUS Authenticator ................................................................................................. 295
[Link] Client RADIUS Supplicant ................................................................................................. 298
[Link] 802.11r ........................................................................................................................... 300
6.9.6 Inter AP Blocking.............................................................................................................. 301
[Link] Basic................................................................................................................................ 301
[Link] Allowed Addresses ........................................................................................................... 303
6.10 "iFeatures" menu ............................................................................................................. 304
6.10.1 iPCF-2.............................................................................................................................. 304
6.10.2 iPRP ................................................................................................................................. 306
7 Upkeep and maintenance.................................................................................................................. 311
7.1 Firmware update - via WBM.............................................................................................. 311
7.2 Embedding firmware in ConfigPack................................................................................... 312
7.3 Device configuration with PRESET-PLUG............................................................................ 313
7.4 Restoring the factory settings........................................................................................... 315
8 Troubleshooting/FAQ ......................................................................................................................... 317
8.1 Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible ................................................................... 317
8.2 Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being too high ............................. 318
8.3 Instructions for secure network design ............................................................................. 319
A Appendix A "Supported MIB Modules" .............................................................................................. 321
A.1 Supported MIB files .......................................................................................................... 321

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 7
Table of contents

B Appendix B "Private MIBs".................................................................................................................. 323

B.1 Private MIB variables ........................................................................................................ 323
C Appendix C "Underlying Standards" .................................................................................................. 325
C.1 Underlying standards ....................................................................................................... 325
D Appendix D "Log Messages"............................................................................................................... 327
D.1 Messages in the event log ................................................................................................ 327
D.2 Messages in the WLAN Authentication Log ....................................................................... 334
E Appendix E "Syslog Messages" .......................................................................................................... 337
E.1 Format of the syslog messages......................................................................................... 337
E.2 Parameters in Syslog messages ........................................................................................ 338
E.3 Syslog messages .............................................................................................................. 339
F Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)" ............................................................................. 347
F.1 WLAN security mechanisms ............................................................................................. 347
F.2 RADIUS ............................................................................................................................ 347
F.3 SSL .................................................................................................................................. 349
F.4 SSH CLI ............................................................................................................................ 351
F.5 NTP client (secure) ........................................................................................................... 352
G Appendix G "Permitted characters in names, passwords and descriptions"...................................... 353
G.1 Permitted characters ........................................................................................................ 353
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 357

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

8 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Introduction 1
1.1 Purpose of the configuration manual
This Configuration Manual is intended to provide you with the information you require to
commission and operate the device. It is aimed primarily at planning, commissioning and
maintenance personnel and at security officers. It provides you with the information you require
to configure the devices.
The operating instructions of the device describe how you install and connect up the device
correctly.

1.2 Scope of validity

This Configuration Manual covers the following products:

Product Article number Model

Access points
SCALANCE WAM766-1 6GK5766-1GE00-7DA0 MSAX65-W1-M12-E2
6GK5766-1GE00-7DB0 (US)
6GK5766-1GE00-7DC0 (ME)
SCALANCE WAM766-1 EEC 6GK5766-1GE00-7TA0 MSAX65-W1-M12-E2
6GK5766-1GE00-7TB0 (US)
6GK5766-1GE00-7TC0 (ME)
SCALANCE WAM763-1 6GK5763-1AL00-7DA0 (DI/DO) MSAX-W1-RJ-E2
6GK5763-1AL00-7DB0 (US) (DI/DO)
6GK5763-1AL00-7DC0 (ME) (DI/DO)
SCALANCE WAB762-1 6GK5762-1AJ00-6AA0 ELAX-W1-RJ-E1
Client
SCALANCE WUM766-1 6GK5766-1GE00-3DA0 MSAX65-W1-M12-E2
6GK5766-1GE00-3DB0 (US)
6GK5766-1GE00-3DC0 (ME)
SCALANCE WUM763-1 6GK5763-1AL00-3AA0 MSAX-W1-RJ-E2-NO
6GK5763-1AL00-3AB0 (US)
6GK5763-1AL00-3DA0 (DI/DO) MSAX-W1-RJ-E2
6GK5763-1AL00-3DB0 (US) (DI/DO)
SCALANCE WUB762-1 6GK5762-1AJ00-1AA0 ELAX-W1-RJ-E1

SCALANCE WUB762-1 iFeatures 6GK5762-1AJ00-2AA0 ELAX-W1-RJ-E1

The configuration manual applies to the following firmware version:

• SCALANCE W700 IEEE 802.11ax firmware as of version V2.4

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 9
Introduction
1.3 Supplementary documentation

1.3 Supplementary documentation

Documentation on the Internet

You can find the current version of the document on the Internet at (https://
[Link]/cs/de/en/ps/28575/man)
Enter the name or article number of the product in the search filter.

Orientation in the documentation

Apart from the Configuration Manual you are currently reading, the following documentation is
also available from SIMATIC NET on the topic of Industrial Wireless LANs:
• Configuration Manual: SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Command Line
Interface
This document contains the CLI commands supported by SCALANCE W700ax devices.
• Operating instructions SCALANCE WxM766
This document contains information on installing, connecting, maintaining and servicing
the following products:
– SCALANCE WAM766-1
– SCALANCE WAM766-1 EEC
– SCALANCE WUM766-1
• Operating instructions SCALANCE WxM763
This document contains information on installing, connecting, maintaining and servicing
the following products:
– SCALANCE WAM763-1
– SCALANCE WUM763-1
• Operating instructions SCALANCE WxB762
This document contains information on installing, connecting, maintaining and servicing
the following products:
– SCALANCE WAB762-1
– SCALANCE WUB762-1
– SCALANCE WUB762-1 iFeatures
• SCALANCE W700 802.11ax approvals
This document contains information on currently available country approvals.
• SCALANCE W700 802.11ax performance data
This document contains information about the frequency, modulation, transmit power and
receiver sensitivity of the wireless card.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

10 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Introduction
1.6 SIMATIC NET glossary

1.4 Further documentation

In the system manuals "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" and "Industrial
Ethernet / PROFINET passive network components", you will find information on other SIMATIC
NET products that you can operate along with the devices of this product line in an Industrial
Ethernet network.
There, you will find among other things optical performance data of the communications
partner that you require for the installation.
You will find the system manuals here:
• On the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support under the following entry IDs:
– 27069465 ([Link]
Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet System Manual
– 84922825 ([Link]
Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components System Manual
The RCoax system manual contains both an explanation of the basic technical aspects as well as
a description of the individual RCoax components and their mode of operation. Installation/
commissioning and connection of RCoax components and their operating principle are
explained. The possible applications of the various SIMATIC NET components are described.
You can find the RCoax system manual on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online
Support under the following entry ID:
• 109480869 ([Link]
SIMATIC NET: Industrial Wireless LAN RCoax

1.5 Terms used

The designation . . . stands for . . .

IPv4 address IPv4 address
IPv6 address IPv6 address
IP address IPv4/IPv6 address
IPv4 interface Interface that supports IPv4.
IPv6 interface Interface that supports IPv6. The interface can have more than one IPv6
address The IPv6 addresses have different ranges (scope), e.g. link local
IP interface Interface that supports both IPv4 and IPv6. As default the IPv4 support is
already activated. The IPv6 support needs to be activated extra.

1.6 SIMATIC NET glossary

The SIMATIC NET glossary describes terms that may be used in this document.
You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary in the Siemens Industry Online Support at the
following address:
Glossary ([Link]

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 11
Introduction
1.8 Firmware

1.7 Cybersecurity information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial cybersecurity functions that support
the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
cybersecurity concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial cybersecurity measures that may be implemented,
please visit
[Link] ([Link]
industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Cybersecurity
RSS Feed under
[Link] ([Link]

1.8 Firmware
The firmware is available on the Internet pages of the Siemens Industry Online Support: (https://
[Link]/cs/ww/en/ps/28575/dl)

Firmware
The firmware is signed and encrypted. This ensures that only firmware created by Siemens can
be downloaded to the device.

Note on firmware/software support

Check regularly for new firmware/software versions or security updates and apply them. After
the release of a new version, previous versions are no longer supported and are not maintained.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

12 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Introduction
1.13 Marken

1.9 Open source license conditions

Note
Open source software
Read the license conditions for open source software carefully before using the product.

The license terms and copyright information can be downloaded from the WBM or CLI as a
zip file.
• WBM: System > Load&Save > HTTP / TFTP / SFTP > LicenseCondition
• CLI: sftp save filetype LicenseConditions / tftp save filetype
LicenseConditions

1.10 Error/fault
If a fault develops, send the device to your SIEMENS representative for repair. Repairs on-site are
not permitted.

1.11 Decommissioning
Shut down the device properly to prevent unauthorized persons from accessing confidential
data in the device memory.
To do this, restore the factory settings on the device.
Also restore the factory settings on the storage medium.

1.12 Recycling and disposal

The products are low in pollutants, can be recycled and meet the requirements of the WEEE
directive 2012/19/EU for the disposal of electrical and electronic equipment.
Do not dispose of the products at public disposal sites.
For environmentally friendly recycling and the disposal of your old device contact a certified
disposal company for electronic scrap or your Siemens contact (Product return (https://
[Link]/cs/ww/en/view/109479891)).
Note the different national regulations.

1.13 Marken
The following and possibly other names not identified by the registered trademark sign ® are
registered trademarks of Siemens AG:
SCALANCE, RCoax

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 13
Introduction
1.13 Marken

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

14 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Security recommendations 2
2.1 Security recommendations
To prevent unauthorized access to the device and/or network, observe the following security
recommendations.

General
• Check the device regularly to ensure that these recommendations and/or other internal
security policies are complied with.
• Evaluate the security of your location and use a cell protection concept with suitable products
([Link]
• When the internal and external network are disconnected, an attacker cannot access internal
data from the outside. Therefore operate the device only within a protected network area.
• No product liability will be accepted for operation in a non-secure infrastructure.
• Use VPN to encrypt and authenticate communication from and to the devices.
• For data transmission via a non-secure network, use an encrypted VPN tunnel (IPsec,
OpenVPN).
• Separate connections correctly (WBM, SSH etc.).
• Check the user documentation of other Siemens products that are used together with the
device for additional security recommendations.
• Using remote logging, ensure that the system protocols are forwarded to a central logging
server. Make sure that the server is within the protected network and check the protocols
regularly for potential security violations or vulnerabilities.

WLAN
• We recommend that you ensure redundant coverage for WLAN clients.
• More information on data security and data encryption for SCALANCE W is available in
SCALANCE W: Setup of a Wireless LAN in the Industrial Environment (https://
[Link]/cs/ww/en/view/22681042)

Authentication

Note
Accessibility risk - Risk of data loss
Do not lose the passwords for the device. Access to the device can only be restored by resetting
the device to factory settings which completely removes all configuration data.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 15
Security recommendations
2.1 Security recommendations

• Replace the default passwords for all user accounts, access modes and applications (if
applicable) before you use the device.
• Define rules for the assignment of passwords.
• Use passwords with a high password strength. Avoid weak passwords, (e.g. password1,
123456789, abcdefgh) or recurring characters (e.g. abcabc).
This recommendation also applies to symmetrical passwords/keys configured on the device.
• Make sure that passwords are protected and only disclosed to authorized personnel.
• Do not use the same passwords for multiple user names and systems.
• Store the passwords in a safe location (not online) to have them available if they are lost.
• Regularly change your passwords to increase security.
• A password must be changed if it is known or suspected to be known by unauthorized
persons.
• When user authentication is performed via RADIUS, make sure that all communication takes
place within the security environment or is protected by a secure channel.
• Watch out for link layer protocols that do not offer their own authentication between
endpoints, such as ARP or IPv4. An attacker could use vulnerabilities in these protocols to
attack hosts, switches and routers connected to your layer 2 network, for example, through
manipulation (poisoning) of the ARP caches of systems in the subnet and subsequent
interception of the data traffic. Appropriate security measures must be taken for non-secure
layer 2 protocols to prevent unauthorized access to the network. Physical access to the local
network can be secured or secure, higher layer protocols can be used, among other things.

Certificates and keys

• There is a preset SSL/TLS (RSA) certificate with 4096 bit key length in the device. Replace this
certificate with a user-generated, high-quality certificate with key. Use a certificate signed by
a reliable external or internal certification authority. You can install the certificate via the
WBM ("System > Load and Save").
• Use certificates with a key length of 4096 bits.
• Use the certification authority including key revocation and management to sign the
certificates.
• Make sure that user-defined private keys are protected and inaccessible to unauthorized
persons.
• If there is a suspected security violation, change all certificates and keys immediately.
• Use password-protected certificates in the format "PKCS #12".
• Verify certificates based on the fingerprint on the server and client side to prevent "man in the
middle" attacks. Use a second, secure transmission path for this.
• Before sending the device to Siemens for repair, replace the current certificates and keys with
temporary disposable certificates and keys, which can be destroyed when the device is
returned.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

16 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Security recommendations
2.1 Security recommendations

Physical/remote access
• Operate the devices only within a protected network area. Attackers cannot access internal
data from the outside when the internal and the external network are separate from each
other.
• Limit physical access to the device exclusively to trusted personnel.
The memory card or the PLUG (C-PLUG, KEY-PLUG, CLP) contains sensitive data such as
certificates and keys that can be read out and modified. An attacker with control of the
device's removable media could extract critical information such as certificates, keys, etc. or
reprogram the media.
• Lock unused physical ports on the device. Unused ports can be used to gain forbidden access
to the plant.
• We highly recommend that you keep the protection from brute force attacks (BFA) activated
to prevent third parties from gaining access to the device. For more information, see the
configuration manuals, section "Brute Force Prevention (Page 287)".
• For communication via non-secure networks, use additional devices with VPN functionality
to encrypt and authenticate communication.
• When you establish a secure connection to a server (e.g. for an upgrade), make sure that
strong encryption methods and protocols are configured for the server.
• Terminate the management connections (e.g. HTTP, HTTPS, SSH) properly.
• Make sure that the device has been powered down completely before you decommission it.
For more information, refer to "Decommissioning (Page 13)".
• We recommend formatting a PLUG that is not being used.

Hardware / Software
• Use VLANs whenever possible as protection against denial-of-service (DoS) attacks and
unauthorized access.
• Restrict access to the device by setting firewall rules or rules in an access control list (ACL).
• Selected services are enabled by default in the firmware. It is recommended to enable only
the services that are absolutely necessary for your installation.
For more information on available services, see "List of available services (Page 19)".
• To ensure you are using the most secure encryption methods available, use the latest web
browser version compatible with the product. Also, the latest web browser versions of
Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, and Microsoft Edge have 1/n-1 record splitting enabled,
which reduces the risk of attacks such as SSL/TLS Protocol Initialization Vector
Implementation Information Disclosure Vulnerability (for example, BEAST).
• Ensure that the latest firmware version is installed, including all security-related patches.
You can find the latest information on security patches for Siemens products at the Industrial
Security ([Link] or ProductCERT Security Advisories
([Link] website.
For updates on Siemens product security advisories, subscribe to the RSS feed on the
ProductCERT Security Advisories website or follow @ProductCert on Twitter.
• Enable only those services that are used on the device, including physical ports. Free physical
ports can potentially be used to gain access to the network behind the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 17
Security recommendations
2.1 Security recommendations

• Use the authentication and encryption mechanisms of SNMPv3 if possible. Use strong
passwords.
• Configuration files can be downloaded from the device. Ensure that configuration files are
adequately protected.
Configuration files can be password protected during download. You enter passwords on the
WBM page "System > Load & Save > Passwords (Page 144)".
• When using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol):
– Configure SNMP to generate a notification when authentication errors occur.
For more information, see WBM "System > SNMP > Notifications (Page 166)".
– Ensure that the default community strings are changed to unique values.
– Use SNMPv3 whenever possible. SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are considered non-secure and
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
– If possible, prevent write access.
• Use the security functions such as address translation with NAT (Network Address
Translation) or NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) to protect receiving ports from
access by third parties.
• Use WPA2/ WPA2-PSK / WPA3-SAE with AES to protect the WLAN. You can find additional
information in the configuration manual Web Based Management "Security menu
(Page 289)".
• Use PMF (Protected Management Frames) to cryptographically protect the management
telegrams. You can find additional information in the configuration manual Web Based
Management "Security menu (Page 289)".

Secure/ non-secure protocols

• Use secure protocols if access to the device is not prevented by physical protection measures.
• Disable or restrict the use of non-secure protocols. While some protocols are secure (e.g.
HTTPS, SSH, 802.1X, etc.), others were not designed for the purpose of securing applications
(e.g. SNMPv1/v2c, etc.).
Therefore, take appropriate security measures against non-secure protocols to prevent
unauthorized access to the device/network. Use non-secure protocols on the device using a
secure connection (e.g. SINEMA RC).
• If non-secure protocols and services are required, ensure that the device is operated in a
protected network area.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

18 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Security recommendations
2.2 Available services

• Check whether use of the following protocols and services is necessary:

– Non-authenticated and unencrypted ports
– LLDP
– Syslog
– DHCP options 66/67
– TFTP
– Telnet
– HTTP
– SNMP v1/2c
– SNTP
• The following protocols provide secure alternatives:
– SNMPv1/v2c → SNMPv3
Check whether use of SNMPv1/v2c is necessary. SNMPv1/v2c is classified as non-secure.
Use the option of preventing write access. The product provides you with suitable setting
options.
If SNMP is enabled, change the community names. If no unrestricted access is necessary,
restrict access with SNMP.
Use SNMPv3 in conjunction with passwords.
– HTTP → HTTPS
– Telnet → SSH
– TFTP → SFTP
– Syslog Client → Syslog Client TLS
• Using a firewall, restrict the services and protocols available to the outside to a minimum.
• For the DCP function, enable the "Read Only" mode after commissioning.

2.2 Available services

List of available services

The following is a list of all available services and their ports through which the device can be
accessed.
The table includes the following columns:
• Service
The services that the device supports.
• Protocol/port number
Port number assigned to the protocol.
• Default status
The default status of the ports/service (e.g. open, closed, outgoing only).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 19
Security recommendations
2.2 Available services

• Configurable port/service
Indicates whether the port number or the service can be configured via WBM / CLI.
• Authentication
Specifies whether the communication partner is authenticated.
If "optional", the authentication can be configured as required.
• Encryption
Specifies whether the transfer is encrypted.
If "optional", the encryption can be configured as required.

Service Protocol / Default port status Configurable Authentica‐ Encryption 1)

Port number Port Service tion

DHCP Client IPv4 UDP/68 Outgoing only -- ✓ -- --

DHCP Client IPv6 UDP/546 Outgoing only -- ✓ -- --
DNS Client TCP/53 Outgoing only -- ✓ -- --
UDP/53
HTTP TCP/80 Open ✓ ✓ ✓ --
HTTPS TCP/443 Open ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NTP- Client UDP/123 Outgoing only ✓ ✓ -- --
Packet Capture TCP/2002 Closed -- ✓ -- --
TCP/2003 2)

PROFINET UDP/34964 Open -- ✓ -- --

UDP/49154
UDP/49155
RADIUS UDP/1812 Outgoing only ✓ ✓ ✓ --
SFTP Server TCP/22 Closed ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SMTP Client TCP/25 Closed ✓ ✓ -- --
SMTP (secure) TCP/465 Closed ✓ ✓ Optional ✓
SNMPv1/v2c UDP/161 Open ✓ ✓ -- --
SNMPv3 UDP/161 Open ✓ ✓ Optional Optional
SNMP Traps UDP/162 Outgoing only -- ✓ -- --
SNTP Client UDP/123 Outgoing only ✓ ✓ -- --
SSH TCP/22 Open ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Syslog Client UDP/514 Closed ✓ ✓ -- --
Syslog Client TLS TCP/6514 Closed ✓ ✓ -- ✓
Telnet TCP/23 Closed ✓ ✓ ✓ --
TFTP Server UDP/69 Closed ✓ ✓ -- --
TCP Event TCP/26864 Closed ✓ ✓ ✓ --
1)
You can find additional information on the encryption methods used in the WBM appendix
"Ciphers used (Page 347)".
2)
The basic port of Packet Capture for the communication to Wireshark is TCP/2002. For each
enabled interface, another port is enabled. Each additional port is an increment of TCP/2002,
i.e. TCP/2003, TCP/2004, TCP/2005 etc.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

20 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Security recommendations
2.2 Available services

The following is a list of all available Layer 2 services through which the device can be
accessed.
The table includes the following columns:
• Layer 2 service
The Layer 2 services that the device supports.
• Default status
The default status of the service (open or closed).
• Service configurable
Indicates whether the service can be configured via WBM / CLI.

Layer 2 service Default Service configura‐

status ble

DCP Open ✓
LLDP Open ✓
RSTP Closed ✓
iPRP Closed ✓
MSTP Closed ✓
SIMATIC NET TIME Closed ✓
802.1x Closed ✓

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 21
Security recommendations
2.2 Available services

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

22 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Description 3
Note
Interruption of the WLAN communication
The WLAN communication can be influenced by high frequency interference signals and can be
totally interrupted.
Remember this and take suitable action.

3.1 Product properties and hardware equipment

Properties of the SCALANCE W700 devices according to IEEE 802.11ax

• The Ethernet interface supports the following:
– 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps both in full and half duplex
– 1000 Mbps full duplex
– Autocrossing
– Autopolarity
• Operating the WLAN interface in the frequency bands 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
• Dual mode of the WLAN interface in access point mode with 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz with a CLP
2GB W700 AP iFeatures plugged in (not with SCALANCE WxB762).
• IEEE 802.11ax
The WLAN standard IEEE 802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6) for efficient use of the frequencies with a gross
transmission speed
– SCALANCE WxM76x: 1201 Mbps per radio interface
– SCALANCE WxB762: 601 Mbps per radio interface
• The WLAN interface is compatible with the standards IEEE 802.11n.
• IEEE 802.11r
Optimization of roaming (Fast BSS Transition)

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 23
Description
3.1 Product properties and hardware equipment

• IEEE 802.11h - Supplement to IEEE 802.11a

In the 802.11h mode, the methods "Transmit Power Control (TPC)" as well as "Dynamic
Frequency Selection (DFS)" are used in the range 5.25 - 5.35 and 5.47 - 5.75 GHz. In some
countries, this allows the frequency subband of 5.47 - 5.725 GHz to be used outdoors even
with a higher transmit power.
TPC is a technique for adapting the transmit power.
With the DFS function, it is possible to also use the higher 5 Ghz channels. Before the access
point transmits over one of these channels, it checks for competing radar signals for 60
seconds according to the CAC (Channel Availability Check). The access point also does not
send any beacons for the duration of the search. With weather radar channels (5.6 - 5.65
GHz), the duration of the search is 10 minutes.
If no radar signals are detected after the search period has elapsed, the access point transmits
on the channel. Otherwise, the access point changes channel and repeats the check.
The access point also searches for radar signals continuously during operation. If the access
point discovers a radar signal on the current channel, it notifies the clients of the channel
change. It then automatically switches to an alternative DFS channel and the current channel
is blocked for 30 minutes.
• Support of the authentication standards WPA (RADIUS), WPA-PSK, WPA2 (RADIUS), WPA2-
PSK, WPA3-SAE and IEEE 802.1X as well as the encryption method AES.
Note
With devices operated in WLAN mode IEEE 802.11n/ac, only WPA2 authentication (WPA2-
PSK and WPA2 (RADIUS)) encryption is possible.
Devices in WLAN mode IEEE 802.11ax support authentication methods WPA2 and WPA3-SAE
(Simultaneous Authentication of Equals).

• Suitable for inclusion of a RADIUS server for authentication.

• Device-related and application-related monitoring of the wireless connection.
• Thoroughly tested for interoperability with Wi-Fi devices of other vendors.
• Before commissioning the SCALANCE W700ax, check the wireless conditions on site.
Overlaps can lead to performance impairments, especially with simultaneous operation of
multiple applications. We recommend thorough spectrum management or channel
planning enforced by processes.

Hardware equipment
The following table shows the hardware equipment of the SCALANCE W devices.
We reserve the right to make technical changes.

Device Access point Client Access point Client Access point Client
WAM766-1 WUM766-1 WAM763-1 WUM763-1 WAB762-1 WUB762-1
WAM 766-1 WUB762-1
EEC iFeatures
Number of WLAN inter‐ 2 1 2 1 1 1
faces
Connections for exter‐ 2 x N-Connector 2 x R-SMA female 1 x R-SMA female
nal antennas

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

24 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Description
3.3 Availability of the system functions

Device Access point Client Access point Client Access point Client
WAM766-1 WUM766-1 WAM763-1 WUM763-1 WAB762-1 WUB762-1
WAM 766-1 WUB762-1
EEC iFeatures
Ethernet interface M12 Ethernet interface P1 LAN 4 x RJ45 socket 1 x RJ45 socket
PoE, X-coded, 8-pin
Power supply (direct) M12 interface, direct infeed, L- Terminal block, 5-pin Terminal block, 3-pin
coded, 4-pin
Digital input/output M12 interface, A-coded, 5-pin Terminal block, 2-pin Not available
Degree of protection IP65 IP30 IP20
CLP interface Available Available Not available
PoE interface Available Not available Not available

3.2 Availability of the interfaces

The following table shows the availability of the physical and logical interfaces. Note that in this
table all interfaces are listed. Depending on the system function, some interfaces are not
available. On the WBM pages you can only select the available interfaces.
We reserve the right to make technical changes.

Device Access point Client Access point Client Access point Client
WAM766-1 WUM766-1 WAM763-1 WUM763-1 WAB762-1 WUB762-1
WAM766-1 WUB762-1
EEC iFeatures
Wireless interface WLAN 1 WLAN 1 WLAN 1 WLAN 1 WLAN 1 WLAN 1
(WLAN) WLAN 2 WLAN 2 WLAN 2
LAN interface P1 LAN PoE P1 LAN PoE P1 - P4 P1 - P4 P1 P1
VAP interface VAP X.Y - VAP X.Y - VAP X.Y -
X = 1 ... 2 X = 1 ... 2 X = 1 ... 2
Y = 1 ... 8 Y = 1 ... 8 Y=1
VLAN 24 24 24 24 5 5

3.3 Availability of the system functions

The following table shows the availability of the system functions on the SCALANCE W devices.
Note that all functions are described in this configuration manual and in the online help.
Depending on your device, some functions are not available.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 25
Description
3.3 Availability of the system functions

We reserve the right to make technical changes.

Menu item in System functions SCALANCE WxM76x SCALANCE WxB762

the WBM Access point Clients Access point Clients
mode Access points mode Access points
in client mode in client mode
Information ARP table ✓ ✓
Log table ✓ ✓
Error ✓ ✓
Redundancy protocol ✓ ✓
Ethernet statistics ✓ ✓
Unicast MAC table ✓ ✓
LLDP neighbors ✓ ✓
IPv4 Routing ✓ ✓
IPv6 Routing ✓ ✓
SNMPv3 Groups ✓ ✓
Security ✓ ✓
WLAN Overview AP ✓ - ✓ -
Client List ✓ - ✓ -
Overlap AP ✓ - ✓ -
Overview Client - ✓ - ✓
Available APs - ✓ - ✓
IP Mapping - ✓ - ✓
WLAN statistics ✓ ✓
WLAN iFeatures ✓ -
✓1)

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

26 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Description
3.3 Availability of the system functions

Menu item in System functions SCALANCE WxM76x SCALANCE WxB762

the WBM Access point Clients Access point Clients
mode Access points mode Access points
in client mode in client mode
System DNS client ✓ ✓
SMTP client ✓ ✓
DHCP client ✓ ✓
SNMP ✓ ✓
Sleep Mode ✓ -
Time Manually ✓ ✓
DST ✓ ✓
SNTP Client ✓ ✓
NTP client (secure) ✓ ✓
NTP server ✓ ✓
SIMATIC Time Client ✓ ✓
Auto logout ✓ ✓
Syslog client ✓ ✓
Fault monitoring ✓ ✓
PROFINET ✓ ✓
PLUG ✓ -
Ping ✓ ✓
DCP Discovery ✓ ✓
Configuration backup ✓ ✓
TCP Event ✓ ✓ 1)
Interfaces Ethernet ✓ ✓
WLAN Basic ✓ ✓
Extensions ✓ ✓
Antennas&Power ✓ ✓
Allowed Channels ✓ ✓
Access point ✓ - ✓ -
Client - ✓ - ✓
Packet Capture ✓ - ✓ -
Layer 2 Port Based VLAN ✓ ✓
Dynamic MAC aging ✓ ✓
Ring with RSTP ✓ ✓
Spanning Tree ✓ ✓
RSTP ✓ ✓
MSTP ✓ ✓
DCP forwarding ✓ ✓
LLDP ✓ ✓
Layer 3 Agent IPv4/IPv6 ✓ ✓
NAT/NAPT - ✓ - ✓
Static routes ✓ ✓

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 27
Description
3.4 Configuration limits

Menu item in System functions SCALANCE WxM76x SCALANCE WxB762

the WBM Access point Clients Access point Clients
mode Access points mode Access points
in client mode in client mode
Security Users ✓ ✓
Passwords ✓ ✓
RADIUS authentication ✓ ✓
Brute Force Prevention ✓ ✓
WLAN Basic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
AP RADIUS Authenticator ✓ - ✓ -
Client RADIUS Supplicant - ✓ - ✓
802.11r ✓ - ✓ -
iFeature iPRP ✓ 2)
✓ 2) 3)
- ✓1)
iPCF-2 ✓2) ✓2) 3) - ✓1)

1) Only for SCALANCE WUB762-1 iFeatures

2) CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures 6GK5907-8UA00-0AA0
3) CLP 2GB W700 Client iFeatures 6GK5907-4UA00-0AA0

3.4 Configuration limits

The following table lists the configuration limits for Web Based Management and the Command
Line Interface of the device.
Depending on your device, some functions are not available.

Menu item in the Configurable function Maximum number

WBM SCALANCE WxM76x SCALANCE WxB762
System Syslog server 3 3
DNS server manual (IPv4) 3 3
learned (IPv4) 2 2
in total 7 7
SMTP server 3 3
SNMPv1/v2c and v3 Trap receiver 10 10
SNMP queries 50 50
SNTP server 2 2
NTP server 1 1
NTP / NTP (secure) client 1 1
Interfaces Connected clients per WLAN interface 128 10
Layer 2 Virtual LANs (port-based, including VLAN 1) 24 5
Multiple Spanning Tree instances 16 3
Layer 3 IP interface 2 2
1 subnet per IP interface 1 subnet per IP interface
DHCP client 1 1

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

28 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Description
3.7 Configuration License PLUG (CLP)

Menu item in the Configurable function Maximum number

WBM SCALANCE WxM76x SCALANCE WxB762
Security Users 30 30
(incl. the predefined (incl. the predefined
users) users)
User groups 32 32
User roles 32 32
(incl. the predefined roles) (incl. the predefined roles)
IP addresses from RADIUS servers • AAA: 6 • AAA: 6
• WLAN: 2 • WLAN: 2
Firewall
• NAPT rules (only with clients) 32 12

3.5 Planned operating environment

This section describes the recommended conditions for the most secure operation possible of
the SCALANCE W700 components. These recommendations are not exhaustive and do not
replace your own Threat and Risk Assessment with derivation of relevant measures.
• For secure operation, observe the security recommendations (Page 15).
• Make sure that only authorized persons have physical access to the component.
• Make sure that only authorized persons have permission to access the component via the
network (user or access management).
• Introduce effective security incident handling processes.

3.6 Requirements for installation and operation

A PG/PC with network connection must be available in order to configure the SCALANCE W
devices. If no DHCP server is available, a PC on which the SINEC PNI is installed is necessary for
the initial assignment of an IP address to the SCALANCE W devices. The other configuration
settings require a client PC with a Web browser (HTTPS) or a terminal software (SSH client).

3.7 Configuration License PLUG (CLP)

Note
Availability of the CLP interface
Not all device variants have a CLP interface. For more detailed information, refer to the section
"Product properties and hardware equipment (Page 23)".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 29
Description
3.7 Configuration License PLUG (CLP)

The PLUG is available in the following variants:

• PLUG Configuration: The exchangeable storage medium only saves the configuration data of
the device.
• PLUG License: In addition to the configuration data, the exchangeable storage medium
contains a license with which special functions are enabled, e.g. iFeatures.

How it works

NOTICE
Do not remove or insert the PLUG during operation.
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether a PLUG is inserted at one second intervals. If it is detected that the
PLUG has been removed, the device restarts.
If a valid PLUG license was inserted in the device, the device changes to a defined error state
following the restart. With SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in
this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG license, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory settings.

Devices with CLP slot support the following operating modes:

• Without PLUG
The device saves the configuration data in the internal memory. This mode is active when no
PLUG is inserted.
• With PLUG
If an empty PLUG (as supplied) is inserted in the device, the device automatically backs up the
configuration data on the PLUG during startup. If the PLUG contains a license, additional
functions are also enabled. Changes to the configuration are stored directly on the PLUG and
in the internal memory.
The configuration stored on the PLUG is displayed over the user interfaces.
When a device starts up, it automatically adopts the configuration data of the inserted,
written PLUG. The prerequisite for this is that the configuration data was written by a
compatible device type.
One exception to this can be the IP configuration if it is set using DHCP and the DHCP server
has not been reconfigured accordingly. Reconfiguration is necessary if you use functions
based on MAC addresses.

Component Description Article number

CLP Exchangeable storage medium for saving
Configuration License PLUG configuration data
SCALANCE CLP 2GB 6GK1900-0UB00-0AA0
SCALANCE CLP EEC 2GB 6GK1900-0UQ00-0AA0
SCALANCE CLP 32GB 6GK1900-0UB40-0AA0

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

30 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Description
3.8 PRESET PLUG

Component Description Article number

CLP iFeatures Exchangeable storage medium for saving
configuration data and enabling iFeatures
SCALANCE CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures 6GK5907-8UA00-0AA0
SCALANCE CLP 2GB W700 Client iFeatures 6GK5907-4UA00-0AA0

3.8 PRESET PLUG

CLP with preset function (PRESET-PLUG)

Note
Availability of the CLP interface
Not all device variants have a CLP interface. For more detailed information, refer to the section
"Product properties and hardware equipment (Page 23)".

With PRESET-PLUG it is possible to install the same configuration and the firmware belonging
to it on several devices.

Note
Using configurations with DHCP
Create a PRESET-PLUG only from device configurations that use DHCP. Otherwise disruptions will
occur in network operation due to multiple identical IP addresses.
You assign fixed IP addresses extra following the basic installation.

In a CLP that was configured as a PRESET-PLUG, the device configuration, user accounts,
certificates and the firmware are stored.

Note
Restore factory defaults and restart with a PRESET PLUG inserted
If you reset a device to the factory defaults, when the device restarts an inserted PRESET PLUG
is formatted and the PRESET PLUG functionality is lost. You then need to create a new PRESET
PLUG.
We recommend that you remove the PRESET PLUG before you reset the device to the factory
settings.

For more detailed information on creating and using a PRESET PLUG refer to the section
Device configuration with PRESET-PLUG (Page 313).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 31
Description
3.9 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

3.9 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

General
"Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply strategy for network components according to
IEEE with 802.3af or 802.3at.
With PoE, power and data transmission takes place over the used Ethernet cables that
connect the individual network components. This makes an additional power cable
unnecessary and reduces investment and maintenance costs. PoE can be used with all
network components that require little power (max. 12.95 W).
Which Ethernet connectors of a device are capable of PoE can be found in the operating
instructions of the device.

Endspan
With endspan, the power is supplied via a switch that can reach a device over an Ethernet cable.
The switch must be capable of PoE, for example a SCALANCE X108PoE, SCALANCE X308-2M
POE, SCALANCE XR552‑12M.

Midspan
Midspan is used when the switch is not PoE-compliant. The power is supplied by an additional
device between the switch and end device. In this case, only data rates of 10/100 Mbps can be
achieved because the power is supplied on redundant wires.
A Siemens power insert can also be used as the interface for the power input. Since a power
insert supports a power supply of 24 VDC, it does not conform with 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at.
The following restrictions relating to the use of power inserts should be noted:

WARNING
Operate the power insert only when the following conditions apply:
• with extra low voltages SELV, PELV complying with IEC 60364-4-41
• in the United States and Canada with power supplies complying with NEC class 2
• in the United States and Canada, the cabling must meet the requirements of NEC/CEC
• power load maximum 0.5 A.

LEDs for PoE on the SCALANCE W device

When the SCALANCE W device is supplied by PoE, the green "PoE" LED is lit on the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

32 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Description
3.10 Digital input / output

3.10 Digital input / output

Introduction
Some device variants have a digital input and output. You can find information on the availability
of a digital input and output in the section "Product properties and hardware equipment
(Page 23)". You can find information on connection and pin assignment in the operating
instructions for the relevant device.

Application example
• Digital input to signal one item of information, for example "door open", "door closed".
• Digital output, for example for "go to sleep" for devices on an automated guided transport
system.

Control of the digital output

Using the private MIB variable snMspsDigitalOutputLevel, you can control the digital output (DO/
1L). The digital output acts as NO contact and conducts current in the closed state.

Note
You cannot configure the digital output with Web Based Management (WBM).
You can note the current state of the digital output and restore it after a restart. You can find
more information on the WBM page "System > Configuration".
If the digital input changes the status, an entry is made in the event protocol table.

• OID of the private MIB variable snMspsDigitalOutputLevel:

iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).siemen
s(4329).industrialComProducts(20).iComPlatforms(1).simaticNet(1).s
nMsps(1).snMspsCommon(1).snMspsDigitalIO(39).snMspsDigitalIOObject
s(1).snMspsDigitalOutputTable(3).snMspsDigitalOutputEntry(1).snMsp
sDigitalOutputLevel(6)
• Values of the MIB variable
– 1: Digital output (DO) is open.
– 2: Digital output (DO) is closed.

Digital input
Using the private MIB variable snMspsDigitalInputLevel, you can read out the status of the digital
input.

Note
If the digital output changes status, an entry is made in the event protocol table.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 33
Description
3.10 Digital input / output

• OID of the private MIB variable snMspsDigitalInputLevel:

iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).siemen
s(4329).industrialComProducts(20).iComPlatforms(1).simaticNet(1).s
nMsps(1).snMspsCommon(1).snMspsDigitalIO(39).snMspsDigitalIOObject
s(1).snMspsDigitalInputTable(2).snMspsDigitalInputEntry(1).snMspsD
igitalInputLevel(6)
• Values of the MIB variable
– 1: Signal 0 at the digital input (DI)
– 2: Signal 1 at the digital input (DI)

MIB file
The MIB variables can be found in the file "SN-MSPS-DIGITAL-IO-MIB" that is part of the private
MIB file "[Link]". For more detailed information, refer to Appendix B "Private MIBs"
(Page 323).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

34 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Technical basics 4
4.1 PROFINET

PROFINET
PROFINET is an open standard (IEC 61158/61784) for industrial automation based on Industrial
Ethernet. PROFINET uses existing IT standards and allows end-to-end communication from the
field level to the management level as well as plant-wide engineering. PROFINET also has the
following features:
• Use of TCP/IP
• Automation of applications with real-time requirements
– Real-Time (RT) communication
– Isochronous Real-Time (IRT) communication
• Seamless integration of fieldbus systems
You configure PROFINET in "System > PROFINET (Page 187)".

PROFINET IO
Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communications concept for implementing
modular, distributed applications. PROFINET IO is implemented by the PROFINET standard for
programmable controllers (IEC 61158-x-10).

4.2 VLAN

Network definition regardless of the spatial location of the nodes

VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) divides a physical network into several logical networks that
are shielded from each other. Here, devices are grouped together to form logical groups. Only
nodes of the same VLAN can address each other. Since multicast and broadcast frames are only
forwarded within the particular VLAN, they are also known as broadcast domains.
The particular advantage of VLANs is the reduced network load for the nodes and network
segments of other VLANs.
For the identifier which frame is assigned to which VLAN, the frame is expanded by 4 bytes
(VLAN tagging). Apart from the VLAN-ID this expansion also includes priority information.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 35
Technical basics
4.3 MAC-based communication

Options for the VLAN assignment

There are various options for the assignment to VLANs:
• Port-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a VLAN ID. You configure port-based VLAN in "Layer 2 > VLAN
(Page 239)".
• Protocol-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a protocol group.
• Subnet-based VLAN
The IP address of the device is assigned a VLAN ID.

Doubly tagged frame (Q-in-Q)

There are devices e.g. SCALANCE XR500 that support the Q-in-Q function. With the Q-in-Q
function the incoming data traffic is treated as if it were untagged. With frames that are already
tagged ①, this means they are expanded by a second VLAN tag, the outer VLAN tag ②.

 

When a SCALANCE W device receives a doubly tagged frame, it uses the VLAN ID from the
outer VLAN tag ② and the priority information from the inner VLAN tag ①. The frame is
then forwarded to the relevant VLAN.

4.3 MAC-based communication

Frames sent by the client to the access point always have the MAC address of the WLAN client
as the source MAC address. In the "learning table" of the access point there is therefore only the
MAC address of the WLAN client.

MAC mode "Own"

If the MAC address of the Ethernet interface of the WLAN client is used (Own), the MAC-based
and IP-based frames only reach the WLAN client.
The access point checks whether the destination MAC address matches the MAC addresses of
the connected clients. Since a WLAN client can only use a MAC address, communication at
the MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) can be to a maximum of one node downstream from
the client or the client itself.
With IP Mapping, several nodes downstream from a client can be addressed based on the IP
protocol. The IP packets are broken down according to an internal table and forwarded to the
connected devices.
Maximum possible number of Ethernet nodes with layer 2 communication downstream from
the client: 1

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

36 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.4 iFeatures

MAC mode "Layer 2 Tunnel"

The WLAN client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
The access point is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet interface
of the WLAN client. This makes it possible to enter the MAC addresses of these devices in the
"learning table" of the access point. The access point can forward MAC-based frames for the
devices downstream from the client to the appropriate client.
In much the same way as with WDS or MESH, a separate port is created for the L2T client
over which the Ethernet frames are sent without changing the destination MAC address.
Performance statements from Siemens relating to real-time communication are calculated
with a maximum number of 8 Ethernet subscribers downstream from the client.

4.4 iFeatures

4.4.1 iPCF-2
The wireless range of an IWLAN system can be expanded by using multiple access points. If a
client is moved from the area covered by one access point to the area covered by another access
point, the wireless link is maintained after a short interruption (roaming). If very fast update
times and low latencies are required, for example for PROFINET communication, access points
and client modules need to be used that meet the requirements through proprietary
improvements, such as iPCF-2.
iPCF-2 and other iFeatures can only be operated alone. A combination with each other is not
possible.

How it works
iPCF
With iPCF the access point checks all nodes in the wireless cell cyclically. At the same time,
the scan includes the downlink traffic for this node. In the reply, the node sends the uplink
data. The access point scans a new node at least every 5 ms.
The scan of a node is seen by all other nodes in the cell. This allows a client to detect the
quality of the wireless link to the access point even when it is not communicating with the
access point itself. If the client does not receive any frames from the access point for a
certain time, it starts to search for a new access point.
In iPCF mode, both the search for a new access point and the registration with this access
point have been optimized in terms of time. Handover times significantly below 50 ms are
achieved.
The "Legacy Free (iPCF-LF)" setting is available to prevent the performance from being slowed
down by the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g device generation. When enabled, only the devices that
communicate with the IEEE 802.11n standard and have the "Legacy Free (iPCF-LF)" setting
enabled are accepted. WLAN mode IEEE 802.11n need not be enabled for this, however.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 37
Technical basics
4.4 iFeatures

Stable PROFINET communication is only possible when a WLAN client is in a wireless cell with
more than 60 % or -65 dBm signal strength at all times. This can be checked by activating
and deactivating the various wireless cells.
This does not mean that the client needs to change when there is a signal strength < 60 % (<
-65 dBm). Make sure that access points are available with adequate signal strength.
iPCF-HT and iPCF-MC are expansions of iPCF for the WLAN mode IEEE 802.11n. You can find
more information in the document "IWLAN: Configuring an Industrial Wireless LAN" under
the following entry ID:
90880063 ([Link]
iPCF-2
iPCF-2 is introduced according to IEEE 802.11ax for the first time with the firmware version
V2.0 of the SCALANCE W700 devices. The functionality will be expanded and improved
during the subsequent stages.
iPCF-2 in FW V2.0 consists of various proprietary mechanisms that enable real-time
communication along defined paths, such as absolute prioritization of PROFINET traffic, Fast
Transition and more.
The function "TCP Event > WLAN Roaming" enables rapid roaming through transfer of
parameters of the access point to which the client will establish a connection next after
the application.
You configure iPCF-2 under "iFeatures > iPCF-2 (Page 304)".

4.4.2 iPRP
The "Parallel Redundancy Protocol" (PRP) is a redundancy protocol for cabled networks. It is
defined in Part 3 of the IEC 62439 standard.
With the "industrial Parallel Redundancy Protocol" (iPRP) the PRP technology can be used in
wireless networks. This improves the availability of wireless communication.

How it works
A PRP network consists of two completely independent networks. If one network is disrupted,
the frames are sent without interruption/reconfiguration via the parallel redundant network. To
achieve this the Ethernet frames are sent to the recipient in duplicate via both networks. Devices
capable of PRP have at least two separate Ethernet interfaces that are connected to independent
networks.
With devices not capable of PRP a redundancy box (RedBox) is connected upstream. This
allows access for so-called Single Attached Nodes (SAN) to PRP networks. The RedBox
duplicates every Ethernet frame to be sent and adds a PRP trailer to the frame that among
other things contains a sequence number. The RedBox simultaneously sends a copy of the
frame to the PRP A and PRP B network. At the receiving end the duplicate frame is discarded
by the RedBox. For this the RedBox requires certain transfer times designed for Ethernet
networks. For this reason using PRP in WLAN networks results in duplicate and delayed
frames.
With iPRP, this problem is solved and the use of PRP in WLAN with SCALANCE W devices
becomes possible

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

38 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.4 iFeatures

6LQJOH$WWDFKHG1RGH
6$1
5HGXQGDQF\%R[
5HG%R[ 

353$ 353%

9/$19/$1 9/$19/$1
9/$19/$1

$FFHVV3RLQW$3 $FFHVV3RLQW$3 $FFHVV3RLQW$3

:/$1 :/$1 :/$1
9$3!9/$1 353$ 9$3!9/$1 353$ 9$3!9/$1 353$
9$3!9/$1 353% 3 9$3!9/$1 353% 3 9$3!9/$1 353% 3
9/$19/$1 9/$19/$1 9/$19/$1

9/$1 9/$1

&OLHQW$ &OLHQW%
:/$1!9/$1 353$ :/$1!9/$1 353% 
39/$19/$1 39/$19/$1

9/$1 353$ 9/$1 353%

353$ 353%

5HGXQGDQF\%R[
5HG%R[ 

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 6LQJOH$WWDFKHG1RGH
6$1

The access points (AP 1, AP 2 and AP 3) and the RedBox at the AP end are connected to each
other via a switch. PRP network A und B are separated from each other via VLANs.
If SAN1 sends a frame to SAN2, the frame is duplicated by the RedBox at the AP end and
the two redundant frames are transferred via the switch to the access points. Via the two
different wireless paths the redundant PRP frames are transferred to the RedBox at the client
end. The clients are also connected to their RedBox via a switch. This forwards the first PRP
frame to arrive to SAN2 and discards the second one.
With transfer paths that are not the same, iPRP reduces the number of duplicated and
out-of-order packets. The application/protocol used must be able to handle the remaining
duplicates and out-of-order packets.

Note
On the interfaces of the switches to the SCALANCE W devices, only the VLANs that are also set
on the VAP or WLAN interfaces of the SCALANCE W devices may be configured.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 39
Technical basics
4.5 SNMP

With iPRP the redundant partners (here: AP1 and AP3 or client A and client B) communicate
with each other via a switch to prevent the two redundant PRP frames from arriving at the
RedBox with too great a time difference.
If for example the communication between AP1 and client A is very slow, the slower frame is
discarded at the receiving end.
You configure iPRP in "iFeatures > iPRP (Page 306)".
Requirement
• iPRP can only be used with the CLP iFeatures (Page 29).
• The base bridge mode "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set.
• The VLANs have been created.
• Access point mode: The VAP interface is enabled.
• Client mode: In MAC mode "Layer 2 Tunnel" is set.
• Depending on the configuration the clients can communicate with every access point.
• The Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled.

4.5 SNMP

Introduction
With the aid of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), you monitor and control
network components from a central station, for example routers or switches. SNMP controls the
communication between the monitored devices and the monitoring station.
Tasks of SNMP:
• Monitoring of network components
• Remote control and remote parameter assignment of network components
• Error detection and error notification
In versions v1 and v2c, SNMP has no security mechanisms. Each user in the network can
access data and also change parameter assignments using suitable software.
For the simple control of access rights without security aspects, community strings are used.
The community string is transferred along with the query. If the community string is correct,
the SNMP agent responds and sends the requested data. If the community string is not
correct, the SNMP agent discards the query. Define different community strings for read and
write permissions. The community strings are transferred in plain text.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

40 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.5 SNMP

Standard values of the community strings:

• public
has only read permissions
• private
has read and write permissions
Note
Because the SNMP community strings are used for access protection, do not use the standard
values "public" or "private". Change these values following the initial commissioning.

Further simple protection mechanisms at the device level:

• Allowed Host
The IP addresses of the monitoring systems are known to the monitored system.
• Read Only
If you assign "Read Only" to a monitored device, monitoring stations can only read out data
but cannot modify it.
SNMP data packets are not encrypted and can easily be read by others.
The central station is also known as the management station. An SNMP agent is installed on
the devices to be monitored with which the management station exchanges data.
The management station sends data packets of the following type:
• GET
Request a data record from the SNMP agent
• GETNEXT
Calls up the next data record.
• GETBULK (available as of SNMPv2c)
Requests multiple data records at once, for example several rows of a table.
• SET
Contains parameter assignment data for the relevant device.
The SNMP agent sends data packets of the following type:
• RESPONSE
The SNMP agent returns the data requested by the manager.
• TRAP
If a certain event occurs, the SNMP agent itself sends traps.
• INFORM
Like a trap except that it is acknowledged by the receiver.
SNMPv1/v2c/v3 use UDP (User Datagram Protocol) and use the UDP ports 161 and 162. The
data is described in a Management Information Base (MIB).

SNMPv3
Compared with the previous versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 introduces an extensive
security concept.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 41
Technical basics
4.6 Spanning Tree

SNMPv3 supports:
• Fully encrypted user authentication
• Encryption of the entire data traffic
• Access control of the MIB objects at the user/group level
With the introduction of SNMPv3, you can no longer transfer user configurations to other
devices without taking special action, e.g. by loading a configuration file.
According to the standard, the SNMPv3 protocol uses a unique SNMP engine ID as an internal
identifier for an SNMP agent. This ID must be unique in the network. It is used to authenticate
access data of SNMPv3 users and to encrypt it.
Depending on whether you have enabled or disabled the “SNMPv3 User Migration” function,
the SNMP engine ID is generated differently.
Restriction when using the function
Use the "SNMPv3 User Migration" function only to transfer configured SNMPv3 users to a
substitute device when replacing a device.
Do not use the function to transfer configured SNMPv3 users to multiple devices. If you load
a configuration with created SNMPv3 users on several devices, these devices use the same
SNMP engine ID. If you use these devices in the same network, your configuration contradicts
the SNMP standard.
Compatibility with predecessor products
You can only transfer SNMPv3 users to a different device if you have created the users as
migratable users. To create a migratable user the "SNMPv3 User Migration" function must be
activated when you create the user.

4.6 Spanning Tree

Avoiding loops
The Spanning Tree algorithm detects redundant physical network structures and prevents the
formation of loops by disabling redundant paths. It evaluates the distance and performance of
a connection or bases the decisions on settings made by the user. Data is then exchanged only
over the remaining connection paths.
If the preferred data path fails, the Spanning Tree algorithm then searches for the most
efficient path possible with the remaining nodes.

Root bridge and bridge priority

The identification of the most efficient connection is always related to the root bridge, a network
component that can be considered as a root element of a tree-like network structure. With the
"Bridge Priority" parameter, you can influence the selection of the root bridge. The computer
with the lowest value set for this parameter automatically becomes the root bridge. If two
computers have the same priority value, the computer with the lower MAC address becomes the
root bridge.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

42 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.6 Spanning Tree

Response to changes in the network topology

If nodes are added to a network or drop out of the network, this may affect the optimum path
selection for data packets. To be able to respond to such changes, the root bridge sends
configuration messages (BPDUs) at regular intervals. You can set the interval between two
configuration messages with the "Hello Time" parameter.

Keeping configuration information up to date

With the "Max Age" parameter, you set the maximum age of configuration information. If a
bridge has information that is older than the time set in Max Age, it discards the message and
initiates recalculation of the paths.
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period
specified in the "Forward Delay" parameter. This ensures that operation is started with the
new topology only after all the bridges have the required information.

4.6.1 RSTP, MSTP, CIST

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

One disadvantage of STP is that if there is a disruption or a device fails, the network needs to
reconfigure itself: The devices start to negotiate new paths only when the interruption occurs.
This can take up to 30 seconds. Fur this reason, STP was expanded to create the "Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol" (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w). This differs from STP essentially in that the devices are
already collecting information about alternative routes during normal operation and do not
need to gather this information after a disruption has occurred. This means that the
reconfiguration time for an RSTP controlled network can be reduced to a few seconds.
This is achieved by using the following functions:
• Edge ports (end node port)
Edge ports are ports connected to an end device.
A port that is defined as an edge port is activated immediately after connection
establishment. If a spanning tree BPDU is received at an edge port, the port loses its role as
edge port and it takes part in (R)STP again. If no further BPDU is received after a certain time
has elapsed (3 x hello time), the port returns to the edge port status.
• Point-to-point (direct communication between two neighboring devices)

By directly linking the devices, a status change (reconfiguration of the ports) can be made
without any delays.
• Alternate port (substitute for the root port)

A substitute for the root port is configured. If the connection to the root bridge is lost, the
device can establish a connection over the alternate port without any delay due to
reconfiguration.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 43
Technical basics
4.7 User management

• Reaction to events

Rapid spanning tree reacts to events, for example an aborted connection, without delay.
There is no waiting for timers as in spanning tree.
• Counter for the maximum bridge hops
The number of bridge hops a package is allowed to make before it automatically becomes
invalid.
In principle, therefore with rapid spanning tree, alternatives for many parameters are
preconfigured and certain properties of the network structure taken into account to reduce
the reconfiguration time.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a further development of the Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol. Among other things, it provides the option of operating several RSTP instances within
different VLANs or VLAN groups and, for example, making paths available within the individual
VLANs that the single Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol would globally block.

Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)

CIST identifies the internal instance used by the switch that is comparable in principle with an
internal RSTP instance.

4.7 User management

Overview of user management

Access to the device is managed by configurable user settings. Set up users with a password for
authentication. Assign a role with suitable rights to the users.
The authentication of users can either be performed locally by the device or by an external
RADIUS server. You configure how the authentication is handled on the "Security > AAA >
General" page.

Note
Entered passwords cannot be read as plain text; instead asterisks * are displayed.

Local logon
The local logging on of users by the device runs as follows:
1. The user logs on with user name and password on the device.
2. The device checks whether an entry exists for the user.
→ If an entry exists, the user is logged in with the rights of the associated role.
→ If no corresponding entry exists, the user is denied access.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

44 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.7 User management

Login via an external RADIUS server

RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is a protocol for authenticating and
authorizing users by servers on which user data can be stored centrally.
Depending on the RADIUS authorization mode you have selected on the "Security > AAA >
RADIUS Client" page, the device evaluates different information of the RADIUS server.
RADIUS authorization mode "Standard"
If you have set the authorization mode "conventional", the authentication of users via a
RADIUS server runs as follows:
1. The user logs on with user name and password on the device.
2. The device sends an authentication request with the login data to the RADIUS server.
3. The RADIUS server runs a check and signals the result back to the device.
– The RADIUS server reports a successful authentication and returns the value
"Administrative User" to the device for the attribute "Service Type".
→ The user is logged in with administrator rights.
– The RADIUS server reports a successful authentication and returns a different or even no
value to the device for the attribute "Service Type".
→ The user is logged in with read rights.
– The RADIUS server reports a failed authentication to the device:
→ The user is denied access.
RADIUS authorization mode "Manufacturer-specific"
Requirement
For the RADIUS authorization mode "Siemens VSA" the following needs to be set on the
RADIUS server:
• Manufacturer code: 4196
• Attribute number: 1
• Attribute format: Character string (group name)
Procedure

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 45
Technical basics
4.8 NAT

If you have set the authorization mode "SiemensVSA", the authentication of users via a
RADIUS server runs as follows:
1. The user logs on with user name and password on the device.
2. The device sends an authentication request with the login data to the RADIUS server.
3. The RADIUS server runs a check and signals the result back to the device.
Case A: The RADIUS server reports a successful authentication and returns the group
assigned to the user to the device.
– The group is known on the device and the user is not entered in the table "External User
Accounts"
→ The user is logged in with the rights of the assigned group.
– The group is known on the device and the user is entered in the table "External User
Accounts"
→ The user is assigned the role with the higher rights and logged in with these rights.
– The group is not known on the device and the user is entered in the table "External User
Accounts"
→ The user is logged in with the rights of the role linked to the user account.
– The group is not known on the device and the user is not entered in the table "External
User Accounts"
→ The user is logged in with the rights of the role "Default".
Case B: The RADIUS server reports a successful authentication but does not return a group
to the device.
– The user is entered in the table "External User Accounts":
→ The user is logged in with the rights of the linked role.
– The user is not entered in the table "External User Accounts":
→ The user is logged in with the rights of the role "Default".
Case C: The RADIUS server reports a failed authentication to the device:
– The user is denied access.

4.8 NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation) is a method of translating IP addresses in data packets. With
this, two different networks (internal and external) can be connected together.
A distinction is made between source NAT in which the source IP address is translated and
destination NAT in which the destination IP address is translated.

IP masquerading
IP masquerading is a simplified source NAT. With each outgoing data packet sent via this
interface, the source IP address is replaced by the IP address of the interface. The adapted data
packet is sent to the destination IP address. For the destination host it appears as if the queries
always came from the same sender. The internal nodes cannot be reached directly from the
external network. By using NAPT, the services of the internal nodes can be made reachable via
the external IP address of the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

46 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.9 Network structures

IP masquerading can be used if the internal IP addresses cannot or should not be forwarded
externally, for example because the internal network structure should remain hidden.
You configure masquerading in "Layer 3" > "NAT" > "IP Masquerading (Page 265)".

NAPT
NAPT (Network Address and Port Translation) is a form of destination NAT and is often called port
forwarding.
Incoming data packets are translated that come from the external network and are intended
for an external IP address of the device (destination IP address). The destination IP address
is replaced by the IP address of the internal node. In addition to address translation, port
translation is also possible.
The options are available for port translation:

from to Response
a single port the same port If the ports are the same, the frames will be forwarded without port
translation.
a single port a single port The frames are translated to the port.
a port range a single port The frames from the port range are translated to the same port (n:1).
a port range the same port If the port ranges are the same, the frames will be forwarded without
range port translation.

Port forwarding can be used to allow external nodes access to certain services of the internal
network e.g. FTP, HTTP.
Configure NAPT under "Layer 3 (IPv4)" > "NAPT (Page 266)".

4.9 Network structures

The following article deals with the setup of various network structures using access points.

Standalone configuration with access point

This configuration does not require a server and the access point does not have a connection to
a wired Ethernet. Within its transmission range, the access point forwards data from one WLAN
node to another.
The wireless network has a unique name. All SCALANCE W devices exchanging data within
this network must be configured with this name.
The gray area in the graphic symbolizes the wireless range of the access point.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 47
Technical basics
4.9 Network structures

Wireless access to a wired Ethernet network

If one (or more) access points have access to wired Ethernet, the following applications are
possible:
• A single device as gateway:
A wireless network can be connected to a wired network via an access point.
• Span of wireless coverage for the wireless network with several access points:
The access points are all configured with the same unique SSID (network name). All nodes
that want to communicate over this network must also be configured with this SSID.
If a mobile station moves from the area covered by one access point to the area covered by
another access point, the wireless link is maintained (roaming).
The following graphic shows the wireless connection of a mobile station over two wireless
cells (roaming).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

48 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Technical basics
4.10 Possible applications

Multichannel configuration
If neighboring access points use the same frequency channel, this can lead to longer response
times due to any collisions that may occur. If the configuration shown in the figure is
implemented as a single-channel system, computers A and B cannot communicate at the same
time with the access points in their wireless cells.
If neighboring access points are set up for different frequencies, this leads to a considerable
improvement in performance. As a result, neighboring wireless cells each have their own
medium available and the delays resulting from time-offset transmission no longer occur.
The channel spacing should be as large as possible; a practical value is 25 MHz. Even in a
multichannel configuration, all access points can be configured with the same network name.
The following graphic shows a multichannel configuration on channels 1 and 2 with four
access points.

2
A
1
B
2

4.10 Possible applications

Note
The SIMATIC NET WLAN products use OpenSSL.
This is open source code with license conditions (BSD).
Please refer to the current license conditions.
Since the driver includes encryption software, you should also adhere to the appropriate
regulations for your specific country.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 49
Technical basics
4.11 IEEE 802.11r

4.11 IEEE 802.11r

During roaming, the WLAN client roams from one access point to the next. A delay time of
several 100 ms can come about at the connection transition.
The following steps can be executed during this time:
• Client searches for a new access point (scanning)
• Logon at a new access point (authentication and association)
• Allow a data connection via the new access point
Shorter delay times are required for time-critical applications, for example, Voice over IP. The
standard IEEE 802.11r contains amendments which optimize roaming and therefore is also
referred to as Fast BSS Transition (FT).
With FT, the WLAN client must not authenticate every time the access point changes. For this
purpose, the access points are grouped into a mobility domain. The WLAN client receives the
mobility domain ID from the first access point to which it logs on. The log-on information
is buffered within the mobility domain. This logon is valid for all members of the mobility
domain.
Based on the ID, the WLAN client recognizes whether the access point is a member of the
same mobility domain and can therefore log on without delay. Only WLAN clients with IEEE
802.11r support can use the improved roaming or handover functions.

Requirement
• The access points are members of the same mobility domain
• Only possible with the following encryptions:
– WPA2-PSK
– WPA2 RADIUS
– WPA3-SAE

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

50 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
IP addresses 5
5.1 IPv4 / IPv6

What are the essential differences?

IPv4 IPv6
IP configuration • DHCP server • Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC): Stateless au‐
• Manual toconfiguration using NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol)
– Creates a link local address for every interface that does
not require a router on the link.
– Checks the uniqueness of the address on the link that
requires no router on the link.
– Specifies whether the global addresses are obtained via
a stateless mechanism, a stateful mechanism or via
both mechanisms. (Requires a router on the link.)
• Manual
• DHCPv6 (stateful)
Available IP addresses 32-bit: 4, 29 * 10 address‐ 128-bit: 3, 4 * 1038 addresses
9

es
Address format Decimal: [Link] Hexadecimal: [Link]
with port: [Link]:20 with port: [Link]:20
Loopback [Link] ::1
IP addresses of the interface 5 IP addresses Multiple IP addresses
• LLA: A link local address (formed automatically) fe80::/128
per interface
• ULA: Several unique local unicast addresses per interface
• GUA: Several global unicast addresses per interface
Header • Checksum • Checking at a higher layer
• Variable length • Fixed size
• Fragmentation in the • Fragmentation in the extension header
header
• No security
Fragmentation Host and router Only endpoint of the communication
Quality of service Type of Service (ToS) for The prioritization is specified in the header field "Traffic Class".
prioritization
Types of frame Broadcast, multicast, uni‐ Multicast, unicast, anycast
cast

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 51
IP addresses
5.1 IPv4 / IPv6

IPv4 IPv6
Identification of DHCP clients/ Client ID: DUID + IAID(s) = exactly one interface of the host
server • MAC address DUID = DHCP unique identifier
• DHCP client ID Unique identifier of server and clients
• System name IAID = Identity Association Identifier
• PROFINET station name At least one per interface is generated by the client and remains
unchanged when the DHCP client restarts
• IAID and DUID
Three methods of obtaining the DUID
• DUID-LLT
• DUID-EN
• DUID-LL
DHCP via UDP with broadcast via UDP with unicast
RFC 3315, RFC 3363
Stateful DHCPv6
Stateful configuration in which the IPv6 address and the con‐
figuration settings are transferred.
Four DHVPv6 messages are exchanged between client and
server:
1. SOLICIT:
Sent by the DHCPv6 client to localize DHCPv6 servers.
2. ADVERTISE
The available DHCPv6 servers reply to this.
3. REQUEST
The DHCPv6 client requests an IPv6 address and the config‐
uration settings from the DHCPv6 server.
4. REPLY
The DHCPv6 server sends the IPv6 address and the config‐
uration settings.
If the client and server support the function "Rapid commit" the
procedure is shortened to two DHCPv6 messages SOLICIT and
REPLY .
Stateless DHCPv6
In stateless DHCPv6, only the configuration settings are trans‐
ferred.
Prefix delegation
The DHCPv6 server delegates the distribution of IPv6 prefixes to
the DHCPv6 client. The DHCPv6 client is also known as PD rout‐
er.
Resolution of IP addresses in ARP (Address Resolution NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol)
hardware addresses Protocol)

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

52 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 IP addresses
5.2 IPv4 address

5.2 IPv4 address

5.2.1 Structure of an IPv4 address

The IPv4 address consists of 4 decimal numbers separated by a dot. Each decimal number can
have a value from 0 to 255.
Example: [Link]
The IPv4 address is composed of:
• Address of the (sub)network
• The address of the node (generally also called end node, host or network node)

Subnet mask
The subnet mask consists of four decimal numbers with the range from 0 to 255, each number
separated by a period; example: [Link]
The binary representation of the 4 subnet mask decimal numbers must contain a series of
consecutive 1s from the left and a series of consecutive 0s from the right.
The "1" values determine the network address within the IPv4 address. The "0" values
determine the device address within the IPv4 address.
Example:
Correct values
[Link] D = 1111 1111.1111 1111.0000 0000.0000 0000 B
[Link] D = 1111 1111.1111 1111.1000 0000.0000 0000 B
[Link] D = 1111 1111.1111 1110.0000 0000.0000.0000 B
Incorrect value:
[Link] D = 1111 1111.1111 1111.0000 0001.0000 0000 B
In the example for the IP address mentioned above, the subnet mask shown here has the
following meaning:
The first 2 bytes of the IP address determine the subnet - i.e. 192.168. The last two bytes
address the device, i.e. 16.2.
The following applies in general:
• The network address results from the AND combination of IPv4 address and subnet mask.
• The device address results from the AND-NOT combination of IPv4 address and subnet mask.

Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)

CIDR is a method that groups several IPv4 addresses into an address range by representing an
IPv4 address combined with its subnet mask. To do this, a suffix is appended to the IPv4 address
that specifies the number of bits of the network mask set to 1. Using the CIDR notation, routing
tables can be reduced in size and the available address ranges put to better use.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 53
IP addresses
5.2 IPv4 address

Example:
IPv4 address [Link] with subnet mask [Link]
The network part of the address covers 3 x 8 bits in binary representation; in other words 24
bits.
This results in the CIDR notation [Link]/24.
The host part covers 1 x 8 bits in binary notation. This results in an address range of 2 to the
power 8, in other words 256 possible addresses.

Masking additional subnets

Using the subnet mask, you can further structure a subnet assigned to one of the address classes
A, B or C and form "private" subnets by setting further lower-level digits of the subnet mask to
"1". For each bit set to "1", the number of "private" networks doubles and the number of nodes
contained in them is halved. Externally, the network still looks like a single network.
Example:
You change the default subnet mask for a subnet of address class B (e.g. IP address
[Link]) as follows:

Masks Decimal Binary

Default subnet mask [Link] 11111111.11111111.00000000
.00000000
Subnet mask [Link] 11111111.11111111.10000000
.00000000

Result:
All devices with addresses from [Link] to [Link] are on one IP subnet, all
devices with addresses from [Link] to [Link] are on another IP subnet.

Network gateway (router)

The task of the network gateways (routers) is to connect the IP subnets. If an IP datagram is to
be sent to another network, it must first be sent to a router. For make this possible, you need to
enter the router address for each member of the IP subnet.
The IP address of a device in the subnet and the IP address of the network gateway (router)
may only be different at the points where the subnet mask is set to "0".

5.2.2 Initial assignment of an IPv4 address

Configuration options
An initial IP address for a SCALANCE W device cannot be assigned using Web Based Management
(WBM) or the Command Line Interface (CLI) over Telnet because these configuration tools
require that an IP address already exists.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

54 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 IP addresses
5.2 IPv4 address

The following options are available to assign an IP address to an unconfigured device

currently without an IP address:
• DHCP (default)
• SINEC PNI
• STEP 7
• SINEC NMS
Note
When the product ships and following "Restore Memory Defaults and Restart", DHCP is
enabled.
If a DHCP server is available in the local area network, and this responds to the DHCP request
of a SCALANCE W device, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway are assigned
automatically when the device first starts up. "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart" does not
delete an IP address assigned either by DHCP or by the user.

SINEC INS can be used as in-house DHCP server and assign IP addresses to devices in the
network.

5.2.3 Address assignment via DHCPv4

Properties of DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a method for automatic assignment of IPv4
addresses. It has the following characteristics:
• DHCP can be used both when starting up a device and during ongoing operation.
• The assigned IP address remains valid only for a limited time known as the lease time. When
half the period of validity has elapsed. the DHCP client can extend the period of the assigned
IPv4 address. When the entire time has elapsed, the DHCP client needs to request a new IPv4
address.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 55
IP addresses
5.2 IPv4 address

• There is normally no fixed address assignment; in other words, when a client requests an IP
address again, it normally receives a different address from the previous address. It is possible
to configure the DHCP server so that the DHCP client always receives the same fixed address
in response to its request. The parameter with which the DHCP client is identified for the
fixed address assignment is set on the DHCP client. The address can be assigned via the MAC
address, the DHCP client ID, PROFINET device name or the device name. You configure the
parameter in "System > DHCP Client (Page 154)".
• The following DHCP options are supported:
– DHCP option 66: Assignment of a dynamic TFTP server name
– DHCP option 67: Assignment of a dynamic boot file name

Note
DHCP uses a mechanism with which the IP address is assigned for only a short time (lease
time). If the device does not reach the DHCP server with a new request on expiry of the lease
time, the assigned IP address, the subnet mask and the gateway continue to be used.
The device therefore remains accessible under the last assigned IP address even without a
DHCP server. This is not the standard behavior of office devices but is necessary for problem-
free operation of the plant.

5.2.4 Address assignment with SINEC PNI

Introduction
The SINEC PNI is capable of assigning such an address to unconfigured devices that do not yet
have an IP address.

SINEC PNI
• To be able to assign an IP address to the device with SINEC PNI, it must be possible to reach
the device via Ethernet.
• You can find SINEC PNI on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support at the
following Link: ([Link]
• For additional information about assigning the IP address with SINEC PNI, refer to the online
help or the "SINEC PNI network management" operating instructions.

5.2.5 Address assignment with STEP 7

In STEP 7, you can configure the topology, the device name and the IP address; in other words,
an IP address is specified for the MAC address of the device. If you connect the unconfigured
device to the controller, the controller assigns the configured device name and the IP address to
the device automatically.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

56 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 IP addresses
5.3 IPv6 address

STEP 7 V5.x and earlier

For further information on the assignment of the IP address using STEP 7 V5.x and earlier, refer
to the documentation "Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections STEP 7", in the
section "Steps for Configuring a PROFINET IO System".

STEP 7 as of V13
For additional information on assigning the IP address using STEP 7 as of V13, refer to the online
help "Information system", section "Addressing PROFINET devices".

5.2.6 Address assignment with SINEC NMS

With SINEC NMS, you can detect and configure devices in the network.
• The device must be reachable via Ethernet.
• You can find SINEC NMS on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support at the
following link: ([Link]

5.3 IPv6 address

5.3.1 IPv6 terms

Network node
A network node is a device that is connected to one or more networks via one or more
interfaces.
Router
A network node that forwards IPv6 packets.
Host
A network node that represents an end point for IPv6 communication relations.
Link
A link is, according to IPv6 terminology, a direct layer 3 connection within an IPv6 network.
Neighbor
Two network nodes are called neighbors when they are located on the same link.
IPv6 interface
Physical or logical interface on which IPv6 is activated.
Path MTU
Maximum permitted packet size on a path from a sender to a recipient.
Path MTU discovery

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 57
IP addresses
5.3 IPv6 address

Mechanism for determining the maximum permitted packet size along the entire path from a
sender to a recipient.
LLA
Link local address FE80::/10
As soon as IPv6 is activated on the interface, a link local address is formed automatically. Can
only be reached by nodes located on the same link.
ULA
Unique Local Address
Defined in RFC 4193. The IPv6 interface can be reached via this address in the LAN.
GUA
Global unicast address
The IPv6 interface can be reached through this address, for example, via the Internet.
Interface ID
The interface ID is formed with the EUI-64 method or manually.
EUI-64
Extended Unique Identifier (RFC 4291); process for forming the interface ID. In Ethernet,
the interface ID is formed from the MAC address of the interface. Divides the MAC address
into the manufacturer-specific part (OUI) and the network-specific part (NIC) and inserts FFFE
between the two parts.
Example:
MAC address = [Link]
OUI = [Link]
NIC = [Link]
EUI-64 = OUI + FFFE + NIC = [Link]
Scope
Defines the range of the IPv6 address.

5.3.2 Structure of an IPv6 address

IPv6 address format - notation

IPv6 addresses consist of 8 fields each with four-character hexadecimal numbers (128 bits in
total). The fields are separated by a colon.
Example:
[Link]

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

58 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 IP addresses
5.3 IPv6 address

Rules / simplifications:
• If one or more fields have the value 0, a shortened notation is possible.
The address [Link] can also be shortened and written
as follows:
fd00::ffff:02d1:7d01:0000:8f21
To ensure uniqueness, this shortened form can only be used once within the entire address.
• Leading zeros within a field can be omitted.
The address [Link] can also be shortened and written
as follows:
fd00::ffff:2d1:7d01:0000:8f21
• Decimal notation with periods
The last 2 fields or 4 bytes can be written in the normal decimal notation with periods.
Example: The IPv6 address fd00::ffff.[Link] is equivalent to fd00::ffff:7d01:1

Structure of the IPv6 address

The IPv6 protocol distinguishes between three types of address: Unicast, Anycast and Multicast.
The following section describes the structure of the global unicast addresses.

IPv6 prefix Suffix

Global prefix: Subnet ID Interface ID
n bits m bits 128 - n - m bits
Assigned address Description of the location, also Unique assignment of the host in the net‐
range subnet prefix or subnet work.
The ID is generated from the MAC address.

The prefix for the link local address is always [Link]. The prefix is shortened
and noted as follows: fe80::

IPv6 prefix
Specified in: RFC 4291
The IPv6 prefix represents the subnet identifier.
Prefixes and IPv6 addresses are specified in the same way as with the CIDR notation (Classless
Inter-Domain Routing) for IPv4.
Design
IPv6 address / prefix length
Example
IPv6 address: [Link]/48
Prefix: [Link]/48
Interface ID: ::1111

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 59
IP addresses
5.3 IPv6 address

Entry and appearance

The entry of IPv6 addresses is possible in the notations described above. IPv6 addresses are
always shown in the hexadecimal notation.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

60 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Configuring with Web Based Management 6
6.1 Web Based Management
To access Web Based Management (WBM) of the device, make a remote connection between a
client PC and a device via the network. The device has an integrated HTTPS server for the WBM.
When you address a device using an Internet browser, it returns HTML pages to the client PC
depending on the user input.

Requirements
• The device has an IP address.
Note
Assign an IP address to the device using DHCP or SINEC PNI.

• There is a network connection between the device and the client PC.
• The network settings of the device and of the client PC match.
Note
You can use a ping to check whether a connection exists and communication is possible.

• Access via HTTP(S) is activated on the device.

• An Internet browser is available on the client PC.
• JavaScript is activated in the Internet browser.
• The Internet browser must not be configured in such a way that it reloads the page from the
server each time the page is accessed. The updating of the dynamic content of the page is
ensured by other mechanisms.
• If you are using a firewall, enable the corresponding ports.
– For access using HTTPS: TCP port 443
– For access using HTTP: TCP port 80

WBM display
The display of the WBM was tested with the following desktop Internet browsers:
• Mozilla Firefox
• Google Chrome
• Microsoft Edge
The WBM is tested with the current version of the Internet browser available at the time of
firmware release.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 61
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.1 Web Based Management

Display of the WBM on mobile devices

For mobile devices, the following minimum requirements must be met:

Resolution Operating system Internet browser

960 x 640 pixels Android as of version 4.2.1 Chrome as of version 18 on Android
iOS as of version 6.0.2 Safari as of version 6 on iOS

• Tested with the following Internet browsers for mobile devices:

– Safari as of version 8 on iOS as of V8.1.3 (iPad Mini Model A1432)
– Chrome as of version 46 on Android as of version 5.0.2 (Nexus 7C Asus)
– Firefox as of version 35 on Android as of version 5.0.2

Note
Display of the WBM and working with it on mobile devices
The display and operation of the WBM pages on mobile devices may differ compared with the
same pages on desktop devices. Some pages also have an optimized display for mobile devices.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

62 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.2 Login

6.2 Login

Establishing a connection to a device

Follow the steps below to establish a connection to a device using an Internet browser:
1. There is a connection between the device and the Admin PC. With the ping command, you
can check whether or not a device can be reached.
2. In the address field of the web browser, enter "[Link] followed by the IP address of the
device to be configured or its URL, e.g. [Link]
Access via HTTPS is enabled as default.
Note
Information on the security certificate
Because the device can only be administered using encrypted access, it is delivered with a
self-signed certificate. If certificates with signatures that the operating system does not know
are used, a security message is displayed. You can display the certificate.
A message relating to the security certificate appears. Acknowledge this message and
continue loading the page.
If you use a port other than the standard port, enter a colon ":" as separator between the IP
address and the port number.
Example: [Link]
You change the port in "System > Configuration".
3. If there is a connection to the device, the login page of Web Based Management (WBM) is
displayed.
If you wish to access the WBM via a non-secure HTTP connection, activate the HTTP server
under "System > Configuration". On the next login, click on the link "Switch to insecure HTTP"
on the login page or enter "[Link] and the IP address of the device in the address box of the
web browser.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 63
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.2 Login

Changing language
1. From the drop-down list at the top right, select the language version of the WBM pages.
2. Click the "Go" button to change to the selected language.
Note
Available languages
English and German are available as languages.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

64 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.2 Login

Logging in to WBM
You have the following options for logging in via HTTPS. You either use the login option in the
center of the browser window or the login option in the upper left area of the browser window.
The following steps apply, whichever of the above options you choose.
1. "Name" input box:
– When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart",
enter the user preset in the factory "admin".
With this user account, you can change the settings of the device (read and write access
to the configuration data).
– Enter the user name of the created user account. You configure local user accounts and
roles in "Security > Users".
2. "Password" input box:
– When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart",
enter the password of the default user preset in the factory "admin": "admin".
– Enter the password of the relevant user account.
Note
The password for the "admin" user has been changed for devices with the US version.
Specialist personnel for professional WLAN installations can obtain the password from
Siemens support.

3. Click the "Login" button or confirm your input with "Enter".

Note
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
can rename the "admin" user preset in the factory once. Afterwards, renaming "admin" is no
longer possible. Enter the new name in the corresponding text box.
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
are prompted to change the password.
The new password must meet the password policy "High":
– Password length: At least 8 characters, maximum 128 characters
– At least 1 uppercase letter
– At least 1 special character (special characters | § ? " ; : ß \ ² ³ ° € µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü are not
permitted)
– At least 1 number
– The characters for Space and Delete also cannot be contained.
4. Repeat the password to confirm. The password entries must match.
5. Click the "Set Values" button to complete the action.
The changes take immediate effect. Access via DCP is write-protected after the admin
password is changed. The network parameters can be read with SINEC PNI or with "DCP
Discovery" but cannot be changed.
Once you have logged in successfully, the start page appears.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 65
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Protection from brute force attacks

To protect against brute force attacks, login to the device is denied for a user or for the IP address
of a user after multiple failed login attempts. By default, the number of login attempts is preset
to 12 per user and 10 per IP address. The wait time for which the page is locked for new login
attempts increases after each invalid login attempt. You can change these settings on the page
"Security > Brute Force Prevention (Page 287)".

Service technician login

The device has a service technician login for servicing purposes. This is only available after
activation by an administrator and may only be used by Siemens Support.

6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.1 Start page

View of the Start page

When you enter the IP address of the device, the start page is displayed after a successful login.
You cannot configure anything on this page.

General layout of the WBM pages

The following areas are generally available on every WBM page:
• Selection area (1): Top area
• Display area (2): Top area

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

66 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Navigation area (3): Left-hand area

• Content area (4): Middle area

Selection area (1)

The following is available in the selection area:
• Logo of Siemens AG
• Display of: "System Location/System Name".
– "System Location" contains the location of the device.
In delivery state, the IP address of the Ethernet interface is displayed.
– "System Name" is the device name. In delivery state, the device type is displayed.
You can change the content of this display on the "System > General > Device" page.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 67
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Drop-down list for language selection

• System time and date
You can change the content of this display on the "System > System Time" page.
If the system time is not set, the status is . If the system time is configured, but the system
time cannot be synchronized, a yellow warning triangle can be seen. Check whether the
time server can be reached. If necessary adapt your configuration. If the system time is set
and/or can be synchronized, the status is .

Display area (2)

In the upper part of the display area, you can see name of the currently logged in user and the
full title of the currently selected menu item.
In the lower part of the display area, you will find:
• Logout
You can log out from any WBM page by clicking the "Logout" link.
• Device name
Shows the name of the device.
• Mode
Shows the mode.
• LED simulation
Each device has one or more LEDs that provide information on the operating state of the
device. Depending on its location, direct access to the device may not always be possible.
Web Based Management therefore displays simulated LEDs. Unused connectors are
displayed as gray LEDs. The meaning of the LED displays is described in the operating
instructions.
If you click this button, you open the window for the LED simulation. This window is displayed
for every menu item/submenu after opening and can be moved as desired. To close the LED
simulation, click the close button in the LED simulation window.
• Help
When you click this button, the help page of the currently selected menu item is opened in
a new browser window.
On every help page, there is an input box for the search function at the top edge. In this input
box, enter a term for which you need additional information and start the search by pressing
Enter. A dialog box displays a list of WBM pages that contain the term searched for. The
corresponding WBM page is opened in a new tab of the browser after a list element is clicked
• Printer
If you click this button, a popup window opens. The popup window contains a view of the
page content optimized for printers.
Note
Printing larger tables
If you want to print large tables, please use the "Print preview" function of your Internet
browser.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

68 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Favorites
When the product ships, the button is disabled on all pages .
If you click this button, the symbol changes and the currently open page or currently open
tab is marked as favorite. Once you have enabled the button once, the navigation area is
divided into two tabs. The first tab "Menu" contains all the available menus as previously. The
second tab "Favorites" contains all the pages/tabs that you selected as favorites. On the
"Favorites" tab the pages/tabs are arranged according to the structure in the "Menu" tab.
If you disable all the favorites you have created, the "Favorites" tab is removed again. To do
this, click the button on the relevant pages/tabs.
You can save, upload and delete the favorites configuration of a device on the "System >
Load&Save" page using HTTP or TFTP.
• Update on / Update off
WBM pages with overview lists can also have the additional "Update" button.
With this button, you can enable or disable updating of the content area. If updating is turned
on, the display is updated every 2 seconds. To disable the update, click "On". Instead of "On",
"Off" is displayed. As default, updating is always disabled on the WBM page.

Navigation area (3)

In the navigation area, you have various menus with submenus available.
The submenus contain pages on which information is available or with which you can create
configurations. These pages are always displayed in the content area.
You can expand or collapse menu entries in the navigation using the arrows. To expand the
menu entries, click on the right arrow. If you click on the left arrow, the menu entries are
collapsed again.

Content area (4)

The content area shows a graphic of the device. The graphic always shows the device whose
WBM you have called up.
The following is displayed below the picture of the device:
• PROFINET Name of Station
Shows the PROFINET device name.
• System Name
Shows the name of the device.
• Device Type
Shows the type designation of the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 69
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• PROFINET AR Status
Shows the PROFINET application relation status.
– Online
There is a connection to a PROFINET controller. The PROFINET controller has downloaded
its configuration data to the device. The device can send status data to the PROFINET
controller.
In this status, the parameters set by the PROFINET controller cannot be configured on the
device.
– Offline
There is no connection to a PROFINET controller.
• Power Line 1 / Power Line 2 / Power over Ethernet
Status of the power supplies 1 and 2 or power over Ethernet. The power line 2 and Power over
Ethernet are only displayed if they are supported by the hardware. You can find additional
information on this in the operating instructions.
• PLUG configuration (not with WxB762-1)
Shows the status of the configuration data on the PLUG, refer to the section "System > PLUG
> PLUG Configuration".
• PLUG license (not with WxB762-1)
Shows the status of the license on the PLUG, refer to the section "System > PLUG > PLUG
License".
• Fault Status
Shows the fault status of the device.
• Packet Capture
Shows the status of the "Packet Capture" function at the interface (Ethernet, WLAN).
Buttons you require often
The pages of the WBM contain the following standard buttons:
• Refresh the display with "Refresh"
Web Based Management pages that display current parameters have a "Refresh" button at
the bottom edge of the page. Click this button to request up-to-date information from the
device for the current page.
Note
If you click the "Refresh" button, before you have transferred your configuration changes to
the device using the "Set Values" button, your changes will be deleted and the previous
configuration will be loaded from the device and displayed here.

• Save entries with "Set Values"

Pages in which you can make configuration settings have a "Set Values" button at the lower
edge. The button only becomes active if you change at least one value on the page. Click this
button to save the configuration data you have entered on the device. Once you have saved,
the button becomes inactive again.
Note
Changing configuration data is possible only with the "admin" login.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

70 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Create entries with "Create"

Pages in which you can make new entries have a "Create" button at the lower edge. Click this
button to create a new entry. When you create an entry, the page is refreshed
• Delete entries with "Delete"
Pages in which you can delete entries have a "Delete" button at the lower edge. Click this
button to delete the previously selected entries from the device memory. When you delete
an entry, the page is refreshed.
• Page down with "Next"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Next" button
to page down through the data records.
• Page back with "Prev"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Prev" button
to page back through the data records.
• Delete the display with "Clear"
In pages with sequence logs, you can delete all table entries at the same time regardless of
whether filters are selected. The display is cleared in this process. The restart counter is only
reset after you have restored the device to the factory settings and restarted the device.
Click the "Clear" button to completely delete the data set.
• Button "Show all"
You can show all entries in pages with a large number of data sets. Click "Show all" to display
all entries on the page. Note that displaying all messages can take some time.
• Drop-down list for page change
In pages with a large number of data records, you can navigate to the desired page. From the
drop-down list, select the affected page to display it.
• "Reset Counters" button
Click "Reset Counters" to reset all counters. The counters are also reset by a restart.

Messages
If you have enabled the "Automatic Save" mode and you change a parameter the following
message appears in the display area "Changes will be saved automatically in x seconds. Press
'Write Startup Config' to save the changes immediately."

Note
Interrupting the save
Saving starts only after the timer in the message has elapsed. How long saving takes depends
on the device.
During the save, the message "Saving configuration data in progress. Please do not switch off the
device" is displayed.
• Do not switch off the device immediately after the timer has elapsed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 71
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.2 Versions

Versions of hardware and software

This page shows the versions of the hardware and software of the device. You cannot configure
anything on this page.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Hardware
– Basic Device
Shows the basic device.
• Name
Shows the name of the device or module.
• Revision
Shows the hardware version of the device.
• Article number
Shows the article number of the device or described module.
Table 2 has the following columns:
• Software
– Firmware
Shows the current firmware version. If a new firmware file was downloaded and the
device has not yet restarted, the firmware version of the downloaded firmware file is
displayed here. After the next restart, the downloaded firmware is activated and used.
– Bootloader
Shows the version of the boot software stored on the device.
– Firmware_Running
Shows the firmware version currently being used on the device.
• Description
Shows the short description of the software.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

72 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Version
Shows the version number of the software version.
• Date
Shows the date on which the software version was created.

6.3.3 I&M

Identification and maintenance data

This page contains information about device-specific vendor and maintenance data such as the
article number, serial number, version numbers etc. You cannot configure anything on this page.

Description
The table has the following rows:
• Manufacturer ID
Shows the manufacturer ID.
• Article number
Shows the article number.
• Basic MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the IPv4 interface.
• Serial Number
Shows the serial number.
• Hardware Revision
Shows the hardware version.
• Software Revision
Shows the software version.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 73
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Function tag
Shows the function tag (plant designation) of the device. The plant designation (HID) is
created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
• Location tag
Shows the location tag of the device. The location identifier (LID) is created during
configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
• Date
Shows the date created by STEP 7 during configuration of the device with HW Config.
• Descriptor
Shows the description created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.

6.3.4 ARP / neighbors

[Link] ARP-Tabelle

Assignment of MAC address and IPv4 address

With the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), there is a unique assignment of MAC address to IPv4
address. This assignment is kept by each network node in its own separate ARP table. The WBM
page shows the ARP table of the device.

Description of the displayed values

The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Shows the interface via which the row entry was learnt.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the destination or source device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

74 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• IP Address
Shows the IPv4 address of the destination device.
• Media Type
Shows the type of connection.
– Dynamic
The device recognized the address data automatically.
– Static
The addresses were entered as static addresses.

[Link] IPv6 Neighbor Table

Assignment of MAC address and IPv6 address

Via the IPv6 neighbor table, there is a unique assignment of MAC address to IPv6 address. This
assignment is kept by each network node in its own separate neighbor table.

Description of the displayed values

The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Displays the interface via which the row entry was learnt.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the destination or source device.
• IP Address
Shows the IPv6 address of the destination device.
• Media Type
Shows the type of connection.
– Dynamic
The device recognized the address data automatically.
– Static
The addresses were entered as static addresses.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 75
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.5 Log Tables

[Link] Event Log

Logging events
The device allows you to log occurring events, some of which you can specify on the page of the
System > Events menu. This, for example, allows you to record when an authentication attempt
failed or when the connection status of a port has changed.
The content of the events log table is retained even when the device is turned off.
You cannot configure anything on this page.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
Severity filter

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

76 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

You can filter the entries in the table according to severity. Select the required entries in the
check boxes above the table.

Note
A maximum of 2000 entries in the table are possible for each severity. If the maximum number
of entries is reached for a severity, the oldest entries of this severity are overwritten in the table.
The table remains permanently in the memory.
Under "System > Event > Configuration", you can specify a limit for the entries for each severity
with "Log Table Alarm Threshold". If the specified limit will be reached with the next entry, an
alarm message is output.

• Info
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Info" are displayed.
• Warning
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Warning" are displayed.
• Critical
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Critical" are displayed.
To display all entries, either select all of them or leave the check boxes empty.
The table has the following columns:
• Restart
Counts the number of restarts since you last reset to factory settings and shows the device
restart after which the corresponding event occurred.
• System Up Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described event
occurred.
• System Time
Shows the system time in the format MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss.
If the system time is set, the date and time of the described occurring event is displayed.
If no system time is set or time synchronization has not yet taken place, the system time that
has elapsed since the last restart is shown. After a restart, the time of day begins at
01/01/2000 [Link].
• Severity
Shows the severity of the message.
• Log Message
Displays a brief description of the event that has occurred. You will find the list of possible
messages in Appendix D (Page 327) of the configuration manual.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 77
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] WLAN authentication log

Logging authentication attempts

This page shows a table with information on successful or failed authentication attempts.

You cannot configure anything on this page.

Description
• Severity Filters
You can filter the entries in the table according to severity. To display all the entries, enable
or disable all parameters.
Note
A maximum of 2000 entries in the table are possible for each severity. If the maximum
number of entries is reached for a severity, the oldest entries of this severity are overwritten
in the table. The table remains permanently in the memory.

– Info
Information
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Info" are displayed.
– Warning
Warnings
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Warning" are displayed.
– Critical
Critical
When this parameter is enabled, all entries of the category "Critical" are displayed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

78 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

The table has the following columns:

• Restart
Counts the number of restarts since you last reset to factory settings and shows the device
restart after which the corresponding event occurred.
• System Up Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described event
occurred.
• System Time
Shows the system time in the format MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss.
If the system time is set, the date and time of the described occurring event is displayed.
If no system time is set or time synchronization has not yet taken place, the system time that
has elapsed since the last restart is shown. After a restart, the time of day begins at
01/01/2000 [Link].
• Severity
Shows the severity of the message.
• Log Message
Displays a brief description of the event that has occurred. You will find the list of possible
messages in Appendix D (Page 327) of the configuration manual.

6.3.6 Faults

Error status
If a fault occurs, it is shown on this page. On the device, faults are indicated by the red fault LED
lighting up.
Internal faults of the device and faults that you configure on the following pages are
indicated:
• "System > Events"
• "System > Fault Monitoring"
The calculation of the time of a fault always begins after the last system start. If there are no
faults present, the fault LED switches off.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 79
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• No. of Signaled Faults
Indicates how often the fault LED lit up and not how many faults occurred.
The table contains the following columns:
• Fault Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described fault
occurred.
• Fault Description
Displays a brief description of the error/fault that has occurred.
• Clear Fault State
Some faults can be acknowledged and thus removed from the fault list, e.g. a fault of the
event "Cold/Warm Start". You can acknowledge these faults or remove them from the fault
list with the "Clear Fault State" button.

6.3.7 Redundancy

Introduction
The page shows the current information about the Spanning Tree and the settings of the root
bridge.
If Spanning Tree is turned off, only the basic information about this device is displayed.

If Spanning Tree is turned on, the information about the status of the instance selected in
the "Instance ID" drop-down list is displayed and the information about the configured ports
is shown in the table. The information shown depends on the Spanning Tree mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

80 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Spanning Tree Mode
Shows the set mode. You specify the mode in "Layer 2 > Spanning Tree".
The following values are possible:
– '-'
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP
• Instance ID
Shows the number of the instance. The parameter depends on the configured mode.
• Bridge Priority / Root Priority
Which device becomes the root bridge is decided based on the bridge priority. The bridge
with the highest priority (in other words, with the lowest value for this parameter) becomes
the root bridge. If several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose MAC
address has the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both parameters, bridge
priority and MAC address together form the bridge identifier. Since the root bridge manages
all path changes, it should be located as centrally as possible due to the delay of the frames.
The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of 4096 with a range of values from 0 to
32768.
• Bridge Address / Root Address
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows the MAC
address of the root bridge.
• Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 81
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Regional root priority (available only with MSTP)

For a description, see Bridge priority / Root priority
• Regional root address (available only with MSTP)
Shows the MAC address of the regional root bridge.
• Regional Root Cost (available only with MSTP)
Shows the path costs from this device to the regional root bridge.
The table contains the following boxes:
• Port
Shows the port via which the device communicates.
• Role
Shows the status of the port. The following values are possible:
– Disabled
The port was removed manually from the spanning tree and will no longer be taken into
account by the spanning tree.
– Designated
The port with the most favorable connection to a lower-level LAN segment. When RSTP
starts, switches evaluate connections based on BPDUs. The most favorable connections
are then used. Generally, all root bridge RSTP ports are Designated Ports because they are
set to forwarding. The path costs and the port ID of the respective port determine which
ports of the remaining nodes are selected as Designated Ports.
– Alternate
The port with an alternative route to a network segment.
– Backup
The port on which BPDUs from a port of the same switch that has a better connection to
the root are received.
– Root
The port that provides the best route to the root bridge.
– Master
This port points to a root bridge located outside the MST region.
• State
Displays the current state of the port. The values are only displayed. The parameter depends
on the configured protocol. The following states are possible:
– Discarding
The port receives BPDU frames. Other incoming or outgoing frames are discarded.
– Listening
The port receives and sends BPDU frames. The port is involved in the spanning tree
algorithm. Other outgoing and incoming frames are discarded.
– Learning
The port actively learns the topology; in other words, the node addresses. Other outgoing
and incoming frames are discarded.
– Forwarding
Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network. The port receives
and sends data frames.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

82 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Oper. Version
Describes the type of spanning tree in which the port operates
• Priority
If the path calculated by the spanning tree is possible over several ports of a device, the port
with the highest priority (in other words the lowest value for this parameter) is selected. A
value between 0 and 240 can be entered for the priority in steps of 16. If you enter a value
that cannot be divided by 16, the value is automatically adapted. The default is 128.
• Path Cost
This parameter is used to calculate the path that will be selected. The path with the lowest
value is selected as the route. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with
the lowest port number is selected.
The calculation of the path costs is based largely on the transmission speed. The higher the
achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 10,000 Mbps = 2,000
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
• Edge Type
Shows the type of the connection. The following values are possible:
– Edge Port

An edge port is connected to this port.

– No Edge Port
There is a spanning tree or rapid spanning tree device at this port.
• P.t.P. Type
Shows the type of the point-to-point link. The following values are possible:
– P.t.P.
With half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.
– Shared Media

With a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.

Note
Point-to-point link means a direct connection between two devices. A shared media
connection is, for example, a connection to a hub.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 83
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.8 Ethernet Statistics

[Link] Interface Statistics

The page shows the statistics from the interface table of the Management Information Base
(MIB). You cannot configure anything on this page.

Description
• Interface
Shows the available interfaces.
• In Octet
Shows the number of received bytes.
• Out Octet
Shows the number of sent bytes.
• In Unicast
Shows the number of received unicast frames.
• In Non Unicast
Shows the number of received frames that are not of the type unicast.
• Out Unicast
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
• Out Non Unicast
Shows the number of sent frames that are not of the type unicast.
• In Errors
Shows the number of all possible RX errors, refer to the "Packet Error" tab.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

84 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] Packet Size

Frames sorted by length

This page displays how many frames of which size were received at each port. You cannot
configure anything on this page.

Description
• Port
Shows the available ports.
• Frame lengths
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of incoming frames
according to their frame length.
The following frame lengths are distinguished:
– 64 bytes
– 65 - 127 bytes
– 128 - 255 bytes
– 256 - 511 bytes
– 512 - 1023 bytes
– 1024 - Max.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 85
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] Packet Type

Received frames sorted by type

This page displays how many frames of the type "Unicast", "Multicast", and "Broadcast" were
received at each port. You cannot configure anything on this page.

Description
• Port
Shows the available ports.
• Unicast/Multicast /Broadcast
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their frame type "Unicast", "Multicast" and "Broadcast"

[Link] Packet Error

Received bad frames

This page shows how many bad frames were received per port. You cannot configure anything
on this page.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

86 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
• Port
Shows the available ports.
• Error types
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their error.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following errors:
– CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Code)
The packet length is between 64 and 2048 bytes. The CRC of the packet is invalid.
– Undersize
The packet length is less than 64 bytes. The CRC of the packet is valid.
– Oversize
The packet size is more than 2048 bytes. The CRC of the packet is valid.
– Fragments
The packet length is less than 64 bytes. The CRC of the packet is invalid.
– Jabbers
The frame length is more than 2048 bytes. The CRC of the packet is invalid.
– Collisions
Frames in which a collision event was detected.

6.3.9 Learning Table

Address filtering
This WBM page shows the current content of the learning table. This table lists the source
addresses of unicast address frames.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 87
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table contains the following columns:
• VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID of the node.
Note
This column appears in the table only if a VLAN is configured.

• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the node.
• Status
Shows the status of each address entry:
– Learnt
The specified address was learned by receiving a frame from this node and will be deleted
when the aging time expires if no further packets are received from this node.
– Invalid
These values are not evaluated.
• Port
Shows the port via which the node with the specified address can be reached. Frames
received by the device whose destination address matches this address will be forwarded to
this port.

6.3.10 LLDP

Status of the neighborhood table

This page shows the current content of the neighborhood table. This table stores the
information that the LLDP agent has received from connected devices.
You set the interfaces via which the LLDP agent receives or sends information in the
following section: "Layer 2 > LLDP".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

88 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table contains the following columns:
• System Name
System name of the connected device.
• Device ID
Device ID of the connected device. The device ID corresponds to the device name assigned
via SINEC PNI (STEP 7). If no device name is assigned, the MAC address of the device is
displayed.
• Local Interface
Port at which the device received the information.
• Hold Time[s]
Hold time in seconds
An entry remains stored on the device for the time specified here. If the device does not
receive any new information from the connected device during this time, the entry is deleted.
• Capability
Shows the properties of the connected device:
– Router
– Bridge
– Telephone
– DOCSIS Cable Device
– WLAN Access Point
– Repeater
– Station
– Other
• Port ID
Port of the device with which the device is connected. If no port ID is assigned, the MAC
address of the connected device is shown.

6.3.11 IPv4 Routing

Introduction
This page shows the routes currently being used.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 89
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Destination Network
Shows the destination address of this route.
• Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of this route.
• Gateway
Shows the gateway for this route.
• Interface
Shows the interface for this route.
• Metric
Shows the metric of the route. The higher value, the longer packets require to their
destination.
• Routing Protocol
Shows the routing protocol from which the entry in the routing table originates. The
following entries are possible:
– Connected: Connected routes
– Static: Static routes
– DHCP: Routes via DHCP

6.3.12 IPv6-Routing

Introduction
This page shows the IPv6 routes currently being used.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Destination Network
Shows the destination address of this route.
• Prefix Length
Shows the prefix length of this route.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

90 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Gateway
Shows the gateway for this route.
• Interface
Shows the interface for this route.
• Metric
Shows the metric of the route. The higher value, the longer packets require to their
destination.
• Routing Protocol
Shows the routing protocol from which the entry in the routing table originates. The
following entries are possible:
– Connected: Connected routes
– Static: Static routes
– RIPng: Routes via RIPng
– OSPFv3: Routes via OSPFv3
– Other: Other routes

6.3.13 SNMP
This page displays the created SNMPv3 groups. You configure the SNMPv3 groups in "System >
SNMP".

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Group Name
Shows the group name.
• User Name
Shows the user that is assigned to the group.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 91
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.14 Security

[Link] Overview
This page shows the security settings and the local and external user accounts.

Description
Services

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

92 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

The "Services" list shows the security settings.

• Telnet Server
You configure the setting in "System > Configuration".
– Enabled: Unencrypted access to the CLI.
– Disabled: No unencrypted access to the CLI.
• SSH Server
You configure the setting in "System > Configuration".
– Enabled: Encrypted access to the CLI.
– Disabled: No encrypted access to the CLI.
• SSH fingerprint
Shows the SSH fingerprint. You can uniquely identify the device with the fingerprints shown.
• Webserver
You configure the setting in "System > Configuration".
– HTTPS
Access to the WBM is only possible with HTTPS.
– HTTP/HTTPS
Access to the WBM is possible with HTTP and HTTPS.
– Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
Access via HTTP is automatically diverted to HTTPS.
• SNMP
You can configure the setting in "System > SNMP > General".
– "-" (SNMP disabled)
Access to device parameters via SNMP is not possible.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP versions 1, 2c or 3.
– SNMPv3
Access to device parameters is possible only with SNMP version 3.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 93
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Login Authentication
Configure the setting under "Security > AAA > General".
– Local
The authentication must be made locally on the device.
– RADIUS
The authentication must be handled via a RADIUS server.
– Local and RADIUS
The authentication is possible both with the users that exist on the device (user name and
password) and via a RADIUS server.
The user is first searched for in the local database. If the user does not exist there, a RADIUS
request is sent.
– RADIUS and fallback Local
The authentication must be handled via a RADIUS server.
A local authentication is performed only when the RADIUS server cannot be reached in
the network.
• Password Policy
Shows which password policy is currently being used.
Local and external user accounts
Configure local user accounts and roles under "Security > Users".
When you create a local user account an external user account is generated automatically.
Local user accounts involve users each with a password for logging in on the device.
In the "External User Accounts" table, a user is linked to a role, e.g. the "user" role is assigned
to the "Service" user. The user is defined on a RADIUS server. The role is defined locally on
the device. When a RADIUS server authenticates a user, the corresponding group however is
unknown or does not exist, the device checks whether or not there is an entry for the user
in the table "External User Accounts". If an entry exists, the user is logged in with the rights
of the associated role. If the corresponding group is known on the device, both tables are
evaluated. The user is assigned the role with the higher rights.

Note
The table "External User Accounts" is only evaluated if you have set "SiemensVSA" in the RADIUS
Authorization Mode.

With CLI you can access external user accounts.

The "Local User Accounts" and "External User Accounts" tables have the following columns:
• User Account
Shows the name of the local user.
• Role
Shows the role of the user. You can obtain more information on the function rights of the role
in "Information > Security > Roles".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

94 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] Supported Function Rights

Note
The values displayed depend on the role of the logged-on user.

The page shows the function rights available locally on the device.

Description of the displayed values

• Function Right
Shows the number of the function right. Different rights relating to the device parameters are
assigned to the numbers.
• Description
Shows the description of the function right.

[Link] Roles

Note
The values displayed depend on the role of the logged-on user.

The page shows the roles valid locally on the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 95
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table contains the following columns:
• Role
Shows the name of the role.
• Function Right
Shows the function right of the role:
– 1
Users with this role can read device parameters but cannot change them.
– 15
Users with this role can both read and change device parameters.
– 0
This is a role that the device assigns internally when a user could not be authenticated.
The user is denied access to the device.
• Description
Shows a description of the role.

[Link] Groups

Note
The values displayed depend on the role of the logged-on user.

This page shows which group is linked to which role. The group is defined on a RADIUS
server. The roll is defined locally on the device.

Description of the displayed values

The table has the following columns:
• Group
Shows the name of the group. The name matches the group on the RADIUS server.
• Role
Shows the name of the role. Users who are authenticated with the linked group on the
RADIUS server receive the rights of this role locally on the device.
• Description
Shows a description for the link.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

96 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] Inter AP blocking

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

The WBM page shows a list of the devices with which the clients are allowed to communicate.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces to which the settings relate.
• Port
Shows the VAP interface to which the settings relate.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the device with which the client may communicate.
• IP Address
Shows the IPv4 address of the device with which the client may communicate.
• Resolver IP Address
Shows the IPv4 address with which the access point resolves the permitted IPv4 address.

6.3.15 WLAN

[Link] Overview AP

Note
This page is available only in access point mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 97
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Overview of the configuration

This page shows the settings/properties of the access point.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard "802.11h" is
not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard with the suffix "DFS".
• Configured Channel
Shows the configured channel. If "Auto" is displayed, the access point searches for a free
channel itself.
• Alternative DFS Channel
If the DFS function is enabled, the configured alternative channel of the access point is
displayed.
If "Auto" is displayed, the access point searches for an alternative channel itself.
If the DFS function is activated and the access point searches for competing radar signals for
60 seconds before starting communication with the selected channel, the text "scanning ..."
is displayed instead of the channel.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

98 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Operational channel
Shows the channel including the frequency via which the access point communicates.
At 80 MHz the channel range is displayed additionally.
• Channel Width [MHz]
Shows the set channel bandwidth.
– 20 MHz
– 40 MHz (only with IEEE 802.11n/ac/ax)
– 80 MHz (only with IEEE 802.11ac/ax)
• iFeatures
Shows which iFeatures are used.
– "-"
iFeatures are not used.
– iPRP
– iPCF-2
• Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.
Table 2 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
• Port
Shows the port of the virtual access point (VAP).
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the virtual access point.
• SSID
Shows the SSID.
• PMF
Shows whether the management frames are cryptographically protected.
– disabled
The management frames are not encrypted.
– required
The management frames are always encrypted. A connection of the WLAN clients to the
access point is only possible when these also support PMF.
– optional
The management frames are encrypted or unencrypted depending on support of the
WLAN client.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 99
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used, the
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" authentication method is displayed for both.
If the access point is connected to a client that supports Fast BSS Transition, "FT" is displayed
in addition to the authentication method.
• Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.

[Link] Client List

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

Associated stations
The WBM page shows the clients logged on to the access point as well as additional information,
for example status, signal strength, MAC address.

Description
• Associated stations
Shows the number of clients logged in to the access point.
The table has the following columns:
• AID (Associated ID)
Shows the connection ID of the client. If the client connects to the access point via the VAP
interface, the client is assigned a connection ID. The connection ID is unique within a VAP
interface. If two clients log in at different VAP interfaces, both clients can receive the same ID.
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

100 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• Port
Shows the VAP interface.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Type
Shows the client type, for example "Sta" stands for IEEE 802.11 standard client.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the client.
• System Name
Shows the system name of the client if the client communicates this to the access point. Not
all clients support this parameter.
• Channel
Shows the channel over which the client communicates with the access point.
• Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client in decibel milliwatts.
• Signal strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client as a percentage.
• Age [s]
Shows the time that has elapsed since the last client activity.
• Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
• WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard "802.11h" is
not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard. e.g. "802.11a".
• Max. Data Rate (Mbps)
Shows the maximum data transmission speed in megabits per second.
• State
Shows the current state of the connection, for example "connected" that means the client is
connected to the access point and is ready to communicate with the AP.

[Link] Overlap AP

Note
This page is available only in access point mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 101
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Overlapping channels
For optimum data throughput, it is important that the set wireless channel is not used by other
access points. In the 2.4 GHz band (802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n), the channels overlap, so that
an access point not only occupies the configured channel, but also the neighboring 2-3
channels. You should therefore make sure that there is adequate channel spacing to
neighboring access points.
The WBM page shows all access points that are visible on the set channel at 2.4 GHz or
at 5 GHz. If entries exist here, the maximum data throughput of the access point and the
availability of the communication link to the access point is potentially impaired.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Aging Time [min]
Specify the life time of the entries in the list. If an access point is inactive for longer than the
set time, it is removed from the list.
Note
Changing the aging time
The aging time is a WLAN setting. For this reason, if a change is made, the WLAN connection
is briefly interrupted to accept the new value.

Table 2 has the following columns:

• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Type
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
• SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

102 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point.
• System Name
Shows the system name of the SCALANCE W device. The entry depends on the access point.
Not all access points support this parameter.
• Channel
Indicates the channel over which the access point is communicating.
• Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the access point in decibel milliwatts.
• Signal strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the access point as a percentage.
• Age [s]
Shows the time that has elapsed since the last access point activity.
• Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
• WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard "802.11h" is
not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard with the suffix "DFS".

[Link] Overview Client

Overview of the configuration

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

The page shows an overview of the existing clients and their configuration.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 103
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard.
• MAC Mode
Shows how the MAC address is assigned to the interface.
– Own
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
– Layer 2 Tunnel
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface. The
network is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet interface of the
client. Up to eight MAC addresses can be used.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the WLAN interface.
• Operational channel
Shows the channel including frequency of the access point to which the client is connected.
• Channel Width [MHz]
Shows the set channel bandwidth.
– 20 MHz
– 40 MHz (only with IEEE 802.11n/ac/ax)
– 80 MHz (only with IEEE 802.11ac/ax)
• Connected BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point to which the client is connected.
• Connected SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point to which the client is connected.
• PMF
Shows whether the management frames are cryptographically protected.
– disabled
The management frames are not encrypted.
– required
The management frames are always encrypted. A connection of the WLAN clients to the
access point is only possible when these also support PMF.
– optional
The management frames are encrypted or unencrypted depending on support of the
access point.
• Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the client is connected to an access point that supports Fast BSS Transition, "FT" is displayed
in addition to the authentication method.
• Context
Shows which security context is used.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

104 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

• iFeatures
Shows which iFeatures are used.
– "-"
iFeatures are not used.
– iPRP
• Max. Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the maximum data transmission speed in megabits per second.
• Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.

[Link] Available APs

Available access points

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

This page shows all the access points visible to the client. The list also includes the access
points to which the client cannot connect due to its configuration.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 105
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface visible to the access point.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point.
• BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point.
• System Name
Shows the system name of the access point. The entry depends on the access point. Not all
access points support this parameter.
• Channel
Shows the channel on which the access point transmits or communicates.
• Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the access point in dBm.
• Signal strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the access point as a percentage.
• Type
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
• Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
• Fast transition (FT)
Shows whether the access point supports Fast BSS Transition:
– "-"
FT is not supported or is not available.
– Over the Air
FT available wirelessly in access point. The client communicates with the destination
access point directly and wirelessly.
• WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard "802.11h" is
not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard, for example
"802.11n".
• State
Shows the status of the access point, for example whether or not the access point is available.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

106 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

[Link] IP Mapping

WLAN access for several SCALANCE W devices via one client

Note
This WBM page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

You can make WLAN access available for several SCALANCE W devices with one client if you
use IP mapping. This means that you do not need to equip every SCALANCE W device with
its own WLAN client. The prerequisite for this is that the connected SCALANCE W devices are
addressed only with IP frames. Communication at MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) can
• be established with one component whose MAC address is configured on the client,
• be established with a maximum of eight components if the "Layer 2 Tunnel" function is
selected.
The "Layer 2 Tunnel" setting meets the requirements of industrial applications in which MAC
address-based communication takes place with several SCALANCE W devices downstream
from the client. Clients with this setting cannot connect on standard Wifi access points.
The client maintains a table with the assignment of MAC address and IP address to send
incoming IP frames to the correct MAC address. This WBM page shows this table.

Note
IP mapping table
If "Layer 2 Tunnel" is configured for a client, the IP mapping table is not displayed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 107
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table has the following columns
• MAC Address
The MAC address of a device located downstream from the WLAN client from the perspective
of the access point.
• IP Address
The IP address managed for this device by the WLAN client.
• Type
There are two options for the type:
– system
The information relates to the WLAN client itself.
– learned
The information relates to a device downstream from the WLAN client.

MAC mode
Frames sent by the client to the access point always have the MAC address of the WLAN client
as the source MAC address. In the "learning table" of the access point there is therefore only the
MAC address of the WLAN client.
If there is only IP communication between the access point and the client, the default setting
"Own" can be retained. If MAC address-based frames are also to be sent by SCALANCE W700
devices downstream from the client, you need to select the "Layer 2 Tunnel" setting.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

108 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

6.3.16 WLAN Statistics

[Link] Errors
The page shows how many bad data frames were received or sent per WLAN interface in the
client or per VAP in the access point. If an increased number of errors occurs, you should check
the settings for the WLAN interface(s), the setup of the SCALANCE W devices and the connection
quality.

Description
The Sent Errors table has the following columns:
• Interface
Shows the interface to which the entries apply.
• Error types
The other columns after the WLAN interface contain the absolute numbers of the data
frames sent according to their error type.
The columns of the table distinguish between the following error types:
– Transmission Errors
Shows the number and percentage of bad data frames that were sent.
– Retry Count
Shows the number and percentage of data frames sent successfully that required one or
more retries.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 109
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

The Received Errors table has the following columns:

• Interface
Shows the WLAN interface to which the entries apply.
• Received Errors
Shows the number and percentage of bad data frames that were received.

[Link] Data Sent

The page shows how many frames were sent per interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

110 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Shows the interface to which the entries apply.
• Frame types
The other columns after the interface contain the absolute numbers of the sent frames
according to the frame types.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following frame types:
– Data Frames
Shows the number of sent data frames.
– Multicast/Broadcast Frames
Shows the number of sent multicast and broadcast frames.
– Unicast Frames
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
– Average Rate [kbps]
Shows the average data rate of the last data frames sent.

[Link] Data Received

The page shows how many frames were received per interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 111
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.3 "Information" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Shows the interface to which the entries apply.
• Frame types
The other columns after the interface contain the absolute numbers of the received frames
according to the frame types.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following frame types:
– Data Frames
Shows the number of sent data frames.
– Multicast/Broadcast Frames
Shows the number of sent multicast and broadcast frames.
– Unicast Frames
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
– Average Rate [kbps]
Shows the average data rate of the last data frames sent.

6.3.17 WLAN iFeatures

[Link] iPRP
You can check the iPRP connection and its settings on this page.

'LVSOD\LQDFFHVVSRLQWPRGH

'LVSOD\LQFOLHQWPRGH

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

112 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interfaces via which the client is connected to the access point.
• Port (only in access point mode)
Shows the VAP interface on which the iPRP clients are logged in. The column is hidden when
the table is empty.
• iPRP Client
Shows the MAC address of the iPRP client.
• Activity State
Shows the status of the iPRP connection. In the "inactive" status, the connection to at least
one connected device is interrupted.
• Partner Client
Shows the MAC address of the partner client. If the connection to the partner client is
interrupted, 'ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff' is output.
• Partner BSS
Shows the MAC address of the access point to which the partner client is connected. If the
connection to the access point of the partner client is interrupted, 'ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff' is output.
• Delete Frames Sent
Shows the number of sent iPRP delete frames that the device has sent to its partner device.
• Delete Frames Received
Shows the number of iPRP delete frames that the device has received from its partner device.
• Frames Deleted
Shows the number of frames that were deleted from the send queue due to the iPRP delete
frame.
• Scanning Sync State (in client mode only)
"Scanning Sync" indicates how the search for access points should take place.
The following status is possible:
– idle: Idle. No scan.

6.4 "System" menu

6.4.1 Configuration

System configuration
This page contains the configuration overview of the access options of the device.
Specify the services that access the device. With some services, there are further
configuration pages on which more detailed settings can be made.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 113
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

The standard port can also be changed for your own services.

Note
Change standard port
Some programs can only access the service over the standard port, e.g. TIA Portal accesses
HTTPS over standard port 443. Before you change the port, check which port the program uses.
When you change the standard port, you must access the service using the changed port.
Reserved ports
Some ports are permanently reserved. Make sure that the specified port is not already in use. You
can find the ports used in the "List of available services".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

114 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Telnet Server
Enable or disable the "Telnet Server" service for unencrypted access to the CLI.
• Telnet port
Standard port 23 is the default. You can optionally enter a port number in the range 1024 …
49151 or 49500 ... 65535.
• SSH Server
Enable or disable the "SSH Server" service for encrypted access to the CLI.
• SSH port
Standard port 22 is the default. You can optionally enter a port number in the range 1024 …
49151 or 49500 ... 65535.
• SSH key exchange algorithm level
From the drop-down list, select the level of the SSH key exchange algorithm for SSH access
to the CLI. The settings options are "Low" and "High". The two levels contain the following
encryption algorithms:
– High
Curve25519-sha256
Curve25519-sha256@[Link]
Ecdh-sha2-nistp256
Ecdh-sha2-nistp384
Ecdh-sha2-nistp521
Note
If you experience problems connecting to SSH clients (TeraTerm, PuTTY, STS) when the
level is set to "High", a possible cause is that the SSH clients do not support the exchange
algorithms of the "High" setting.
Make sure that you are using the latest versions of the SSH clients.

– Low
Curve25519-sha256
Curve25519-sha256@[Link]
Ecdh-sha2-nistp256
Ecdh-sha2-nistp384
Ecdh-sha2-nistp521
Diffie-hellman-group16-sha512
Diffie-hellman-group18-sha512
Diffie-hellman-group14-sha256
Diffie-hellman-group14-sha1
With the "Low" setting, you cannot set up a connection to the following SSH clients because
these programs do not support the respective algorigthms:
– TeraTerm
– PuTTY
– STS

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 115
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• HTTP server
Enable or disable the "HTTP Server" service for unencrypted access to the WBM.
• HTTP port
Standard port 80 is the default. You can optionally enter a port number in the range 1024 …
49151 or 49500 ... 65535.
• HTTPS server
Enable or disable the HTTPS server service for encrypted access to the WBM.
• HTTPS port
Standard port 443 is the default. You can optionally enter a port number in the range 1024
… 49151 or 49500 ... 65535.
• HTTP Services
Specify how the WBM is accessed:
– HTTPS
Access to the WBM is only possible with HTTPS.
– HTTP/HTTPS
Access to the WBM is possible with HTTP and HTTPS.
– Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
Access via HTTP is automatically diverted to HTTPS.
• Minimum TLS Version
Select the minimum TLS version to be used for the encryption from the drop-down list.
Communication is not possible with devices that do not support the required TLS version.
• SMTP Client
Enable or disable the SMTP client. You can configure other settings in "System > SMTP Client".
• Syslog Client
Enable or disable the Syslog client. You can configure other settings in "System > Syslog
Client".
• DCP Server
Specify whether or not the device can be accessed with DCP (Discovery and Configuration
Protocol):
– "-" (disabled)
DCP is disabled. Device parameters can neither be read nor modified.
– Read/Write
With DCP, device parameters can be both read and modified.
– Read Only
With DCP, device parameters can be read but cannot be modified.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

116 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Time
Select the setting from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– Manual
The system time is set manually. You can configure other settings in "System > System
Time > Manual Setting".
– SIMATIC Time
The system time is set using a SIMATIC time transmitter. You can configure other settings
in "System > System Time > SIMATIC Time Client".
– SNTP Client
The system time is set via an SNTP server. You can configure other settings in "System >
System Time > SNTP Client".
– NTP Client
The system time is set via an NTP server. You can configure other settings in "System >
System Time > NTP Client".
• SNMP
Select the protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (SNMP disabled)
Access to device parameters via SNMP is not possible.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP versions 1, 2c or 3. You can configure
other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
– SNMPv3
Access to device parameters is possible only with SNMP version 3. You can configure other
settings in "System > SNMP > General".
• SNMPv1/v2 Read-Only
Enable or disable write access to SNMP variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
• SINEMA Configuration Interface
If the SINEMA configuration interface is enabled, you can download configurations to the
device via the TIA Portal.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 117
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Configuration Mode
Select the mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– Automatic Save
Automatic backup mode. Approximately 1 minute after the last parameter change or
when you restart the device, the configuration is automatically saved. In addition to this,
the following message appears in the display area "Changes will be saved automatically
in x seconds. Press 'Write Startup Config' to save the changes immediately."
Note
Interrupting the save
Saving starts only after the timer in the message has elapsed. How long saving takes
depends on the device.
During saving, the following message is displayed: "Saving configuration data in progress.
Please do not switch off the device".
Do not switch off the device immediately after the timer has elapsed.

– Trial
Trial mode. In Trial mode, although changes are adopted, they are not saved in the
configuration file (startup configuration).
To save changes in the configuration file, use the "Write startup config" button. The display
area also shows the message "Trial Mode Active – Press "Write Startup Config" button to
make your settings persistent" as soon as there are unsaved modifications. This message
can be seen on every WBM page until the changes made have either been saved or the
device has been restarted.
• Retain Digital Output (only for device variants with DI/DO)
When the option is enabled, the current state of the digital output is saved in the
configuration and restored after a restart.
Default value: Disabled.

Procedure
1. To use the required function, select the respective check box.
2. Select the options you require from the drop-down lists.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

118 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.2 General

[Link] Device

General device information

This page contains the general device information.

The boxes "Current System Time", "System Up Time" and "Device Type" cannot be changed.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Current System Time
Shows the current system time. The system time is either set by the user or by a time-of-day
frame: either SINEC H1 time-of-day frame, NTP or SNTP. (readonly)
• System Up Time
Shows the operating time of the device since the last restart. (readonly)
• Device Type
Shows the type designation of the device. (readonly)
• System Name
You can enter the name of the device. The entered name is displayed in the selection area.
A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
The system name is also displayed in the CLI input prompt. The number of characters in the
CLI input prompt is limited. The system name is truncated after 16 characters.
• System Contact
You can enter the name of a contact person responsible for managing the device. A
maximum of 255 characters are possible.
• System Location
You can enter the location where the device is installed. The entered installation location is
displayed in the selection area. A maximum of 255 characters are possible.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 119
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Note
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used in the input boxes.

Procedure
1. Enter the contact person responsible for the device in the "System Contact" input box.
2. Enter the identifier for the location at which the device is installed in the "System Location"
input box.
3. Enter the name of the device in the "System Name" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] Coordinates

Information on geographic coordinates

In the "Geographic Coordinates" window, you can enter information on the geographic
coordinates. The parameters of the geographic coordinates (latitude, longitude and the height
above the ellipsoid according to WGS84) are entered directly in the input boxes of the
"Geographic Coordinates" window.
Getting the coordinates
Use suitable maps for obtaining the geographic coordinates of the device.
The geographic coordinates can also be obtained using a GPS receiver. The geographic
coordinates of these devices are normally displayed directly and only need to be entered in
the input boxes of this page.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

120 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following input boxes with a maximum length of 32 characters.
• "Latitude" input box
Geographical latitude: Here, enter the value for the northerly or southerly latitude of the
location of the device.
For example, the value +49° 1´31.67" means that the device is located at 49 degrees, 1 arc
minute and 31.67 arc seconds northerly latitude.
A southerly latitude is shown by a preceding minus character.
You can also append the letters N (northerly latitude) or S (southerly latitude) to the numeric
information (49° 1´31.67" N).
• "Longitude" input box
Geographic longitude: Here, you enter the value of the eastern or western longitude of the
location of the device.
The value +8° 20´58.73" means that the device is located at 8 degrees, 20 minutes and
58.73 seconds east.
A western longitude is indicated by a preceding minus sign.
You can also add the letter E (easterly longitude) or W (westerly longitude) to the numeric
information (8° 20´58.73" E).
• Input box: "Height"
Height Here, you enter the value of the geographic height above sea level in meters.
For example, 158 m means that the device is located at a height of 158 m above sea level.
Heights below sea level (for example the Dead Sea) are indicated by a preceding minus sign.

Procedure
1. Enter the calculated latitude in the "Latitude" input box.
2. Enter the calculated longitude in the "Longitude" input box.
3. Enter the height above sea level in the "Height" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.3 Agent IPv4 / IPv6

The calls refer to the following menu items:
• Agent IPv4: Layer 3 (IPv4) > Subnets
• Agent IPv6: Layer 3 (IPv6) > Subnets

6.4.4 DNS

[Link] DNS Client

The DNS (Domain Name System) server assigns a unique IP address to a domain name so that
a device can be uniquely identified.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 121
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

You can manually configure up to three DNS servers with IPv4 addresses on this page. Using
DHCP, the device can learn two DNS servers with IP addresses.
If there is more than one DNS server, the order in the table specifies the order in which
the servers are queried. The top server is queried first. A total of two DNS servers can be
configured on the device. Manually configured DNS servers are given preference.
If this function is enabled, the device can communicate with a DNS server as a DNS client.
You have the option of entering names in IP address boxes.

Note
Update from V1.0 to V1.1
The configuration of the DNS client is not transfered with an update from V1.0 to V1.1.

Note
The DNS client function can only be used if there is a DNS server in the network.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

122 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• DNS Client
Select or clear the check box indicating that the device operates as a DNS client.
• Used DNS Servers
Here you specify which DNS server the device uses:
– learned only
The device uses only the DNS servers assigned by DHCP.
– manual only
The device uses only the manually configured DNS servers. The DNS servers must be
connected to the Internet. A maximum of two DNS servers can be configured.
– all
The device uses all available DNS servers.
• DNS Server Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
The table contains the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• DNS Server Address
Shows the IP address of the DNS server.
• Origin
This shows whether the DNS server was configured manually or was assigned by DHCP.

Procedure
Activating DNS
1. Enable the "DNS-Client" check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Creating a DNS server
1. In the "DNS Server Address" box, enter the IP address of the DNS server.
2. Click the "Create" button.
Filtering DNS servers
1. In the "Used DNS Servers" drop-down list, select which DNS servers are to be used.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 123
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.5 Restart

[Link] Restart

Resetting to the defaults

Using the WBM page, you can restart the device based on a schedule or manually. In addition,
there are various options for resetting to the device defaults.

Restart
Note the following points about restarting a device:
• You can only restart the device with administrator privileges.
• A device should only be restarted with the buttons of this menu or with the appropriate CLI
commands and not by a power cycle on the device.
• If the device is in "Trial" mode, configuration modifications must be saved manually before a
restart. Any modifications you have made only become active on the device after clicking the
"Set values" button on the relevant WBM page.
• If the device is in "Automatic Save" mode, the last changes are saved automatically before a
restart.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

124 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
To restart the device, the buttons on this page provide you with the following options:
• Restart
Click this button to restart the system. You must confirm the restart in a dialog box. During
a restart, the device is reinitialized, the internal firmware is reloaded, and the device runs a
self-test. The settings of the start configuration are retained, e.g. the IP address of the device.
The learned entries in the address table are deleted. You can leave the browser window open
while the device restarts. After the restart you will need to log in again.
• Restore Memory Defaults and Restart
Click this button to restore the factory settings of the device, with the exception of protected
default settings, and to restart the device.
The protected presets include the following parameters:
– IP addresses
– Subnet mask
– IP address of the default gateway.
– DHCP client ID
– DHCP
– System name
– System location
– System contact
– User names and passwords
– Mode of the device
– DHCPv6 Rapid Commit
– PROFINET Name of Station
• Restore Factory Defaults and Restart
Click this button to restore the factory configuration settings and to restart the device. The
protected defaults are also reset. You must confirm the restart in a dialog box.
Note
By resetting all the defaults to the factory configuration settings, the IP address is also lost.
Assign an IP address to the device using DHCP or SINEC PNI.
With the appropriate connection, a previously correctly configured device can cause
circulating frames and therefore the failure of the data traffic.

• Restart in: seconds

This field is used to set the timer. The field can no longer be edited when the timer is running.
Specify the amount of time in seconds after which the device restarts.
Value range 300 ... 86400 seconds
• Backup
The configuration backups under "System > Configuration Backup" are available for selection.
Before the scheduled restart, the device applies the configurations of the selected backup
and continues working with them after the restart.
All configurations made up to this point that have not been saved in a backup are lost.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 125
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Scheduled restart
When you click this button, a timer starts and runs backwards with the defined time. When
the timer has expired, the device restarts.
The following message is also displayed in the display area: "The automatic restart starts in
[..] minutes. Click 'Cancel scheduled restart' to cancel the restart". This message can be seen
on every WBM page until you cancel the restart or the SCALANCE W device is restarted.
Note
Unsaved configuration is lost after reboot
The scheduled restart is performed after the time has elapsed without any further message.
Unsaved configuration changes are lost.
Save the current configuration via "System > Backup of configuration" before setting the
timer for the restart.

• Cancel scheduled restart

With this button, you disable the timer for the scheduled restart.

[Link] Sleep Mode

To reduce the power consumption of the device, you can use the "Sleep Mode" energy saving
mode. This mode puts the device to sleep and changes to the previous state after the
configured time has elapsed. When sleep mode is activated, all processes are aborted, even a
firmware update for example.
On this page, you specify after the time after which the device in sleep mode wakes up again.

Description
• Sleep Duration [min.]
Specify how long the device should remain in power saving mode.
Value range 1 ... 44639. Default value 0: Power saving mode off
• Activate Sleep Mode
Use this button to activate the sleep timer.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

126 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Enter a value of 1 ... 44639 minutes in the "Sleep Duration [min.]" text box.
2. Click on the "Activate Sleep Mode" button.
Result
The device applies the setting for the duration and immediately switches to sleep mode.
Once the time has elapsed, the device returns to the active state. The digital output is
deactivated after the restart.

Note
Retaining the state of the digital output
The device can note the current state of the digital output and restore it after a restart. You can
find more information on the WBM page "System > Configuration".

6.4.6 Commit Control

Change management
On this page, you specify when the WLAN settings become effective on the SCALANCE W device.
If you change a WLAN setting and confirm the change with "Set Values", this change is adopted
and takes effect immediately. To do this, the WLAN connection is briefly interrupted. This means
that you can lose the WLAN connection to your SCALANCE W device before it is fully configured.
With the "Manual Commit" setting, you have the opportunity of first fully configuring the
SCALANCE W device. The changes are accepted, but are not active immediately. The changes
only take effect when you confirm the changes with the "Commit Changes" button.

Note
If you configure the SCALANCE W device via the WLAN interface, we recommend that you use
the "Manual Commit" setting. Check the parameters again before you confirm the changes with
the "Commit Changes" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 127
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Commit Mode
Select the required setting from the drop-down list.
– Automatic Commit
Each change in the WLAN settings is adopted and is immediately effective when you click
the "Set Values" button. In the default setting, the SCALANCE W device is set to "Automatic
Commit".
– Manual Commit
The changes are accepted, but are not effective immediately. The changes only take
effect when you click the "Commit Changes" button. The "Commit Changes" button is
displayed when you set "Manual Commit".
The following message is also displayed in the display area when there are WLAN
changes: "Manual Commit Mode active - Press 'Commit Changes' button to provide
current configuration to driver". This message can be seen on every WBM page until either
the changes made have taken effect or the SCALANCE W device has been restarted.
Note
When the changes take effect, the WLAN connections to all WLAN interfaces will be
interrupted for a short time. The WLAN driver is started with the new settings.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

128 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.7 Load & Save

[Link] File list

Overview of the file types

For a clearer overview, the file list is divided into different areas.

Area Type Description Down‐ Save Delete1)

load
Update Firmware The firmware is signed and encrypted. This ensures X X --
that only firmware created by Siemens can be down‐
loaded to the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 129
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Area Type Description Down‐ Save Delete1)

load
Configuration Config This file contains the start configuration. X X --
Among other things, this file contains the definitions
of the users, roles, groups and function rights. The
passwords are stored in the file "Users".
The file can be supplied with a password before down‐
load. To load the file into the device successfully, use
the specified password. You enter the password on the
WBM page "Passwords (Page 144)".
If the file is password-protected, you cannot load the
file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.
ConfigPack Detailed configuration information. for example, start X X --
configuration, users, certificates, favorites, firmware
of the device (if saved as well).
The file can be supplied with a password before down‐
load. To load the file into the device successfully, use
the specified password. You enter the password on the
WBM page "Passwords (Page 144)".
For more detailed information on creating and using
the ConfigPack incl. firmware, refer to the section
"Maintenance (Page 311)".
If the file is password-protected, you cannot load the
file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.
ConfigPack‐ This ZIP file stores all the configuration backups you X X X
Backup have created.
RunningCLI Text file with CLI commands -- X --
This file contains an overview of the current configu‐
ration in the form of CLI commands. Passwords are
masked in this file as follows: [PASSWORD]
You can download the text file. The file is not intended
to be uploaded again unchanged.
RunningSINE‐ You save the current device configuration in this file -- X --
MAConfig type for transfer to STEP 7 Basic/Professional. The file
can be imported in STEP 7 Basic/Professional and in‐
stalled on a device with the same article number and
firmware version.
Before you can save a file, you must assign a password
for the "RunningSINEMAConfig" in the WBM under
"System > Load&Save > Passwords". You also need this
password to import the file into STEP 7 Basic/Profes‐
sional.
See also "SINEMAConfig"
Script Text file with CLI commands X -- --
SINEMAConfig You load configuration data that was exported via X -- --
STEP 7 Basic/Professional for transfer to the WBM with
this file type.
To load a file, you must assign a password for the "SI‐
NEMAConfig" under "System > Load&Save > Pass‐
words". You also need this password to export the file
from STEP 7 Basic/Professional.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

130 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Area Type Description Down‐ Save Delete1)

load
See also "RunningSINEMAConfig"
Users File with user names and passwords X X --
WBMFav WBM favorites X X X
This file contains the favorites that you created in the
WBM. You can download this file and upload it to other
devices.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 131
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Area Type Description Down‐ Save Delete1)

load
Certificates & HTTPSCert Default HTTPS certificates including key X X X
keys The preset and automatically created HTTPS certifi‐
cates are self-signed.
We strongly recommend that you create your own
HTTPS certificates and make them available. We rec‐
ommend that you use HTTPS certificates signed either
by a reliable external or by an internal certification
authority. The HTTPS certificate checks the identity of
the device and controls the encrypted data exchange.
The following file types can be loaded into the device.
• .pem
To successfully load an HTTPS certificate with this
data type into the device, the certificate must in‐
clude the unencrypted private key.
• .p12
For HTTPS certificates with this file type, the pri‐
vate key is encrypted and secured with a password.
To load the certificate successfully into the device,
enter the password specified for the file on the
WBM page "Passwords (Page 144)".
After the upload, the existing HTTPS certificate is over‐
written.
It is recommended that you use password-protected
certificates in the PKCS#12 format. The following cer‐
tificates are supported:
• ECDSA certificates that were generated with
secp521r1 (NIST P-521)
• RSA certificates with a maximum key length of
4096 bits
SSHPrivate‐ SSH private key (ECDSA) X X X
KeyECDSA The SSH key ecdsa-sha2-nistp521 is supported.
There are files to which access is password-protected.
To successfully load the file into the device, enter the
password specified for the file on the WBM page "Pass‐
words (Page 144)".
SSHPrivate‐ SSH private key (RSA) with and without password X X X
KeyRSA The following SSH keys are supported:
• rsa-sha2-512
• rsa-sha2-256
There are files to which access is password-protected.
To successfully load the file into the device, enter the
password specified for the file on the WBM page "Pass‐
words (Page 144)".
WLANCert User certificate. You can specify a password for the X X X
(only in client user certificate on the WBM page "Load&Save > Pass‐
mode) word".
Maximum key length: 8192 bits

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

132 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Area Type Description Down‐ Save Delete1)

load
WLANServer‐ Server certificate. You can specify a password for the X X X
Cert server certificate on the WBM page "Load&Save > Pass‐
(only in client word".
mode) Maximum key length: 8192 bits
Services & log Debug This file contains information for Siemens Support. -- X X
It is encrypted and can be sent by e-mail to Siemens
Support without any security risk.
LogFile File with entries from the event log table -- X --
StartupInfo Startup log file -- X --
This file contains the messages that were entered in
the log file during the last startup.
WLANAuthlog File with entries from the WLAN Authentication Log -- X --
(information on successful or failed authentication at‐
tempts)
WLANSigRec The ZIP file contains the following: -- X X
(only in client • csv file with the measured values of the signal re‐
mode) corder
• pdf file with the measured values and an addition‐
al graphic representation of the measured values.
You will find information about the measured values
and their graphic representation in the section "Signal
recorder (Page 227)".
Information CountryList The zip file contains the country list as a csv file. -- X --
GSDML Information on the device properties (PROFINET) -- X --
MIB Private MSPS MIB file "Scalance_w_msps.mib" -- X --
License LicenseCondi‐ The ZIP file contains the licensing conditions and copy‐ -- X --
tions right information for the open source software.
1)
Deletion is only possible via HTTP/HTTPS.

Using configuration files

Note
Configuration files and Trial mode/Automatic Save
In "Automatic Save" mode, the data is saved automatically before the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config) are transferred.
In "Trial" mode, although the changes are adopted, they are not saved in the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config). Use the "Write Startup Config" button on the "System > Configuration"
WBM page to save changes in the configuration files.

CLI script file

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 133
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

You can download existing CLI configurations (RunningCLI) and upload your own CLI scripts
(Script).

Note
The downloadable CLI script is not intended to be uploaded again unchanged.
CLI commands for saving and loading files cannot be executed with the CLI script file (Script).

Exchange of configuration data with STEP 7 Basic/Professional using a file

You use the two file types "RunningSINEMAConfig" and "SINEMAConfig" to exchange
configuration data between a device (WBM) and STEP 7 Basic/Professional via a file.
Requirements:
• Same article number
• Same firmware version
• Password
You assign the password in the WBM under "System > Load&Save > Passwords".
You can use the file types as follows:
• For offline diagnostics
You can save the faulty configuration of a device as "RunningSINEMAConfig" via the WBM and
import it in STEP 7 Basic/Professional. No connection to a real device is required for the
diagnostics in STEP 7 Basic/Professional. You can export a corrected configuration and load
it as "SINEMAConfig" again using the WBM.
• For configuration
No connection to a real device is required to configure a device in STEP 7 Basic/Professional.
You can export the configuration and load it as "SINEMAConfig" to the real device using the
WBM.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

134 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] HTTP

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 135
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Loading and saving data via HTTP

The WBM allows you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such data
from an external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can also load
new firmware from a file located on your client PC.

Note
This WBM page is available both for connections using HTTP and for connections using HTTPS.

Description
For a clearer overview, the tables are divided into different areas. Each table has the following
columns:
• Type
Shows the name of the file.
Note
Size of certificate files
With certificate files only certificates with a maximum of 8192 bits are supported.

• Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
• Load
With this button, you can load files on the device. The button can be enabled, if this function
is supported by the file type.
• Save
With this button, you can save files from the device. The button can only be enabled if this
function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
• Delete
With this button, you can delete files from the device. The button can only be enabled if this
function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
Note
Following a firmware update, delete the cache of the Web browser.

Procedure
Loading data using HTTP(S)
1. Start the load function by clicking the one of the "Load" buttons.
The dialog for loading a file opens.
2. Go to the file you want to load.
3. Click the "Open" button in the dialog.
The file is now loaded.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

136 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Whether or not a restart is necessary, depends on the loaded file. If a restart is necessary, a
message to this effect will be output. Other files are executed immediately, for example the
CLI script file and new settings are applied without a restart.
Saving data using HTTP(S)
1. Start the save function by clicking the one of the "Save" buttons. Depending on the size of the
file this may take some time.
2. Depending on your browser configuration you will be prompted to select a storage location
and a name for the file. Or you accept the proposed file name. To make the selection, use the
dialog in your browser. After making your selection, click the "Save" button.
Deleting data using HTTP(S)
1. Start the delete function by clicking the one of the "Delete" buttons.
The file will be deleted.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.

Note
Configuration data has a checksum. If you edit the files, you can no longer upload them to the
device.
Password-protected config file
If the file is password-protected, you cannot load the file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 137
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] TFTP

Loading and saving data via a TFTP server

On this page, you can configure the TFTP server and the file names. The WBM also allows you to
store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such data from an external file
from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can also load new firmware from a
file located on your client PC.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

138 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• TFTP Server Address
Here, enter the IP address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the TFTP server with
which you exchange data.
• TFTP Server Port
Here, enter the port of the TFTP server via which data exchange will be handled. If necessary,
you can change the default value 69 to your own requirements.
For a clearer overview, the tables are divided into different areas. Each table has the
following columns:
• Type
Shows the name of the file.
Note
Size of certificate files
With certificate files only certificates with a maximum of 8192 bits are supported.

• Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
• Filename
A file name is preset here for every file type.
Note
Changing the file name
You can change the file name preset in this column. After clicking the "Set Values" button, the
changed name is saved on the device and can also be used with the Command Line Interface.

• Actions
Select the action from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the selected file type, for
example the log file can only be saved.
The following actions are possible:
– Save file
With this selection, you save a file on the TFTP server.
– Load file
With this selection, you load a file from the TFTP server.

Procedure
Loading or saving data using TFTP
1. Enter the IP address or the FQDN of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server Address" input box.
2. Enter the server port to be used in the in the "TFTP server port" input box.
3. Enter the name of a file in which you want to save the data or take the data from in the "File
name" input box.
4. Select the action you want to execute from the "Actions" drop-down list.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 139
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

5. Click the "Set Values" button to start the selected actions. Depending on the size of the file this
may take some time.
6. After loading the configuration and the SSL certificate, restart the device. The changes only
take effect a restart.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.
Note that the configuration data is coded when it is saved. This means that you cannot edit
the files with a text editor.

Note
Configuration data has a checksum. If you edit the files, you can no longer upload them to the
device.
Password-protected config file
If the file is password-protected, you cannot load the file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

140 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] SFTP

Loading and saving data via an SFTP server

SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) transfers the files encrypted. On this page, you configure the
access data for the SFTP server.
The WBM also allows you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load
such data from an external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you
can also load new firmware from a file located on your Admin PC.
On this page, the certificates required to establish a secure VPN connection can also be
loaded.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 141
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SFTP Server Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN of the SFTP server with which you exchange data.
• SFTP Server Port
Enter the port of the SFTP server via which data exchange will be handled. If necessary, you
can change the default value 22 to your own requirements.
• SFTP User
Enter the user for access to the SFTP server. This assumes that a user with the corresponding
rights has been created on the SFTP server.
The name must meet the following conditions:
– It must be unique.
– It must be between 1 and 250 characters long.
You can find information on the permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
• SFTP Password
Enter the password for the user
• SFTP Password Confirmation
Confirm the password.
For a clearer overview, the tables are divided into different areas. Each table has the
following columns:
• Type
Shows the file type.
• Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
• Filename
A file name is preset here for every file type.
Note
Changing the file name
You can change the file name preset in this column. After clicking the "Set Values" button, the
changed name is saved on the device and can also be used with the Command Line Interface.

• Actions
Select the action from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the selected file type, for
example you can only save the log file.
The following actions are possible:
– Save file
With this selection, you save a file on the SFTP server.
– Load file
With this selection, you load a file from the SFTP server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

142 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
Loading or saving data using SFTP
1. Enter the address of the SFTP server in "SFTP Server Address".
2. Enter the port of the SFTP server to be used in "SFTP Server Port".
3. Enter the user data (user name and password) required for access to the SFTP server.
4. If applicable, enter the name of a file in which you want to save the data or take the data from
in "Filename".
Note
Files whose access is password protected
To be able to load these files on the device successfully, you need to enter the password
specified for the file in "System" > "Load&Save" > "Passwords".

5. Select the action you want to execute from the "Actions" drop-down list.
6. Click "Set Values" to start the selected action.
7. If a restart is necessary, a message to this effect will be output. Click the "OK" button to run
the restart. If you click the "Abort" button, there is no device restart. The changes only take
effect after a restart.
Reusing configuration data
If several identical devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are
assigned using DHCP, the effort for reconfiguration can be reduced by saving and reading in
the configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Load these configuration files on all other devices you want to configure in this way.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.

Note
Configuration data has a checksum. If you edit the files, you can no longer upload them to the
device.
Password-protected config file
If the file is password-protected, you cannot load the file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 143
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] Passwords
There are files to which access is password-protected. For example to be able to use the HTTPS
certificate, you need to specify the corresponding password on this WBM page.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Type
Shows the file type.
• Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
• Setting
When enabled, the file is used. Can only be enabled if the password is configured.
• Password
Enter the password for the file.
Entered passwords cannot be read as plain text; instead asterisks * are displayed.
• Password Confirmation
Confirm the password.
• Status
Shows whether the password corresponds to the file on the device.
– Valid
The "Enabled" check box is selected and the password matches the file.
– Invalid
The "Enabled" check box is selected but the password does not match the file or no file has
been loaded yet.
– '-'
The password cannot be evaluated or is not yet being used. The "Enabled" check box is not
selected.
– Required
A password is required for loading or saving.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

144 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Enter the password in "Password".
2. To confirm the password, enter the password again in "Password Confirmation".
3. Select the "Enabled" option.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.8 Events

[Link] Configuration

Selecting system events

On this page, you specify how a device reacts to system events. To enable or disable the options,
click the relevant check boxes of the columns.

Description
• Log Table Alarm Threshold
Set the limit for the entries for each severity. A maximum of 2000 entries are possible for each
severity.
If the specified limit will be reached with the next entry, an alarm message is output, e.g. if
1950 is specified, the message that limit 1950 has been reached is output after entry 1949.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 145
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

With Table 1, you can enable or disable all check boxes of a column of Table 2 at once. Table
1 has the following columns:
• All Events
Shows that the settings are valid for all events of table 2.
• E-mail / Trap / Log Table / Syslog / Faults
Enable or disable the required type of notification for all events. If "No Change" is selected, the
entries of the corresponding column in table 2 remain unchanged.
• Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all events of table 2.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

146 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Table 2 has the following columns:

• Event
The column contains the following values:
– Cold/warm restart
The device was turned on or restarted by the user.
– Link Change
This event occurs only when the port status is monitored and has changed, see "System
> Fault Monitoring > Link Change".
– Authentication Failure
This event occurs when attempting access with a bad password.
– Power Change
This event occurs only when power supply lines 1 and 2 are monitored. It indicates that
there was a change to line 1 or line 2. The event occurs when the PoE power supply has
failed, see "System > Fault Monitoring > Power Supply".
– Spanning Tree Change
The STP or RSTP or MSTP topology has changed.
– Fault State Change
The fault status has changed. The fault status can relate to the activated port monitoring,
the response of the signaling contact or the power supply monitoring.
For an error to also be signaled by the fault LED "F", you must enable "Fault State Change"
for the "Digital Out". In this case, the fault LED "F" lights up when an internal error occurs
and the digital input is closed.
– Overlap AP Detection (only in access point mode)
This event is triggered when there is an entry in the "Overlap AP" list.
– DFS (Only in access point mode)
This event occurs if a radar signal was received or the DFS scan was started or stopped.
– WLAN Authentication Log
Forwarding of the entries from the WLAN authentication log to the system protocol
server.
– WLAN De/Authentication (Only in client mode)
With successful or failed WLAN authentication attempts.
– WLAN General (only in access point mode)
Enabling the "WLAN General" event has no function.
– Secure NTP
This event occurs when the device receives the system time from a secure NTP server or
the NTPsecure authentication key has been updated for the NTP server.
– Configuration Change
This event occurs when the configuration of the device has changed.
– Service Information
Some system events that occurred are entered in the event log table without
configuration. For these events, you can configure additional types of notification.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 147
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

– TCP Event Log

The device has received a TCP packet. The prerequisite is that the "TCP Event" function is
enabled.
• Type of notification
– E-mail
The device sends an e-mail. This is only possible if the SMTP server is set up and the "SMTP
Client" function is enabled.
– Trap
The device sends an SNMP trap. This is only possible if "SNMPv1 Traps" is enabled in
"System > Configuration".
– Log Table
The device writes an entry to the event log table. The content of the event log table is
displayed in "Information > Log Tables > Event Log".
– Syslog
The device writes an entry to the system log server. This is only possible if the system log
server is set up and the "Syslog Client" function is enabled.
– Error
The device triggers an error. The error LED lights up and the currently pending error is
displayed under "Information > Faults".

Procedure
Follow the steps below to change entries:
1. Select the check box in the row of the required event. Select the event in the column under
the following actions:
– E-mail
– Trap
– Log table
– Syslog
– Error
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

148 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] Severity Filters

On this page, you configure the severity for the sending of system event notifications.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Client Type
Select the client type for which you want to make settings:
– E-mail
Sending system event messages by e-mail
– Log Table
Entry of system events in the log table
– Syslog
Entry of system events in the Syslog file
– WLAN Authentication Log
Entry of system events in the WLAN authentication log
• Severity
Select the desired severity. The following settings are possible:
– Critical
System events with the severity Critical are processed.
– Warning
System events with the Warning severity or higher are processed: This means events of
the categories "Warning" and "Critical".
– Info
System events with the Info severity or higher are processed: This means events of the
categories "Info", "Warning" and "Critical".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 149
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
Follow the steps below to configure the required level:
1. Select the required values from the drop-down lists of the second table column after the
client types.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.9 SMTP client

[Link] General

Network monitoring with e-mails

If events occur, the device can automatically send an e-mail, e.g. to the service technician. The
e-mail contains the identification of the sending device, a description of the cause in plain text,
and a time stamp. This allows centralized network monitoring to be set up for networks with few
nodes based on an e-mail system.

Requirements for sending e-mails

• "E-mail" is activated for the relevant event in "System > Events > Configuration".
• The desired severity is configured under "System > Events > Severity level".
• At least one entry exists under "System > SMTP Client > Receiver" and the setting "Send" is
activated.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SMTP Client
Enable or disable the SMTP client.
• SMTP Server Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN of the SMTP server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

150 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

The table contains the following columns:

• Select
Select the check box in a row to be deleted.
• Status
Specify whether this SMTP server will be used.
• SMTP Server Address
Shows the SMTP server IP address.
• Sender Email Address
Enter the e-mail address of the sender that is specified in the e-mail.
• User Name
If necessary, enter the user name used for authentication on the SMTP server.
• Password
If necessary, enter the password used for authentication on the SMTP server.
Note
Password policy
• High
Password length: at least 8 characters, maximum 32 characters
At least 1 uppercase letter
At least 1 special character
At least 1 number
• Low
Password length: at least 6 characters, maximum 32 characters
Permitted characters
• Characters of a character set according to ANSI X 3.4-1986
It cannot contain the following characters:
• §?";:
• The character for Delete and blanks also cannot be included.
Use passwords that are as long as possible with a high password strength.

• Password Confirmation
Repeat the password.
• Port
Enter the port via which your SMTP server can be reached.
Factory settings:
– 25 (None)
– 465 (SSL/TLS and StartTLS)

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 151
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Security
Specify whether transfer of the e-mail from the device to the SMTP server is encrypted. This
is only possible when the SMTP server supports the selected setting.
Note
2-factor authentication (2FA)
2-factor authentication is not supported.

– SSL/TLS
– StartTLS
– None: The e-mail is transferred unencrypted.
• Test
Sends a test email to the configured receivers.
• Test Result
Shows whether the e-mail was sent successfully or not. If sending was not successful, the
message contains possible causes.

Procedure
Configuring the SMTP server
1. Enable the "SMTP Client" function.
2. Enter the IP address of the SMTP server in "SMTP Server Address".
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Enter the name of the sender that will be included in the e-mail for "Sender Email Address".
5. Enter the user name and password if the SMTP server prompts you to log in.
6. Under "Security", specify whether transfer to the SMTP server is encrypted.
7. Enable the SMTP server entry.
8. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
Depending on the properties and configuration of the SMTP server, it may be necessary to
adapt the "Sender E-Mail Address" input for the e-mails. Check with the administrator of the
SMTP server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

152 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Testing the configuration of the SMTP server

1. Configure receivers
– Click the "Receiver" tab.
– Select the desired SMTP server under "SMTP server".
– Enter the desired address under "E-mail address of the SMTP recipient".
– Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table. The setting "Send" is
enabled by default.
2. Sending a test e-mail
– Click the "General" tab.
– Click the "Test" button next to the SMTP server entry. The device sends a test email to every
configured receiver.
– Check the test result. If sending was not successful, the message contains possible causes.

[Link] Recipient
On this page, you specify who receives an e-mail when an event occurs.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SMTP Server
Specify the SMTP server via which the e-mail is sent.
• Email address of the SMTP receiver
Enter the e-mail address to which the device sends an e-mail.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 153
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

The table contains the following columns:

• Select
Select the check box in a row to be deleted.
• SMTP Server
Shows the IP address of the SMTP server to which the entry relates.
• Send
When enabled, the device sends an email to this receiver.
• Email address of the SMTP receiver
Shows the e-mail address to which the device sends an e-mail if a fault occurs.

Procedure
Configuring an SMTP receiver
1. Select the required "SMTP server".
2. Enter the email address of the SMTP receiver.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Activate the "Send" option for the entry.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.10 DHCPv4

[Link] DHCP Client

Setting of the DHCP mode

If the device is configured as a DHCP client, it starts a DHCP query. As the reply to the query the
device receives an IPv4 address from the DHCP server. The server manages an address range
from which it assigns IPv4 addresses. It is also possible to configure the server so that the client
always receives the same IPv4 address in response to its request.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

154 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• DHCP client configuration file request (opt. 66, 67)
From the drop-down list, select whether you want the DHCP client to use options 66 and 67
to download a configuration file.
– On
Options 66 and 67 are enabled
– Off
Options 66 and 67 are disabled
• DHCP Mode
Select the DHCP mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– via MAC Address
Identification is based on the MAC address.
– via DHCP Client ID
Identification is based on a freely defined DHCP client ID.
– via System Name
Identification is based on the system name. If the system name is 255 characters long, the
last character is not used for identification.
– via PROFINET Name of Station
Identification is based on the PROFINET station name.
The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Interface to which the setting relates.
• DHCP
Enable or disable the DHCP client for the relevant interface.

Procedure
1. Select the required mode from the "DHCP Mode" drop-down list. If you select the DHCP mode
"via DHCP Client ID" an input box appears.
– In the enabled input box "DHCP client ID" enter a string to identify the device. This is then
evaluated by the DHCP server.
2. Select the "DHCP Client Configuration Request (Opt. 66, 67)", if you want the DHCP client to
use options 66 and 67 to download and then enable a configuration file.
3. Enable the "DHCP" option in the table.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
If a configuration file is downloaded, this can trigger a system restart. If the currently running
configuration and the configuration in the downloaded configuration file differ, the system is
restarted.
Make sure that the option "DHCP Client Configuration Request (Opt. 66, 67)" is no longer set.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 155
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.11 SNMP

[Link] General

Configuration of SNMP
On this page, you make the basic settings for SNMP. Enable the check boxes according to the
function you want to use.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

156 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SNMP
Select the SNMP protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (Disabled)
SNMP is disabled.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
SNMPv1/v2c/v3 is supported.
Note
Note that SNMP in versions 1 and 2c does not have any security mechanisms.

– SNMPv3
Only SNMPv3 is supported.
• SNMPv1/v2c Read-Only
If you enable this option, SNMPv1/v2c can only read the SNMP variables.
Note
Community String
For security reasons, do not use the standard values "public" or "private". Change the
community strings following the initial installation.
The recommended minimum length for community strings is 6 characters.
For security reasons, only limited access to objects of the SNMPCommunityMIB is possible
with the SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String. With the SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community
String, you have full access to the SNMPCommunityMIB.

• SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String

Enter the community string for read access of the SNMP protocol.
• SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String
Enter the community string for read and write access of the SNMP protocol.
• SNMPv3 User Migration
– Enabled
If the function is enabled, an SNMP engine ID is generated that can be migrated. You can
transfer configured SNMPv3 users to a different device.
If you enable this function and load the configuration of the device on another device,
configured SNMPv3 users are retained.
– Disabled
If the function is disabled, a device-specific SNMP engine ID is generated. To generate the
ID, the agent MAC address of the device is used. You cannot transfer this SNMP user
configuration to other devices.
If you load the configuration of the device on another device, all configured SNMPv3 users
are deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 157
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• SNMP Engine ID
Shows the SNMP engine ID.
• SNMP Agent Listen Port
Specify the port at which the SNMP agent waits for the SNMP queries. Standard port 161 is
the default.
You can optionally enter the standard port 162 or a port number in the range 1024 … 49151
or 49500 ... 65535.

Procedure
1. Select the required option from the "SNMP" drop-down list:
– "-" (disabled)
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
– SNMPv3
2. Enable the "SNMPv1/v2c Read Only" check box if you only want read access to SNMP variables
with SNMPv1/v2c.
3. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String" input box.
4. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String" input
box.
5. If necessary, enable the SNMPv3 User Migration.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] SNMPv3 Users

User-specific security settings

On the WBM page, you can create new SNMPv3 users and modify or delete existing users. The
user-based security model works with the concept of the user name; in other words, a user ID is
added to every frame. This user name and the applicable security settings are checked by both
the sender and recipient.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

158 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• User Name
Enter a freely selectable user name. After you have entered the data, you can no longer
modify the name.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• User Name
Shows the created users.
• Authentication Protocol
Specify the authentication protocol for which a password will be stored.
The following settings are available:
– None
– MD5
– SHA

• Privacy Protocol
Specify the encryption protocol for which a password will be stored. This drop-down list is
only enabled when an authentication protocol has been selected.
The following settings are available:
– None
– DES
– AES
• Authentication Password
Enter the authentication password in the first input box. This password must have at least 1
character, the maximum length is 32 characters.
Use passwords that are as long as possible with a high password strength.
Note
Password policy
• High
Password length: at least 8 characters, maximum 32 characters
At least 1 uppercase letter
At least 1 special character
At least 1 number
• Low
Password length: at least 6 characters, maximum 32 characters
Permitted characters
• Characters of a character set according to ANSI X 3.4-1986
It cannot contain the following characters:
• §?";:
• The character for Delete and blanks also cannot be included.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 159
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Authentication Password Confirmation

Confirm the password by repeating the entry.
• Privacy Password
Enter your encryption password. This password must have at least 1 character, the maximum
length is 32 characters.
Note
Length of the password
As an important measure to maximize security, we recommend that the password has a
minimum length of 6 characters and that it contains special characters, uppercase/lowercase
letters, numbers.

• Privacy Password Confirmation

Confirm the encryption password by repeating the entry.

Procedure
Create a new user
1. Enter the name of the new user in the "User Name" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
3. Select the authentication algorithm for "Authentication Protocol". In the relevant input
boxes, enter the authentication password and the confirmation.
4. Select the algorithm in "Privacy Protocol". In the relevant input boxes, enter the encryption
password and the confirmation.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Delete user
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all users you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

160 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] SNMPv3 User to Group mapping

Configuration of group members

You assign users to SNMPv3 groups on this WBM page. Each user can only be a member of one
group.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Group Name
Enter the group that will be assigned to the user.
• User Name
Select the user to be a member of the specified group. The drop-down list only contains users
that are not yet assigned to a group.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Group Name
Displays the SNMPv3 group. A group name can only be changed later if no access rights have
been defined for the group yet.
• User Name
Shows the user that is a member of this group.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 161
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] SNMPv3 Access

Security settings and assigning permissions

SNMP version 3 allows permissions to be assigned, authentication, and encryption at protocol
level. The security level and read/write permissions are assigned according to groups. The
settings automatically apply to every member of a group.

Note
Different access permissions for different security levels can be assigned to a group. If no access
permission is defined for a security level, no access to the device is possible for members of the
group using this security level.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Group Name
Select the name of the group.
• Security Level
Select the security level (authentication, encryption) for which you want to define the access
permissions of the group:
– No Auth/no Priv
No authentication enabled/no encryption enabled.
– Auth/no Priv
Authentication enabled/no encryption enabled.
– Auth/Priv
Authentication enabled/encryption enabled.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

162 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

The table has the following columns:

• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Group Name
Shows the name of the SNMPv3 group.
• Security Level
Shows the security level to which this access permission applies.
• Read View Name
Enter an SNMPv3 view that grants read access to members of the group with the
specified Security Level.
• Write View Name
Enter an SNMPv3 view that grants write access to members of the group with the
specified Security Level.
Note
For write access to work, you also need to enable read access.

• Notification View Name

Enter an SNMPv3 view for which SNMP notification to members of the group with the
defined security level should be used.

Procedure
Creating a new group
1. Select the name of the group for which you are configuring SNMP access.
2. Select the required security level from the "Security Level" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button to create a new entry.
4. In the "Read View Name" field, enter the SNMPv3 view for read access.
5. In the "Write View Name" field, enter the SNMPv3 view for write access.
6. In the "Notification View Name" field, enter the SNMPv3 view for notifications.
7. Click the "Set Values" button.
Modifying a group
Once a group name and the security level have been specified, they can no longer be
modified after the group is created. If you want to change the group name or the security
level, you will need to delete the group and create it and configure it with the new name.
Deleting a group
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all groups you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 163
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] SNMPv3 Views

Configuration of SNMPv3 views

You configure the parameters of SNMP views on this WBM page.

Note
Controlling the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c access
The preconfigured SIMATICNETRD and SIMATICNETWR views are used internally to control the
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c access. If you delete or change these views, this directly affects the
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c access.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

164 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• View Name
Select the name of the view that you want to configure. An SNMPv3 view always needs to be
assigned to an SNMPv3 access. For this reason, you need to enter a new SNMPv3 view in the
table in the "SNMP Access" tab.
• MIB Tree
Select the Object Identifier (OID) of the MIB area that is to be used for the SNMPv3 view. The
following options are possible:
– iso
– std
– member-body
– org
– mgmt
– private
– snmpV2
The drop-down list only contains the OIDs that are usually used. If the configuration of a
specific OID that is not listed is necessary, you can configure this via the CLI with the snmp
view command. This OID is then also displayed in the WBM in the overview table.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• View Name
The name of the SNMPv3 view.
• MIB Tree
The OID of the MIB area for the SNMPv3 view.
• View Type
The available options are as follows:
– Included
The MIB OID and its lower-level nodes are part of the SNMPv3 view. Access to the
corresponding MIB objects is possible.
– Excluded
The MIB OID and its lower-level nodes are not part of the SNMPv3 view. Access to the
corresponding MIB objects is not possible.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 165
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] Notifications

SNMP traps and SNMPv3 notifications

If an alarm event occurs, a device can send SNMP notifications (traps and inform notifications)
to up to ten different management stations at the same time. Notifications are only sent if the
events specified in the "Events" menu item occur.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SNMPv1 Traps
Enable or disable sending of SNMPv1 traps. This setting affects all receivers of SNMPv1 traps
and has no effects on receivers of SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 notifications.
• SNMPv1/v2c Trap Community String
Enter the community string for sending SNMPv1/v2c notifications.
• SNMPv3 Notify User
Select the user to which SNMPv3 notifications are to be sent.
• SNMPv3 Notify Security Level
Select the security level (authentication, encryption) to be used for SNMPv3 notification. A
user and the access must be configured for this.
The following options are possible:
– no Auth/no Priv
No authentication enabled / no encryption enabled.
– Auth/no Priv
Authentication enabled / no encryption enabled.
– Auth/Priv
Authentication enabled / encryption enabled.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

166 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Notification Receiver Type

The receiver type defines the SNMP version and the type of notification. SNMP inform
notifications have to be acknowledged by the receiver, SNMP traps do not. The following
options are possible:
– SNMPv1 Trap
– SNMPv2c Trap
– SNMPv2c Inform
– SNMPv3 Trap
– SNMPv3 Inform
• Notification Receiver Address
Enter the IP address of the receiver station to which the device sends SNMP notifications. You
can specify up to ten different receivers servers.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Notification Receiver Address
If necessary, change the IP address of the stations.
• Notification Receiver Type
Shows the defined receiver type.
• SNMP Engine ID
The ID of the SNMP engine to which SNMPv3 inform notifications are sent. You can only
configure this parameter for the "SNMPv3-Inform" receiver type.
• Notification
Enable or disable sending of SNMP notifications. Stations that are entered but not selected do
not receive SNMP notifications.
Note
If a table is grayed out, the corresponding notification was configured via the CLI and can only
be deleted via the CLI.

Procedure
Configuring a notification
1. Select the receiver for SNMPv3 notifications in the "SNMPv3 Notify User" drop-down list.
2. Select the security level for SNMPv3 notifications in the "SNMPv3 Notify Security Level" drop-
down list.
3. Select the receiver type in the "Notification Receiver Type" drop-down list.
4. In "Notification Receiver Address", enter the IP address of the station to which the device
should send traps or notifications.
5. Click the "Create" button to create a new trap entry.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 167
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6. Activate "Notification" in the required row.

7. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting a trap entry
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.

6.4.12 System Time

There are different methods that can be used to set the system time of the device. Only one
method can be active at any one time.
If one method is activated, the previously activated method is automatically deactivated.

[Link] Manual Setting

Manual setting of the system time

On this page, you set the date and time of the system yourself. For this setting to be used, enable
"Time Manually".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

168 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Time Manually
Enable the manual time setting. If you enable the option, the "System Time" input box can be
edited.
• System Time
Enter the date and time in the format MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss.
After a restart, the time of day begins at 01/01/2000 [Link].
• Use PC Time
Click the button to use the time setting of the PC.
• Last Synchronization Time
Shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place. If no time-of-day
synchronization was possible, the box displays "Date/time not set".
• Last Synchronization Mechanism
Shows how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed.
– Not set
The time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
• Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active.
– active (offset +1 h)
The system time was changed to daylight saving time; in other words an hour was added.
You can see the current system time at the top right in the selection area of the WBM.
The current time including daylight saving time is displayed in the "System Time" box.
– inactive (offset +0 h)
The current system time is not changed.

Procedure
1. Enable the "Time Manually" option.
2. In the "System Time" input box, enter the date and time in the format MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
The date and time are adopted and "Manual" is entered in "Last Synchronization Mechanism"
box.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 169
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

[Link] DST Overview

On this page, you can create new entries for the daylight saving time changeover.
The table provides an overview of the existing entries.

Settings

• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• DST No.
Shows the number of the entry.
If you create a new entry, a new line with a unique number is created.
• Name
Shows the name of the entry.
• Year
Shows the year for which the entry was created.
• Start Date
Shows the month, day and time for the start of daylight saving time.
• End Date
Shows the month, day and time for the end of daylight saving time.
• Recurring Date
With an entry of the type "Rule", the period in which daylight saving time is active is displayed
consisting of week, day, month and time of day.
With an entry of the type "Date" a "-" is displayed.
• State
Shows the status of the entry:
– Enabled
The entry was created correctly.
– Invalid
The entry was created new and the start and end date are identical.
• Type
Shows how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
A fixed date is entered for the daylight saving time changeover.
– Rule
A rule was defined for the daylight saving time changeover.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

170 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
Creating an entry
1. Click the "Create" button.
A new entry is created in the table.
2. Click on the required entry in the "DST No." column.
You change to the "DST Configuration" page.
3. Select the required type in the "Type" drop-down list.
Depending on the selected type, various settings are available.
4. Enter a name in the "Name" box.
5. If you have selected the type "Date", fill in the following boxes.
– Year
– Day (for start and end date)
– Hour (for start and end date)
– Month (for start and end date)
6. If you have selected the type "Rule", fill in the following boxes.
– Hour (for start and end date)
– Month (for start and end date)
– Week (for start and end date)
– Day (for start and end date)
7. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting an entry
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.

[Link] DST Configuration

On this page, you can configure the entries for the daylight saving time changeover. As result of
the changeover to daylight saving or standard time, the system time for the local time zone is
correctly set.
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover or specify a fixed date.

Settings

Note
The content of this page depends on the selection in the "Type" box.
The boxes "DST No.", "Type" and "Name" are always shown.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 171
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• DST No.
Select the type of the entry.
• Type
Select how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
You can set a fixed date for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time changeover is not
governed by rules.
– Rule
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time always begins or ends
on a certain weekday.
• Name
Enter a name for the entry.
The name can be a maximum of 16 characters long.
Settings with "Date" selected

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

172 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

You can set a fixed date for the start and end of daylight saving time.
• Year
Enter the year for the daylight saving time changeover.
• Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
• End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
Settings with "Rule" selected

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 173
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

You can create a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
• Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the first to fifth or the last week of the month.
– Day
Specify the weekday.
• End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the first to fifth or the last week of the month.
– Day
Specify the weekday.

[Link] SNTP Client

Time-of-day synchronization in the network

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used for synchronizing the time in the network. The
appropriate frames are sent by an SNTP server in the network.

Note
To avoid time jumps, make sure that there is only one time server in the network.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

174 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SNTP Client
Enable or disable automatic time-of-day synchronization using SNTP.
• Current System Time
Shows the current date and current normal time received by the device. If you specify a time
zone, the time information is adapted accordingly.
• Last Synchronization Time
Shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
• Last Synchronization Mechanism
Shows how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following methods are
possible:
– Not set
The time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 175
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Time Zone
In this box, enter the time zone you are using in the format +/- hh:mm. The time zone relates
to UTC standard world time.
The time in the "Current System Time" box is adapted accordingly.
• Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active.
– active (offset +1 h)
The system time was changed to daylight saving time; in other words an hour was added.
You can see the current system time at the top right in the selection area of the WBM.
The current time including daylight saving time is displayed in the "System Time" box.
– inactive (offset +0 h)
The current system time is not changed.
• SNTP Mode
Select the synchronization mode from the drop-down list. The following types of
synchronization are possible:
– Listen
With this mode, the device is passive and receives SNTP frames that deliver the time of
day. Settings in the input boxes "SNTP Server Address" and "SNTP Server Port" have no
effect in this mode.
In this mode, only IPv4 addresses are supported.
– Poll
If you select this mode, the input box "Poll Interval[s]" is displayed to allow further
configuration. In this mode, the settings in the input boxes "SNTP Server Address" and
"SNTP Server Port" are taken into account. With this type of synchronization, the device is
active and sends a time query to the SNTP server.
In this mode, IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
• Poll Interval[s]
Here, enter the interval between two time queries. In this box, you enter the query interval
in seconds. Possible values are 16 to 16284 seconds.
• SNTP Server Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the SNTP server.
• SNTP Server Port
Enter the port of the SNTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
• Primary
The check mark is set for the SNTP server that you create first. If several SNTP servers have
been created, the primary server is queried first.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

176 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Click the "SNTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting.
2. In the "Time Zone" input box, enter the local time difference to world time (UTC). The input
format is +/-hh:mm (for example +02:00 for CEST, Central European Summer Time), because
the SNTP server always sends the UTC time. This time is then recalculated and displayed as
the local time based on the specified time zone. You configure the daylight saving time
switchover on the pages "System > System Time > DST Overview" and "System > System Time
> DST Configuration". You also need to take this into account when completing the "Time
Zone" input box.
3. Select one of the following options from the "SNTP Mode" drop-down list:
– Poll
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- Time zone difference (step 2)
- Query interval (step 4)
- Time server (step 5)
- Port (step 7)
- Complete the configuration with step 8.
– Listen
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- Time difference to the time sent by the server (step 2)
- Complete the configuration with step 8.
4. In the "Poll Interval[s]" input box, enter the time in seconds after which a new time query is
sent to the time server.
5. In the "SNTP Server Address" input box, enter the IP address or the FQDN of the SNTP server
whose frames will be used to synchronize the time of day.
6. Click the "Create" button.
A new row is inserted in the table for the SNTP server.
7. In the "SNTP Server Port" column, enter the port via which the SNTP server is available. The
port can only be modified if the IPv4 address or the FQDN name of the SNTP server is entered.
8. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer your changes to the device.

[Link] NTP Client

Automatic time-of-day setting with NTP

If time synchronization is to take place via NTP, define the time server that is used to synchronize
the time.

Note
To avoid time jumps, make sure that there is only one time server in the network.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 177
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• NTP Client
Select this check box to enable automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP.
• Secure NTP Client only
When enabled, the device receives the system time from a secure NTP server. The setting
applies to all server entries.
To use the secure NTP client, you configure the parameters for authentication (key ID, hash
algorithm, key).
Note
We highly recommend using a secure NTP server.

• Current System Time

Shows the current date and current normal time received by the device. If you specify a time
zone, the time information is adapted accordingly.
• Last Synchronization Time
Shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

178 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Last Synchronization Mechanism

Shows how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following methods are
possible:
– Not set
The time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
• Time Zone
In this box, enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- hh:mm". The time zone relates
to UTC standard world time.
The time in the "Current System Time" box is adapted accordingly.
• Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active.
– active (offset +1 h)
The system time was changed to daylight saving time; in other words an hour was added.
You can see the current system time at the top right in the selection area of the WBM.
The current time including daylight saving time is displayed in the "System Time" box.
– inactive (offset +0 h)
The current system time is not changed.
• NTP Server Index
Select the index of the NTP server. The NTP servers are queried in the order of the NTP Server
Index. The time of the server that is found first is applied. If time frames of an NTP server with
a smaller stratum value are received, this time is applied. The switchover to the time with the
smaller stratum takes about 30 minutes
In the table, configure the NTP server:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• NTP Server Index
Number corresponding to a specific NTP server entry.
• NTP Server Address
Enter the IP address, the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) or the host name of the NTP
server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 179
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• NTP Server Port

Enter the port of the NTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
• Poll Interval
Specify the interval between two-time queries. The greater the interval, the less accurate the
time of the device.
Possible values are 64 to 2592000 seconds (30 days).
The following columns are only relevant for a secure NTP client. If the check box "Secure NTP
Client only" is not selected, these boxes are grayed out:
• Key ID
Enter the ID of the authentication key.
• Hash Algorithm
Specify the format for the authentication key.
• Key
Enter the authentication key. The length depends on the hash algorithm.
– DES: ASCII 8 characters
– MD5: ASCII 16 – 128 characters
– SHA1: ASCII 20 – 128 characters
– SHA256: ASCII 32 – 128 characters
• Key Confirmation
Repeat the authentication key.

Procedure
Time-of-day synchronization via NTP server
1. Click the "NTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting using NTP.
2. In "Time Zone", enter the local time difference to world time (UTC).
The input format is "+/-HH:MM" because the NTP server always sends UTC time, for example
+02:00 for CEST, the Central European Summer Time. This time is converted into local time
based on the specified time zone.
3. Select the "NTP Server Index".
4. Click the "Create" button.
A row for the NTP server is created in the table.
5. In "NTP Server Address", enter the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server whose frames are
used to synchronize the time of day.
6. In "NTP Server Port", enter the port via which the NTP server is available. The port can only be
modified if the address of the NTP server is entered.
7. In the "Poll Interval" column, enter the interval in seconds after which a new time-of-day
query is started on the time server.
8. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

180 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Time-of-day synchronization via a secure NTP server

To synchronize the time of day via a secure NTP server, the following additional steps are
necessary:
1. Click the "Secure NTP Client only" check box to enable the automatic time setting using
Secure NTP.
2. Configure the authentication.
– In "Key ID", enter the ID of the authentication key.
– In "Hash Algorithm", select the required format.
– In "Key" enter the authentication key.
With these entries, the NTP client authenticates itself with the secure NTP server. These
entries must be present on the secure NTP server.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] SIMATIC Time Client

Time setting via SIMATIC time client

Note
To avoid time jumps, make sure that there is only one time server in the network.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• SIMATIC Time Client
Select this check box to enable the device as a SIMATIC time client.
• Current System Time
Shows the current system time.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 181
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Last Synchronization Time

Shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
• Last Synchronization Mechanism
Shows how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following methods are
possible:
– Not set
The time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame

Procedure
1. Click the "SIMATIC Time Client" check box to enable the SIMATIC Time Client.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.13 Auto Logout

Setting the automatic logout

On this page, set the times after which there is an automatic logout from the WBM or the CLI
following user inactivity.
If you have been logged out automatically, you will need to log in again.

Note
No automatic logout from the CLI
If the connection is not terminated after the set time, check the "Keep alive" setting on the Telnet
client.
If the interval for "Keep alive" is shorter than the configured time, the connection is maintained
although no user data is transferred. You have set, for example, 300 seconds for the automatic
logoff and the "Keep alive" function is set to 120 seconds. In this case, a packet is sent every 120
seconds that keeps the connection uninterrupted.
• Turn off the "Keep alive" (interval time=0)
or
• Set the interval high enough so that the underlying connection is terminated when there is
inactivity.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

182 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Enter a value of 60-3600 seconds in the "Web Base Management [s]" input box. If you enter
the value 0, the automatic logout is disabled.
2. Enter a value of 60-600 seconds in the "CLI (TELNET, SSH) [s]" input box. If you enter the value
0, the automatic logout is disabled.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.14 Syslog Client

System event agent

Syslog according to RFC 5424 is used for transferring short, unencrypted text messages over
UDP in the IP network. This requires a Syslog server.

Requirements for sending log entries:

• The Syslog function is enabled on the device.
• The Syslog function is enabled for the relevant event.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 183
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• There is a Syslog server in your network that receives the log entries. (Since this is a UDP
connection, there is no acknowledgment to the sender)
• The IP address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the Syslog server is entered on
the device.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Syslog Client
Enable or disable the Syslog function.
• Syslog Server Address
Enter the IP address, the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) or the host name of the Syslog
server.
This table contains the following columns
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Syslog Server Address
Shows the IP address, the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) or the host name of the
Syslog server.
• Server Port
Enter the port of the Syslog server being used.
• TLS
When this check box is selected, communication with the Syslog server is encrypted.

Procedure
Enabling function
1. Select the "Syslog Client" check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

184 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Creating a new entry

1. In the "Syslog Server Address" text box, enter the IP address, the FQDN or the host name of
the Syslog server on which the log entries will be saved.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
3. In the "Server Port" input box, enter the number of the UDP port of the server.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The default setting of the server port is 514.

Changing the entry

1. Delete the entry.
2. Create a new entry.
Deleting an entry
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. All selected entries are deleted and the display is refreshed.

6.4.15 Fault Monitoring

[Link] Power Supply

Settings for monitoring the power supply

Configure whether or not the power supply should be monitored by the messaging system.
Depending on the hardware variant, there are one or two power connectors (Supply 1 / Supply
2) and a PoE power supply. With a redundant power supply, configure the monitoring separately
for each individual feed-in line.
A fault is then signaled by the message system when there is no power on a monitored
connection (Power Line 1, Power Line 2 or PoE) or when the applied voltage is too low.

Note
You will find the permitted operating voltage limits in the operating instructions of the device.

If a fault occurs, the error LED lights up on the device. The currently pending fault is
displayed under "Information > Faults".
In addition, the corresponding error message is entered in the result log table. The content of
the event log table is displayed in "Information > Log Tables > Event Log".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 185
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Click the check box in front of the line name you want to monitor to enable or disable the
monitoring function.
2. From the "PROFINET Redundancy" drop-down list, select the desired entry for redundant
power supply to be monitored by PROFINET.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] Link Change

Configuration of fault monitoring of status changes on connections

On this page, you configure whether or not an error message is triggered if there is a status
change on a network connection.
If connection monitoring is enabled, an error is signaled
• when there should be a link on a port and this is missing.
• or when there should not be a link on a port and a link is detected.
If a fault occurs, the error LED lights up on the device. The currently pending fault is
displayed under "Information > Faults".
In addition, the corresponding error message is entered in the result log table. The content of
the event log table is displayed in "Information > Log Tables > Event Log".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

186 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the available ports.
• Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options:
– Up
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the active status.
(From "Link down" to "Link up")
– Down
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the inactive status.
(From "Link up" to "Link down")
– "-" (disabled)
The error handling is not triggered.

Procedure
Configure error monitoring for a port
1. From the relevant drop-down list, select the options of the slots / ports whose connection
status you want to monitor.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configure error monitoring for all ports
1. Select the required setting from the drop-down list of the "Setting" column.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.4.16 PROFINET

Settings for PROFINET

This page shows the PROFINET AR status and the device name.

Note
GSDML-configuration file: Mode Type
The GSDML configuration file can be used to configure the transfer mode for the Ethernet port.
The SCALANCE WxM76x supports only the "Autonegotiation" setting.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 187
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• PROFINET Device Diagnostics
Shows whether PROFINET is enabled ("On") or disabled ("Off").
• PROFINET runtime mode for next boot
Set whether PROFINET will be enabled ("On") or disabled ("Off") after the next device restart.
Note
PROFINET AR Status
If a PROFINET connection is established; in other words the PROFINET AR status is "Online",
you cannot disable PROFINET.

• PROFINET AR Status
This box shows the status of the PROFINET connection; in other words whether the device is
connected to a PROFINET controller "Online" or "Offline".
Here, online means that a connection to a PROFINET IO controller exists, that this has
downloaded its configuration data to the device and that the device can send status data to
the PROFINET IO controller. In this status known as "in data exchange", the parameters set via
the PROFINET controller cannot be configured.
• PROFINET Name of Station
This box displays the PROFINET device name according to the configuration in HW Config of
STEP 7 or via the CLI with the pnio station-name command.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

188 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.17 PLUG

[Link] Configuration

NOTICE
Do not remove or insert the PLUG during operation.
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether a PLUG is inserted at one second intervals. If it is detected that the
PLUG has been removed, the device restarts.
If a valid PLUG license was inserted in the device, the device changes to a defined error state
following the restart. With SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in
this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG license, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory settings.

Information about the PLUG configuration

This page provides detailed information about the configuration stored on the PLUG. It is also
possible to reset the PLUG to "factory defaults" or to load it with new contents.

Note
The action is only executed after you click the "Set Values" button.
The action cannot be undone.
If you decide against executing the function after making your selection, click the "Refresh"
button. As a result the data of this page is read from the device again and the selection is
canceled.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 189
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

190 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The table has the following rows:
• State
Shows the status of the PLUG. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
There is a PLUG with a valid and suitable configuration in the device.
– NOT ACCEPTED
Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
– NOT PRESENT
No PLUG is inserted in the device.
– FACTORY
PLUG is inserted and does not contain a configuration. This status is also displayed when
the PLUG was formatted during operation.
• Device Group
Shows the SIMATIC NET product line that used the PLUG previously.
• Device Type
Shows the device type within the product line that used the PLUG previously.
• Configuration Revision
The version of the configuration structure. This information relates to the configuration
options supported by the device and has nothing to do with the concrete hardware
configuration. This revision information does not therefore change if you add or remove
additional components (modules or extenders), it can, however, change if you update the
firmware.
• File System
Displays the type of file system on the PLUG.
• File System Size [Kilobytes]
Displays the maximum storage capacity of the file system on the PLUG.
• File System Usage [Kilobytes]
Displays the memory utilization of the file system of the PLUG.
• Info String
Shows additional information about the device that used the PLUG previously, for example,
article number, type designation, and the versions of the hardware and software. The
displayed software version corresponds to the version in which the configuration was last
changed. With the "NOT ACCEPTED" status, further information on the cause of the problem
is displayed.
If a PLUG was configured as a PRESET PLUG this is shown here as additional information in the
first row. For more detailed information on creating and using a PRESET PLUG refer to the
section "Maintenance (Page 313)".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 191
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Firmware on PLUG
The setting is enabled by default.
When enabled, the firmware will be stored on the PLUG. This means that automatic firmware
updates/downgrades can be made with the PLUG. The "Info String" box shows whether or not
the firmware is stored on the PLUG. You can find more information on this in the section
"Configuration License PLUG (CLP) (Page 29)".
• Modify PLUG
Select the required setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options for
changing the configuration on the PLUG:
– Write current configuration to PLUG
This option is available only if the status of the PLUG is "NOT ACCEPTED" or "FACTORY".
The configuration in the internal flash memory of the device is copied to the PLUG.
– Erase PLUG to factory default
Deletes all data from the PLUG and performs low-level formatting.

Procedure
Requirement:
• User with administrator rights
Modifying the PLUG configuration
1. Select the required option from the "Modify PLUG" drop-down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] License

NOTICE
Do not remove or insert the PLUG during operation.
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether a PLUG is inserted at one second intervals. If it is detected that the
PLUG has been removed, the device restarts.
If a valid PLUG license was inserted in the device, the device changes to a defined error state
following the restart. With SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in
this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG license, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory settings.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

192 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Information about the license of the PLUG

A PLUG configuration can only store the configuration of a device. In addition to the
configuration, a PLUG license also contains a license that enables certain functions.

Description of the displayed boxes

• State
Shows the status of the PLUG license. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
The PLUG in the device contains a suitable and valid license.
– NOT ACCEPTED
The license of the inserted PLUG is not valid
– NOT PRESENT
No PLUG is inserted in the device.
– MISSING
There is no PLUG inserted. Functions are configured on the device for which a license is
required.
– WRONG
The inserted PLUG is not suitable for the device.
– UNKNOWN
Unknown content of the PLUG license.
– DEFECTIVE
The content of the PLUG license contains errors.
• Article number
Shows the article number of the PLUG. The PLUG is available for various functional
enhancements and for various target systems.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 193
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Serial number
Shows the serial number of the PLUG.
• Info String
Displays additional information about the PLUG.

Note
When you save the configuration, the information about whether or not a PLUG was inserted in
the device at the time is also saved. This configuration is then only executable, if a PLUG with the
same article number / license is plugged in. This applies regardless of whether or not iFeatures
are configured.

6.4.18 Ping

Reachability of an address in an IP network

With the Ping function, you can check whether a certain IP address is reachable in the network.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

194 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Destination Address
Enter the IPv4, IPv6 address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the device.
• Repeat
Enter the number of Ping requests.
• DNS Resolution
Select the IP address type in which an entered FQDN will be resolved.
– Auto
In this mode, the IP address type is selected automatically.
– IPv4
The entered FQDN will be resolved in an IPv4 address.
– IPv6
The entered FQDN will be resolved in an IPv6 address.
• Out Interface for IPv6
This selection is only required when the destination address is a multicast or a link local
address.
– "-" (factory setting)
– Select the relevant IPv6 interface.
• Ping
Click this button to start the Ping function.
• Ping Output
This box shows the output of the Ping function.
• Clear
Click this button to delete the ping output.

6.4.19 DCP Discovery

On this page, you can select an interface and search for devices that are reachable via the
interface and support DCP. DCP Discovery only searches for devices located in the same subnet
as the interface. The reachable devices are listed in a table. In the table you can check and adapt
the network parameters of the devices. To identify and configure the devices the Discovery
Configuration Protocol (DCP) is used.

Note
DCP Discovery
The function is only available with the VLAN associated with the TIA interface. You can
configure the TIA interface with "Layer 3 > Subnets > Configuration".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 195
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Requirement:
To adapt network parameters, DCP requires write access to the device. If access is write-
protected, the network parameters cannot be configured.
On SCALANCE devices, you configure access under "System > Configuration".

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Timeout[s]
Specify the time for flashing. When the time elapses, flashing stops.
• Blink Own LEDs
Makes the LEDs of your own device flash.
You will find which LEDs flash in the operating instructions of the device, section "Device
description > LED display", explanation on localization of the device.
• Interface
Select the required interface.
• Discover
Starts the search for devices reachable via the selected interface.
On completion of the search the reachable devices are listed in the table. The table is limited
to 100 entries.
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the port via which the device can be reached.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the device.
• Device Type
Shows the product line or product group to which the device belongs.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

196 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

• Device Name
Adapt the PROFINET device name if necessary.
The device name must be DNS-compliant. If the device name is not used, the box is empty.
• IP Address
If necessary, adapt the IPv4 address of the device.
The IPv4 address should be unique within your network and should match the network. The
IPv4 address [Link] means that no IPv4 address has yet been set.
• Subnet mask
If necessary, adapt the subnet mask of the device.
• Gateway Address
Adapt the IPv4 address of the gateway if necessary.
• Status Device Name
– None: The device name is not used.
– Discovered: The set device name is used.
– Configured: The device was assigned a new device name.
• IP Status
– Discovered/IP: The device uses a static IPv4 address.
– Discovered/DHCP: The device has obtained the IPv4 address from a DHCP server.
– Configured: The device was assigned a new IPv4 address.
• Timeout[s]
Specify the time for flashing. When the time elapses, flashing stops.
• Flash
Makes the LEDs of the selected device flash.

Procedure
1. Select the TIA interface.
2. To show all devices that can be reached via the TIA interface, click the "Browse" button.
3. Adapt the desired properties.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
The status of the modified properties changes to "Configured".
5. To ensure that the properties were applied correctly, click the "Browse" button again.
The status of the modified properties changes to "Discovered".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 197
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

6.4.20 Configuration Backup

Backup
On this page, you can create backups of the configuration and save them on the device. The
backups are created in "ConfigPack" format and include users with passwords, certificates and
favorites in addition to the configuration. You can restore these backups directly from the device.
After the restore, the device restarts. The maximum number depends on the size of the backup
and the available memory space.
On the "System > Load&Save > HTTP/TFTP/SFTP" page, you can save the created backups in
ZIP format under "ConfigPackBackup" on your client PC to be able to load them from there
later. You can find more detailed information in the section "Load & Save (Page 129)".

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Name
Enter a name for the backup.
The table contains the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Name
Shows the name of the backup.
• Size [KB]
The first row "Available memory" shows how much memory is available for backups on the
device. When you create a backup, the available memory space is reduced accordingly.
The other rows show the size of each backup.
• Restore
Click the "Restore" button to load the relevant backup on the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

198 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Procedure
1. Enter the required name.
2. Click the "Create" button.
The current configuration is saved as a configuration backup.
Saving the backup may take some time. A new row is created for the backup. The size of the
backup is displayed and subtracted from the available memory space.

6.4.21 TCP event

On this page, you can enable the "TCP Event" function. After enabling, the device waits for
incoming TCP packets on the configured port. These TCP packets can be used to trigger the "Sleep
Mode" function or to initiate a roaming operation on the client. You can also switch the digital
output on or off. Authorization is performed by comparing the user data.
If the incoming TCP packet contains comformant data, the command contained in it is
executed.

Availability of the TCP events

The availability of TCP events depends on the device variant and the selected operating mode.
In the table, TCP events are listed according to the device variant.

Product Article number TCP Event

Digital Out Sleep Mode WLAN Roam‐
ing
SCALANCE WAM766-1 6GK5766-1GE00-7DA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) 2)
SCALANCE WAM766-1 6GK5766-1GE00-7TA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) 2)
EEC
SCALANCE WUM766-1 6GK5766-1GE00-3DA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1)
SCALANCE WAM763-1 6GK5763-1AL00-7DA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) 2)
SCALANCE WUM763-1 6GK5763-1AL00-3AA0 - ✓ ✓ 1)
6GK5763-1AL00-3DA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1)
SCALANCE WAB762-1 6GK5762-1AJ00-6AA0 - - -

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 199
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

SCALANCE WUB762-1 6GK5762-1AJ00-1AA0 - - -

6GK5762-1AJ00-2AA0 - - ✓
1)
Only with CLP iFeatures
2)
In client mode only

Format of the TCP packet

The command is sent in a TCP packet that conforms to the following format:
<User name>#<Password>#<command code>#<command string>:
The <command code> parameter specifies the TCP event. The following values are possible:
• 106 Digital Out
• 107 Sleep Mode
• 109 WLAN Roaming (client only)
You specify the parameters of the TCP event in the command string <command string>.
The parameters are separated by semicolons and ended with a colon.

Note
Permitted characters for user name and password
The following characters are permitted:
• 0123456789
• A...Z a...z
• . -_
Additionally allowed in the password:
• Space
• !"%&/()=?*+<>',

Requirements for using the TCP event "WLAN Roaming"

• The TCP event "WLAN Roaming" is only available with an inserted CLP iFeatures. You will find
further information on this in the configuration manual, section "Description > CLP
(Page 29)".
• The TCP event "WLAN Roaming" is configurable in client mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

200 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

Description
The page contains the following:
• Enable
Enable or disable reception of the TCP packets. To log this, activate the "TCP Event Log" event
under "System > Event".
• Username
Enter the user name to check the reception of the TCP packet. The user name and password
are entered in the TCP packet.
• Password
Enter the password belonging to the user name.
• Password (Confirmation)
Repeat the password to confirm it.
• Port number
Define the port at which the device waits for the TCP packets. The standard port 26864 is
preset, or you can enter a port number in the range 1 … 65535.
Note
Reserved ports
Some ports are permanently reserved. Make sure that the specified port is not already in use.
You can find the ports used in the "List of available services (Page 19)".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 201
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

The table contains the following columns:

• Enable
Enable or disable the event.
• Event
– Digital Out
Switch the digital output on or off. The digital output is reset on restart (switched off).
<User name>#<Password>#106#<(1,2)>:
The last parameter specifies the sequence number: 1 (switch on) or 2 (switch off).
Power on:
<User name>#<Password>#106#1:
Power off:
<User name>#<Password>#106#2:
Note
Retaining the state of the digital output
The device can note the current state of the digital output and restore it after a restart. You
can find more information on the WBM page "System > Configuration".

– Sleep Mode
Trigger the "Sleep Mode" function:
<User name>#<Password>#107#1;<Time>:
The last parameter specifies the sleep time in minutes.
In the following example, sleep mode is triggered for 10 minutes:
<User name>#<Password>#107#1;10:

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

202 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.4 "System" menu

– WLAN Roaming (client only)

Control the roaming operation on the client via the TCP connection to enable faster
roaming operations of the client:
<User name>#<Password>#109#<command string>:
The WLAN roaming behavior of the client is configured in the command
string <command string>. The parameters are separated by semicolons and ended
with a colon. They have the following order:
<Frequency band>;<Channel (Channel number)>;<Execution
Time>;<BSSID>;<Threshold>:

Parameter Description Range of values/note

Frequency band Frequency band 2 = 2.4 GHz
5 = 5 GHz
Channel (Channel Channel number Enter the channel number e.g.
number) 36
Range of values 1 to 233
Execution Time Execution time 0 = Decision by client when it
uses the channel/BSSID
1 = Immediate roaming
BSSID MAC address of an AP to which Enter the MAC address of the
the client has to roam associated VAP of the access
point, e.g. d4-f5-27-b9-d4-88.
You can find the MAC address
in the list of available access
points on the page "Informa‐
tion > WLAN > Available AP
(Page 105)".
When 00-00-00-00-00-00 is
entered, no AP is defined and
the client starts the search for
available APs
Threshold Optional parameter (dBm) 0 = Not used
No function in V2.0
Example of a command string:
myusername#mypassword#109#5;36;1;d4-f5-27-b9-d4-88;0:

Conditions for WLAN roaming via TCP event

WLAN roaming can be initiated when the following conditions are met:
• The frequency band in the command string matches the frequency band currently
configured on the device.
• The channel number is in the frequency band configured on the device and this channel is
available in the configuration.
• The client is connected to an access point when the TCP event command is received.
• The client is not currently connected to the access point that has the specified BSSID.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 203
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

If WLAN roaming fails, this event is logged.

Note
Identical WLAN configuration of the access points for WLAN roaming via TCP event
required
For problem-free WLAN roaming via TCP, all access points must have identical configuration of
the WLAN interface or the VAP (frequency band, SSID, WLAN mode, channel bandwidth,
security, DFS).

6.5 "Interfaces" menu

6.5.1 Ethernet

[Link] Overview

Overview of the port configuration

The page shows the configuration for the data transfer for all ports of the device. You cannot
configure anything on this page.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the configurable ports. If you click on the link, the corresponding configuration page
is opened.
• Port name
Shows the name of the port.
• Status
Shows whether the port is on or off. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

204 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• OperStatus
Displays the current operational status. The operational status depends on the configured
"Status" and the "Link".
The available options are as follows:
– up
You have configured the status "enabled" for the port and the port has a valid connection
to the network.
– down
You have configured the status "disabled" or "Link down" for the port or the port has no
connection.
• Link
Shows the connection status to the network. With the connection status, the following is
possible:
– up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.
• Mode
Shows the transfer parameters of the port.
• Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration is enabled or disabled.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 205
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

[Link] Configuration

Configuring ports
With this page, you configure the Ethernet ports of the device.

Description
The table has the following rows:
• Port
Select the port to be configured from the drop-down list.
• Status
Specify whether the port is enabled or disabled.
– enabled
The port is enabled. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.
– disabled
The port is disabled.
• Port name
Enter a name for the port.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

206 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• Mode Type
The operating mode is set to "Auto negotiation". In this case, the parameters are negotiated
automatically with the connected terminal device. This must also be in the "Auto negotiation"
mode for this purpose.
Note
Before the port and partner port can communicate with each other, the settings must match
at both ends.

• Mode
Shows the transmission speed and the transmission method of the port.
• Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration of the connection to the partner port is enabled
or disabled.
• OperStatus
Displays the current operational status. The operational status depends on the configured
"Status" and the "Link". The available options are as follows:
– up
You have configured the status "enabled" for the port and the port has a valid connection
to the network.
– down
You have configured the status "disabled" or "Link down" for the port or the port has no
connection.
• Link
Shows the connection status to the network. The available options are as follows:
– Up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– Down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.

Procedure

Note
Changing the port configuration
With various automatic functions, the device prevents or reduces the effect on other ports and
priority classes (Class of Service) if a port is overloaded. This can mean that frames are discarded
even when flow control is enabled.
Port overload occurs when the device receives more frames than it can send, for example as the
result of different transmission speeds.

To change the configuration of a port, follow these steps:

1. Click the appropriate box to change the configuration.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 207
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

6.5.2 WLAN

[Link] Basic

Basic settings
On this page, you make several basic settings for the device, for example the country setting and
mode.

Note
To configure the WLAN interface, you must always specify the country code first. Some
parameters are dependent on the country setting, for example the transmission standard.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

208 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Description
• Country Code
Select the country in which the device will be operated from the drop-down list.
You do not need to know the data for the specific country, the channel division and output
power are set by the device according to the country you select.
You can find more information on currently available country approvals in the "Approvals
SCALANCE W700 802.11ax ([Link]
man)" documentation.
Note
Locale setting
The correct country setting is mandatory for operation complying with the approvals.
Selecting a country different from the country of use can lead to legal prosecution.

• Device Mode
Select the mode of the device. This selection is available only for access points.
The following modes are possible:
– AP - Access point mode
– Client - Client mode

Note
After the mode is changed, a message is displayed. If you confirm the message with "OK", the
device is reset to the memory defaults (protected settings) and restarted in the selected
mode.
If the device has restarted, you will need to log in again to be able to continue the
configuration.

• Frequency Band
Set frequency band with which the device operates.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
– 2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
Dual operation in access point mode. The prerequisite is that CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures
is plugged in and accepted. Simultaneous configuration, for example via the CLI or SNMP,
can lead to inconsistencies in the web-based management.
If you switch to the "2.4 GHz + 5 GHz" setting (dual mode), all settings for antennas on the
"Antennas&Cable" tab are set to "Not defined".
Note
iFeatures in dual mode
When using iFeatures iPCF-2 or iPRP on a WLAN interface, the other WLAN interface must
be operated as standard WLAN.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 209
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The table has the following columns:

• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band (Only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Enabled
Status of the WLAN interface. To enable the WLAN interface, select the check box.
Note
Enabling the WLAN interface
The WLAN interfaces are disabled in delivery state. The WLAN interfaces are can be enabled
once the country and the antenna settings are configured. In the client or in client mode, at
least one SSID must be configured and enabled in addition.
In Access Point mode only:
Dual mode of the WLAN interface with 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz is only possible if the following
prerequisites are met:
• a CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures is plugged in.
• the frequency band "2.4 GHz + 5 GHz" is set and
• the antennas are configured under "Antennas&Cable".

• Radio Mode
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

210 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• WLAN mode 2.4 GHz/WLAN mode 5 GHz

Select the required transmission standard for the configured frequency band. The selection
depends on the country setting.
Note
iPCF-2 after WLAN mode change
If the transmission standard is changed from 802.11ax to another transmission standard, the
enabled iPCF-2 mode is disabled. A message to this effect is displayed.

– Auto (in client mode only)

The transmission standard is determined automatically (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz).
– 802.11g
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11g (2.4 GHz) is set. This transmission standard is
downwards compatible with IEEE 802.11b.
– 802.11n
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11n (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) is set. This transmission
standard is downwards compatible with IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11g.
– 802.11a
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11a (5 GHz) is set.
– 802.11ac
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11ac (5 GHz) is set.
– 802.11ax
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11ax (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) is set.

Note
Data rate
The data rate is adjusted automatically.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 211
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• DFS (802.11h)
Enables or disables the "Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)" function.
– Enabled
With the DFS function, it is possible to also use the higher 5 Ghz channels.
These channels are country-specific and are subject to certain DFS regulations. You can
find additional information on this in the country-specific DFS documentation.
Before the access point transmits over one of these channels, it checks for competing
radar signals for 60 seconds according to the CAC (Channel Availability Check). The access
point also does not send any beacons for the duration of the search. With weather radar
channels (5.6 - 5.65 GHz), the duration of the search is 10 minutes.
If no radar signals are detected after the search period has elapsed, the access point
transmits on the channel. Otherwise, the access point changes channel and repeats the
check.
The access point also searches for radar signals continuously during operation.
If the access point discovers a radar signal on the current channel, it notifies the clients of
the channel change. It then automatically switches to an alternative DFS channel and the
current channel is blocked for 30 minutes.
– Disabled
The DFS function is not used.
• Outdoor Mode
– Enabled
If you have enabled Outdoor Mode, only the channels that are permitted for outdoor
operation are available to you.
– Disabled
If you have disabled Outdoor Mode, only the channels that are permitted for operation in
a building are available to you.

Procedure
1. To configure the WLAN interface, you must always specify the country first. Select the
country in which the device will be operated from the "Country Code" drop-down list.
2. Select the required frequency band from the "Frequency Band" drop-down list.
3. From the "WLAN Mode" drop down list, select the required transmission standard for the
configured frequency band.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

212 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

[Link] Antennas&Power

Overview
The following figures provide an overview of the IWLAN antennas that are suitable for use with
SCALANCE W devices.
Type of antenna

W1780/W1740
W760/W720,
W780/W740

W770/W730

W770/W730
range (GHz)

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE
WAM766-1/

WAM763-1/
WUM766-1

WUM763-1
Frequency

Antennas

IP65
2.4 ANT792-8DN ● ● ● ●

ANT793-8DP ● ● ● ●* ● ●
directional

ANT793-8DJ ● ● ● ●* ● ●
5

ANT793-8DK ● ● ● ●* ● ●

ANT793-8DL ● ● ● ●* ● ●

RCoax
radiating
cables ● ● ● ● ● ●
2.4 GHz
2.4

ANT792-4DN ● ● ● ● ● ●
RCoax

RCoax
radiating
cables ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 GHz
G_IK10_XX_30317

ANT793-4MN ● ● ● ● ● ●

*Antennas can only be used on one antenna connector per radio interface (R1A1 or R2A1) and the rest of the

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 213
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Type of antenna

W1780/W1740
W760/W720,
W780/W740

W770/W730

W770/W730
range (GHz)

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE

SCALANCE
WAM766-1/

WAM763-1/
WUM766-1

WUM763-1
Frequency

Antennas

IP65
2.4 ANT792-6MN ● ● ● ● ● ●

ANT897-4ME
● ●

ANT897-5PN
● ●

ANT795-4MA ● ● ●
omnidirectional

ANT795-4MB ● ● ●

2.4
and
ANT795-4MC ● ● ● ●
5

ANT795-4MD ● ● ● ●

ANT795-4MX ● ● ● ●

ANT795-6MN ● ● ● ● ● ●

ANT795-6MP ● ● ● ● ● ●

2.4
and ANT795-6DC ● ● ● ● ● ●
G_IK10_XX_30318

5
Sector

5 ANT793-6DG ● ● ● ● ● ●

Configuration of external antennas

On this page, you configure the settings for the connected external antennas.

Note
50 Ω terminating resistor
Each WLAN interface has two antenna connections. Connectors that are not used must have a
50 Ω terminating resistor fitted.
An antenna must always be connected to the R1 A1 antenna connection as soon as the WLAN
interface is switched on. If no antenna is connected, the relevant interface must also be disabled
for Rx and Tx. Otherwise, there may be transmission disruptions.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

214 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band (only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Max. Tx Power
The value you set here corresponds to the transmit power per antenna port. With transmit
power greater than 15 dBm, the transmit speed may be reduced.
Note
The maximum possible transmit power varies depending on the channel and data rate. For
more information on transmit power, refer to the documentation "Characteristics
SCALANCE W700 802.11ax".

• Max. conducted power

The value is the summed transmit power of all active antenna connections.
The calculation is made according to the following scheme:
– 1 antenna port
max. Tx power = max. conducted power
– 2 antenna connections
max. Tx power + 3 dBm = max. conducted power
• max. EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated Power)
Shows the current radiant power of the antenna, in relation to a non-directional antenna
(isotrop).
max. EIRP = max. conducted power + antenna gain – attenuation (antenna connections,
cable length and additional attenuation)

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 215
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Table 2 has the following columns:

• Connector
Shows the name of the relevant antenna connector.
• Frequency Band (only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
– 2.4 GHz + 5 GHz
Dual mode in access point mode, only available when CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures is
plugged in.
• Antenna Type
Select the type of external antenna connected to the device. If the type of your external
antenna is not available, select the entry "User defined".
If you terminate an antenna connector using a 50 Ω terminating resistor, select the entry "Not
used (Connect 50 Ohm Termination)".
Only dual-band antennas are available in dual mode. To simplify the configuration in the web-
based management, an antenna interface is displayed and the configuration is applied to
both logical interfaces.
Mixed configuration via the CLI and web-based management is not recommended to avoid
configuration inconsistencies.
Note
When you select an antenna, keep in mind:
• The antennas with national approval for your device You can find additional information
under Wireless approval ([Link]
• The country-specific and channel-dependent maximum permissible antenna gain You
can find additional information on this in the reference document "Approvals for
SCALANCE W700 802.11ax".

• Antenna Gain
If you select the "User defined" entry for the "Antenna Type", enter the antenna gain manually
in the "dBi" unit.
– Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain the antenna has in the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
– Antenna Gain 5 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain the antenna has in the 5 GHz frequency band.
• Cable Length [m]
Enter the length of the flexible antenna connecting cable in meters between the device and
the external antenna.
• Additional Attenuation [dB]
Here, specify the additional attenuation caused, for example, by an additional splitter.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

216 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• Antenna Mode
Specify the use of the antenna. For antenna connection R1 A1, the entry cannot be changed.
– Tx
For sending only
– Rx
For receiving only
– Rx/Tx
For receiving and sending
The following table shows which combinations are possible:

R1 A1 R1 A2
Rx/Tx Rx/Tx
Rx/Tx Rx
Rx/Tx Tx
Rx/Tx --1)

1) Antenna type "Not used (Connect 50 Ohm Termination)"

• Tx power check
Indicates whether the settings that have been made will violate the permitted transmit
power restrictions of the selected country. The calculated value of "max. EIRP" is checked to
determine whether this value violates the transmit power restriction of specific channels in
the set country. If "Use Allowed Channels only" is set, only the channels selected there are
checked.
Note
If you use the setting "Auto" or DFS for channels, you need to exclude the channels that are
not permitted using the "Allowed Channels" list.

– Channel numbers
Indicates the channels on which the current transmit power exceeds the maximum
permitted transmit power.
– "-"
The channels can be used with the current settings.

Procedure
Follow these steps to configure both antenna connections:
1. For the first antenna connector (R1 A1) in the "Antenna Type" drop-down list, select the type
of antenna.
2. In the "Cable Length" input box, enter the length of the connecting cable you are using in
meters. The "Antenna mode" entry cannot be changed at antenna connection R1A1.
3. For the second antenna connection (R1 A2), select the appropriate type of the second
antenna in the"Antenna Type" drop-down list and enter a value for "Cable length".
If you terminate the second antenna connection using a 50 Ω terminating resistor, select the
entry "Not used (Connect 50 Ohm Termination)".
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 217
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

[Link] Advanced

Further possible settings

On this page, you can specify details of the transmission characteristics. You only need to adapt
the parameters on this page if the SCALANCE W700 device cannot be used as it is intended with
the default settings.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
• Frequency Band (only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Beacon Interval [ms] (only in access point mode)
Specify the interval (10 - 1000 ms) at which the access point sends beacons. Beacons are
packets that are sent cyclically by an access point to inform clients of its existence.
Note
Interval with more than 2 VAP interfaces
With more than two VAP interfaces, use an interval greater than or equal to 100 ms.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

218 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• HW Retries
Specify the number of hardware retries. The max. number of hardware retries is 32.
The hardware retry is performed by the WLAN chip itself when it tries to repeat an
unacknowledged packet immediately.
If all hardware retries were unsuccessful, the packet is deleted and the WLAN client is
removed from the list.
Note
Hardware retries after an update to V2.1
If the number of hardware retries was set to more than 32 in an older firmware version, the
value is automatically set to 32 after the update to V2.1. This information is recorded in the
event log.

• A-MPDU
Aggregated MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU)
– Enabled
Multiple MPDU frames with the same destination address are bundled and sent as one
large A-MPDU. This allows the total throughput to be increased.
– Disabled
A-MPDU frames are received but not sent.

Procedure
1. Enter the values to be set in the input boxes as follows.
2. Select the option checkmark of the required functions.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] Allowed Channels

Channel settings
For communication, a specific channel within a frequency band is used. You can either set this
channel specifically or configure so that the channel is selected automatically.
On this page, you specify which channels may be used for communication.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 219
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Description
Table 1 contains the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band (only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Use Allowed Channels only
If you enable the option, you restrict the selection of channels via which the connection is
established.
In the following tables, you define which channels can be used to establish a wireless cell.
The tables are divided up according to frequency bands.
If the option is disabled, the channels available based on the settings (country code,
antennas, transmit power etc.) are used.
Above the tables for the frequency bands, you will find the following check box:
• Select / Deselect all
– Enabled
If you enable the check box, all channels are selected.
– Disabled
If you deselect the check box, the first valid channel of the frequency band remains
enabled. Enable the required channel.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

220 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The tables of the frequency bands have the following columns:

• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Radio Mode
Shows the mode.
• Channel number
To specify the valid channels for the required frequency band, select the appropriate check
box for the channel number.
The table displays the permitted channels of the country. Only the valid channels can be
enabled. Invalid channels are grayed out and cannot be enabled.
Note
To specify the channels, the setting "Use Allowed Channels only" must be enabled.

Procedure
1. Select the "Use Allowed Channels only" option for the required WLAN interface.
2. Deselect the check box "Select / Deselect all".
3. Select the relevant check box for the required channel number.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] AP

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 221
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Configuration
On this WBM page, you specify the configuration for the access point.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Channel
Specify the main channel.
If you want the access point to search for a free channel itself, use "Auto". The selection of
channels used by an access point when establishing a wireless cell can be restricted. To do
this, select the "Use Allowed Channels only" check box on the "Allowed Channels" page.
.If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel from the drop-down list.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

222 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• Alternative DFS Channel

If you have enabled the "DFS" function, on the "Basic" page, specify the alternative channel
here. If you want the access point to search for a free channel itself, use "Auto".
If a competing radar signal was detected both on the main and alternative channel, the
access point automatically searches for a free channel.
If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel from the drop-down list.
• Channel Width [MHz]
You can only specify the channel bandwidth for the IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11ac and IEEE
802.11 ax transmission standards.
The following settings are possible.
– 20 MHz
– 40 MHz
Only with IEEE 802.11ac/ax:
– 80 MHz
• Selected Channels
– Channel number (frequency) or Auto
When a fixed channel is set for "Channel", this channel is shown including frequency.
– At 80 MHz only and with fixed channel: Channel range
Four channels are required for the 80 MHz channel bandwidth in the corresponding
channel range. The channel range consists of the channel configured for "Channel" and
the three next channels.
• Selected Alternative DFS Channels
– Channel number (frequency) or Auto
When a fixed channel is set for "Alternative DFS Channel", this channel is shown including
frequency.
– At 80 MHz only and with fixed channel: Channel range
Four channels are required for the 80 MHz channel bandwidth in the corresponding
channel range. The channel range consists of the channel configured for "Channel" and
the three next channels.
Table 2 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Available Channels
This box displays the permitted channels. The display depends on the wireless approvals of
the currently selected country and the settings on the "Allowed Channels" page.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 223
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Table 3 has the following columns:

• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
• Port
Shows the VAP interface.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Enabled
To use the required VAP interface, select this check box.
• SSID
Enter the SSID of the WLAN. The length of the character string for SSID it is 1 to 32 characters.
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used for the SSID.
• Broadcast SSID
– deactived
The SSID is no longer sent in the beacon frame of the access point. This means that the
SSID is not visible for other devices. Only clients that know the SSID of the access point and
that are configured with it can connect to the access point.
– activated
The SSID is sent in the Beacon frame of the access point and is visible for other devices.

Note
Since no encryption is used for the SSID transfer, this function can only provide basic
protection against unauthorized access. The use of an authentication method (for example
WPA2 (RADIUS)/WPA3-SAE, if this is not possible WPA2-PSK) provides higher security. You
must also expect that certain terminal devices may have problems with access to a hidden
SSID.

Procedure
1. Select the required channel from the "Channel" drop-down list.
2. Enter network name in the "SSID" input box for the corresponding WLAN interface and port.
3. For the relevant WLAN interface and the port, select the "Enabled" check box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

224 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

[Link] Client

Connecting to a network
On this WBM page, you can specify how the device connects to a network as client.

Note
This WBM page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• MAC Mode
Specify how the MAC address is assigned to the client. The following are possible:
– Own
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
– Layer 2 Tunnel
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface. The
network is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet interface of the
client. Up to eight MAC addresses can be used.
Table 2 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Roaming Threshold
The client switches at a moderately higher field strength to the AP with the stronger signal.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 225
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• Background Scan Mode

While the client is connected to an access point, it scans for other access points in the
background with which it can connect when necessary. Specify the mode for the scan.
The following options are available:
– Always
The client scans continuously for access points.
– Disabled
As long as the client is connected, there is no scan for further access points.
The client updates its scan list based on the beacons (management frames) that it has
received on the current channel.
• Background Scan Interval [ms]
Specify the interval at which further access points are scanned.
• Scan time per channel
Define the scan time per channel.
There are three pre-defined settings for the scan time:
– Short: Active scan time: 50 ms, passive scan time: 90 ms
– Medium: Active scan time: 200 ms, passive scan time: 300 ms
– Long: Active scan time: 300 ms, passive scan time: 800 ms
You need to adapt the beacon interval accordingly on the access point. The beacon interval
should be no more than half of the passive scan time.
Table 3 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
• Scan Channels
Shows the channels on which the client searches for an access point. The display depends on
the wireless approvals of the selected country and the settings for "Allowed Channels".
Table 4 has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
• Enabled
Enables or disables the relevant SSID.
• SSID
Enter the SSID of the access point with which the client will connect.
For the SSID, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
• Security
Select a security context. You create and configure a security context in "Security > WLAN >
Basic".
Default setting: Context 1

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

226 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Procedure
1. From the "MAC Mode" drop-down list, select the required assignment of the MAC address.
2. Select the desired mode from the "Background Scan Mode" drop-down list and set the
background scan interval.
3. Select the required scan time from the "Scan Time per Channel" drop-down list.
4. In table 3, enter an SSID for "SSID".
5. Select a security context.
6. Enable the required SSID.
7. Click the "Set Values" button.

Note
Roaming
For problem-free roaming of the client between the access points, it is important not to block LLC
(Link Layer Control) frames in the wired network. The LLC frames are used to update the FDB
(Forwarding Database) table on the network devices.

[Link] Signal recorder

Recording the effective user signal

The signal recorder is used to record the effective user signal between access point and client.
Using this data, you can locate areas with an inadequate user signal. The signal recorder can be
particularly useful when the client moves along a fixed path.

Note
This WBM page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.
The WLAN interface of the device must be enabled; otherwise, no recording is possible.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 227
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Description
The display is divided into two areas.
• Client
Represents the measurement of the client.
• Access point
Displays the measurement of the access point with which the client is currently connected.
This requires that the setting "Bidirectional Recording" is enabled. The access point sends its
data to a maximum of 3 clients on which signal recorders are running. The access point data
is not displayed on other clients.
Both areas each contain two graphics.
The first graphic contains the following elements:
• Scroll bar
With the scroll bar, you can look through the entire measurement. To do this you can use the
"<<" and ">>" buttons or the arrow keys on the keyboard.
• Bar (left)
In the bar on the left, the wanted signal from the client / access point is displayed in real time
according to the color scheme shown.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

228 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• Color scheme
The range > -35 dBm (blue) is the overmodulation range, in other words the WLAN signal is
too strong and is received overmodulated. As of approximately -60 dBm (yellow) the WLAN
signal is weaker.
• x axis
The x axis shows the course of the measurement in random samples and seconds.
• Measurement data
– Client
The measurement data shows the value of the effective user signal according to the color
scheme shown. The gray line shows the background noise.
If the client changes access points during a measurement (roaming) or reconnects, this
is displayed by a vertical black line. On the line the new AP system name and the BSSID are
shown.
If during a measurement the client has no connection to an access point, no user signal
is displayed. To make it clear that there is no connection to an access point, the BSSID is
set to [Link] and shown in red.
– Access point
The measurement data shows the value of the effective user signal according to the color
scheme shown. The gray line shows the background noise.
If the client changes access points during a measurement (roaming) or reconnects, this
is displayed by a vertical black line.
If the access point does not support the setting "Bidirectional Recording" no user signal is
displayed
The second graphic contains the following elements:
• Bar (left)
In the bar, only the percentage of failed transfer attempts is displayed according to the color
scheme.
• Color scheme
The color scheme goes from green to red and shows the values of failed transfer attempts.
– Green (0%): All transfer attempts were successful.
– Red (100%): All transfer attempts have failed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 229
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• x axis
The x axis shows the course of the measurement in random samples and seconds.
• Measurement data
– Client
The measurement data shows the transfer attempts according to the color scheme
shown. The transfer attempts are shown as a bar. The data rate of the sent data packets
is represented as a gray line.
If the client changes access points during a measurement (roaming) or reconnects, this
is displayed by a vertical black line.
– Access point
The measurement data shows the transfer attempts according to the color scheme
shown. The transfer attempts are shown as a bar. The data rate of the sent data packets
is represented as a gray line.
If the client changes access points during a measurement (roaming) or reconnects, this
is displayed by a vertical black line. If the access point does not support the "Bidirectional
Recording" setting, no data is displayed.
Beside the graphics the following values are displayed:
• Status
Shows whether or not the signal recorder is recording values.
• Current Sample
The number of the current measurement
• CL RX-Signal [dBm] / AP RX-Signal [dBm]
The effective user signal of the client / access point in dBm
• CL NF [dBm] / AP NF [dBm]
The background noise of the client / access point in dBm
• CL Retries [%] / AP Retries [%]
The transfer repetitions of the client / access point as a percentage.
• CL RSSI / AP RSSI
The raw value of the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) of the client / access point
• CL TX-Rate [Mbps] / AP TX-Rate [Mbps]
The average data rate of the sent data packets during the current random test
• Roaming Counter
The roaming counter shows how often the client has changed access points during the
recording. After 4,294,967,295 changes, the counter is reset.
• Operative Channel
The current channel or the channel on which the client is connected to the access point
• AP System Name
The system name of the access point
• BSSID
The BSSID (Basic Service Set Identification) of the access point
• Connected Stations
Number of clients connected to the access point over the same VAP interface.
• Bidirectional Status
Shows whether the data of the access point are also being recorded.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

230 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The table below the graphic contains the following columns:

• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface to which the information applies. Since a client has a WLAN
interface, there is only ever one row for "WLAN 1" in this table.
• Interval [ms]
Specify the time interval between acquiring two measured values in milliseconds. The first
measured value is displayed only after the set time interval has elapsed.
• Samples
Specify how many measurements should be made.
• Endless
If you enable the option check mark, the number of measurements is unlimited The
"Samples" box is grayed out . The signal recorder runs until it is stopped manually or the
device is reconfigured.
You can only select this option starting at a time interval ≥ 100 milliseconds.
If the recording contains more than 10000 measurements, the last 10000 measurements are
listed in the csv file and the PDF file.
• Bidirectional Recording
If you enable the setting the values of the access point as of a time interval of ≥ 10
milliseconds.
The setting is supported by access points with the following versions: SCALANCE W700 11ax
V1.1 or higher.
• Start
Click the button in this column to start recording the wanted signal.
Note
• If you start a new recording, the previous recording will be overwritten.
• If the recording has lasted less than 10 minutes and has not yet been completed (e.g. due
to a restart or power down), the measured values are deleted.
The signal recorder saves the recorded data automatically every 10 minutes. Following a
restart, the recording contains all the values up to the last save action.
• Stop
Click the button in this column to stop recording the wanted signal prematurely. If the
specified number of measurements has been made, recording of the user data signal stops
automatically.
• Displayed Samples
Select how many measurements will be shown in the graphic.

Notes on usage
Note the following tips that will help you to obtain useful measurements with the signal
recorder:
• Set a fixed data rate on the access point.
• Make sure that there is enough data communication during the measurement because the
statistics functions evaluate incoming data frames.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 231
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• The measurement path should be traveled 2 to 3 times with the same parameters to find out
whether loss of the user data signal always occurs at the same position.
• Selective measurements at a fixed position should be made over a longer period of time.

Procedure
1. Enter the time interval between two measurements.
2. In "Samples" enter the number of measurements.
3. In "Displayed Samples" select how many measurements will be shown in the graphic.
4. Click the "Start" button.
The status (to the right of the graphic) indicates whether the signal recorder is running. The
first measured value is displayed only after the set time interval has elapsed.
5. To stop the recording, click the "Stop" button.
6. Change to one of the following menu items to call up the result of the recording:
– System > Load&Save > HTTP
Click the "Save" button in the "WLANSigRec" table row to save the file
"signal_recorder_SCALANCE_W700.zip" in the file system of the connected PC.
– System > Load&Save > TFTP / SFTP
If necessary, change the file name "signal_recorder_SCALANCE_W700.zip" in the
"WLANSigRec" table row. In the table row "WLANSigRec", select the "Save file" entry from
the drop-down list of the last column and click the "Save Values" button.
7. The ZIP file contains two files with the results of the recording:
– A PDF file: The output is limited to 300 pages.
– A CSV file: Complete listing of the recording.

Note
Number of stored measurements
The last 10000 measuring points are saved in the exported files.

Measurement results
PDF file
The PDF file contains a graphic representation of the course of the effective user data signal
in dBm and the course of the data rate in Mbps. In terms of color, the graphic corresponds
to the appearance in the Web Based Management. If the client changes the access point
(roaming) during the measurement, this is indicated by vertical black bars with a black
square at the tip.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

232 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The display is divided into two areas:

• Client
Represents the measurement of the client. Below the graphic, the configuration data of the
client is displayed.

• Access point
Displays the measurement of the access point with which the client is currently connected.
This requires that the setting "Bidirectional Recording" is enabled. The setting is supported by
access points with the following versions: SCALANCE W700 11n > V6.1, SCALANCE W1700
11ac > V1.0 and SCALANCE W700 11ax as of V1.1. The access point sends its data to a
maximum of 3 clients on which signal recorders are running. The access point data is not
displayed on other clients.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 233
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The following pages contain the detailed information of all individual measurements in the
form of a table.
The header row shows the IP address of the client and the BSSID and system name of the
access point.
Per measurement the table contains two rows. The data of the client is in the first row and
the data belonging to the access point in the second.

Page 2 shows a legend of the abbreviations in the table. The data starts on a new page when
the client changes access points.

Note
Note the description of the individual columns in the CSV file. These also apply to the columns
of the PDF file.

CSV file

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

234 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The CSV file contains information on the configuration of the SCALANCE W700 device and
detailed information on all individual measurements and is divided into two areas.

The first area contains the configured settings:

• System Name
The system name of the client
• Device IP
The IP address of the client
• Device MAC
The MAC address of the client
• Recording Interval
The interval between acquisition of two measured values.
• Max TX Power
Maximum transmit power of the device
• Begin Recording
Start of the recording
• End Recording
End of the recording
• Recorded Samples
The total number of measurements
• Max. TX Rate
The maximum data rate of the sent data packets
• Max. RX Rate
The maximum data rate of the received data packets
• Rx Antenna x type
The setting of the external antennas
The second area is a table. The table contains the following for each measured value:
• Sample
The current number of the measurement on the client (CL) / on the access point (AP)
• Timestamp
The time stamp
• BSSID
The BSSID (Basic Service Set Identification) of the access point

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 235
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

• CL / AP RX-Signal [%]
The effective user data signal of the client (CL) / access point (AP) in %
• CL / AP RX-Signal [dBm]
The effective user data signal of the client (CL) / access point (AP) in dBm
• CL / AP NF [dBm]
The background noise in dBm
• CL / AP RSSI
The raw value of the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)
• Roam
The roaming counter shows how often the client has changed access points during the
recording. After 4 294 967 295 changes the counter is reset.
• CL / AP Retry
The transfer repetitions of the client (CL) / access point (AP)
• Con Stations
Number of clients connected to the access point.
• Operating Ch.
The current channel or the channel on which the client is connected to the access point.
• Width
The channel bandwidth 20, 40 or 80 MHz
• Scan CH
The channel on which the client is currently scanning.
• TX-Rate
The average data rate of the sent data packets
• RX-Rate
The average data rate of the received data packets
• AP System Name
The system name of the access point

6.5.3 Packet Capture

Note
This page is available only in access point mode.

On this page, enable the function "Packet Capture" on the interface (Ethernet, WLAN). The
function is for network diagnostics via a connected PC, e.g. to detect transfer errors.
You can also enable the function on several interfaces at the same time. When the function
is enabled the interface can be linked in Wireshark. For a period Wireshark record the data
traffic over the interface. Afterwards, you can view the content of the frames from the
recording or filter according to certain contents.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

236 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

Note
Capture aborted after settings are changed
Changes to the settings of Packet Capture abort the capture. If the interface is still active, the
data collection process can be restarted after being aborted.

Description
The table contains the following columns:
• Interface
The interface to which the entry relates.
• Enable
Enable or disable the "Packet Capture" function. As default, the function is disabled.
Note
The access point records all incoming frames. Encrypted data is not decrypted before the
recording.
Performance
Enable the function only for diagnostics purposes. The increased data traffic could influence
the performance of the device.
Ethernet interface with SCALANCE WAM763-1
• You can select one or more ports (P1 - P4) for the Ethernet interface.
• Data traffic that is only forwarded and not received or sent by the WLAN interface is not
displayed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 237
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.5 "Interfaces" menu

The page contains the following box:

• Activate after System Restart
– Disabled
After a restart, the configuration is reset to the default setting.
– Enabled
The configuration is saved and retained after a restart.
• Port
Default port 2002 is preset. You can optionally enter a port number in the range 1 ... 65535.
Make sure that the specified port is not already used.

Linking in the interface in Wireshark

Requirement:
• Wireshark V2.0.0 or higher is installed on the PC.
• The PC and device must be reachable via IP (layer 3).
Procedure
To analyze the data traffic e.g. of the WLAN interface 1 in Wireshark, follow the steps below:
1. Enable the function "Packet Capture" on WLAN 1 on the device.
2. Click "Set Values" to enable the function.
3. Start Wireshark.
4. Click "Options" in the "Capture" menu. The window "Wireshark - Capture Interfaces" opens.
5. Click the "Manage Interfaces..." button on the "Input" tab. In the following dialog, click on the
"Remote Interfaces" tab.
6. To add the interface click on the Plus character in the "Remote Interfaces" tab.
7. In the following dialog, enter the IPv4 address of the device for "Host" and 2002 for "Port".
8. Enable "No authentication" for "Authentication" and click the "OK" button.
9. On the "Remote Interfaces" tab, the host and the interfaces on which the function "Packet
Capture" was previously enabled are displayed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

238 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

[Link] the interface and click the "OK" button.

The remote interfaces displayed correspond to the following interfaces on the SCALANCE
device:

Remote interface in Wireshark Interface on the SCALANCE Comment

device
gi 0/1 P1 -
gi 0/2 P2 Only with SCALANCE WUM763
gi 0/3 P3
gi 0/4 P4
ath0_mon8 WLAN 1 Comprises VAP1.1 to VAP1.8
ath1_mon8 WLAN 2 Comprises VAP2.1 to VAP2.8

[Link] start the recording, click "Start" in the "Capture" menu. You can obtain further information
about handling the program in Wireshark.
If you analyze several interfaces, you can use a Wireshark instance for each interface.

6.6 "Layer 2" menu

6.6.1 VLAN

[Link] General

On this page you specify whether or not the device forwards frames with VLAN tags
transparently (IEEE 802.1D/VLAN-unaware mode) or takes VLAN information into account (IEEE
802.1Q/VLAN-aware mode). If the device is in the "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" mode, you can define
VLANs and specify the use of the ports .

Note
Changing the agent VLAN ID
If the configuration PC is connected directly to the device via Ethernet and you change the
management VLAN ID, the device is no longer reachable via Ethernet following the change.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 239
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Base Bridge mode
Select the required mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
Note
Changing Base Bridge mode
Note the section "Changing Base Bridge mode". This section describes how a change affects
the existing configuration.

– 802.1Q VLAN Bridge

Sets the mode "VLAN-aware" for the device. In this mode, VLAN information is taken into
account.
– 802.1D Transparent Bridge
Sets the mode "VLAN-unaware" for the device. In this mode, VLAN tags are not changed
but are forwarded transparently. The VLAN priority is evaluated for CoS. In this mode, you
cannot create any VLANs. Only a management VLAN is available: VLAN 1.
• VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
Range of values: 1 ... 4094
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can only be assigned once
when creating a new data record and can then no longer be changed. To make a change, the
entire data record must be deleted and created again. Up to 24 VLANs can be defined.
• Name
Enter a name for the VLAN. The name only provides information and has no effect on the
configuration. The length is a maximum of 32 characters.
You can find information on the permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

240 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• Status
Shows the status type of the entry in the internal port filter table. Here, static means that the
address was entered as a static address by the user.
• List of ports
Specify the use of the port. The following options are available:
– "-"
The port is not a member of the specified VLAN.
With a new definition, all ports have the identifier "-".
– M
The port is a member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded with the
corresponding VLAN tag.
– U (uppercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded
without the VLAN tag. Frames without a VLAN tag are sent from this port.
– u (lowercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN, but the VLAN is not configured as a port
VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded without the VLAN tag.
– F
The port is not a member of the specified VLAN. You can configure other settings in "Layer
2 > VLAN > Port-based VLAN".
– T
This option is only displayed and cannot be selected in the WBM.
This port is a trunk port, making it a member in all VLANs.
You configure this function in the CLI (Command Line Interface) using the "switchport
mode trunk" command.

Changing Base Bridge mode

VLAN-unaware (802.1D transparent bridge) → VLAN-aware (802.1Q VLAN bridge)
If you change the Base Bridge mode from VLAN-unaware to VLAN aware, this has the
following effects:
• All static and dynamic unicast entries are deleted.
VLAN-aware (802.1Q VLAN bridge) → VLAN-unaware (802.1D transparent bridge)
If you change the Base Bridge mode from VLAN-aware to VLAN-unaware, this has the
following effects:
• All VLAN configurations are deleted.
• A management VLAN is created: VLAN 1.
• All static and dynamic unicast entries are deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 241
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

802.1Q VLAN Bridge: Important rules for VLANs

Make sure you keep to the following rules when configuring and operating your VLANs:
• Frames with the VLAN ID "0" are handled as untagged frames but retain their priority value.
• As default, all ports on the device send frames without a VLAN tag to ensure that the end
node can receive these frames.
• With SCALANCE W devices, the VLAN ID "1" is the default on all ports.
• If an end node is connected to a port, outgoing frames should be sent without a tag (static
access port). If, however, there is a further switch at this port, the frame should have a tag
added (trunk port).
• With a trunk port, the VLAN assignment is dynamic. Static configurations can only be created
if, in addition to the trunk port property, the port is also entered statically as a member in the
VLANs involved. An example of a static configuration is the assignment of multicast groups
in certain VLANs.

Procedure
Requirement:
In Base Bridge mode "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set.
Creating a new VLAN
1. Enter an ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table. As default, the boxes have "-"
entered.
3. Enter a name for the VLAN under Name.
4. Specify the use of the port in the VLAN. If, for example you select M, the port is a member of
the VLAN. The frame sent in this VLAN is forwarded with the corresponding VLAN tag.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] Port Based VLAN

Processing received frames

On this page, you specify the configuration of the port properties for receiving frames.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

242 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Requirement:
• On the "General" page, "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set for "Base Bridge Mode".

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:

Note
Table 1 is only available if at least one VLAN is configured.

• 1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
• Priority / Port VID / Acceptable Frames / Ingress Filtering
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all ports. If "No Change" is selected, the entries of
the corresponding column in table 2 remain unchanged.
• Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the available ports and interfaces. The port is made up of the module number and the
port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
• Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority given to untagged frames.
The CoS priority (Class of Service) used in the VLAN tag. If a frame is received without a tag,
it will be assigned this priority. This priority specifies how the frame is further processed
compared with other frames.
There are a total of eight priorities with values 0 to 7, where 7 represents the highest priority
(IEEE 802.1p Port Priority).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 243
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• Port VID
Select the VLAN ID from the drop-down list. Only VLAN IDs defined on the "VLAN > General"
page can be selected.
If a received frame does not have a VLAN tag, it has a tag with the VLAN ID specified here
added to it and is sent according to the rules at the port.
• Acceptable Frames
Specify which types of frames will be accepted. The following alternatives are possible:
– Tagged Frames Only
The device discards all untagged frames. Otherwise, the forwarding rules apply according
to the configuration. Frames tagged with "0" are treated like untagged frames. The device
forwards all tagged frames. Otherwise, the forwarding rules apply according to the
configuration.
– All
The device forwards all frames.
– Untagged and Priority Tagged Only
The device discards all tagged frames. The device forwards all untagged frames as well as
frames with VLAN = 0 and a priority (Priority Tagged Frames). Otherwise, the forwarding
rules apply according to the configuration.
• Ingress Filtering
Specify whether the VID of received frames is evaluated.
You have the following options:
– Enabled
The VLAN ID of received frames decides whether they are forwarded: To forward a VLAN
tagged frame, the receiving port must be a member in the same VLAN. Frames from
unknown VLANs are discarded at the receiving port.
– Disabled
All frames are forwarded.

Procedure
1. In the row of the port to be configured, click on the relevant cell in the table to configure it.
2. Enter the values to be set in the input boxes as follows.
3. Select the values to be set from the drop-down lists.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

244 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

6.6.2 Dynamic MAC Aging

Protocol settings and switch functionality

The device automatically learns the source addresses of the connected nodes. This information
is used to forward data frames to the nodes specifically involved. This reduces the network load
for the other nodes.
If a device does not receive a frame whose source address matches a learnt address within a
certain time, it deletes the learnt address. This mechanism is known as "Aging". Aging prevents
frames being forwarded incorrectly, for example when an end device is connected to a different
port.
If the check box is not enabled, a device does not delete learned addresses automatically.

Description of the displayed boxes

The page contains the following boxes:
• Dynamic MAC Aging
Enable or disable the function for automatic aging of learned MAC addresses.
• Aging Time[s]
Enter the time in seconds in steps of 15. After this time, a learned address is deleted if the
device does not receive any further frames from this sender address.
Range of values: 15 - 630 (seconds)
Note
Rounding of the values, deviation from desired value
When you input the Aging Time, note that it is rounded to correct values. If you enter a value
that cannot be divided by 15, the value is automatically rounded down.

Steps in configuration
1. Select the "Dynamic MAC Aging" check box.
2. Enter the time in seconds in the "Aging Time[s]" input box.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 245
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

6.6.3 Spanning Tree

[Link] General

General settings of spanning tree

This is the basic page for spanning tree. Select the compatibility mode from the drop-down list.
By default, RSTP is selected in the drop-down list and Spanning Tree is disabled.
On the configuration pages of these functions, you can make detailed settings.
Depending on the compatibility mode, you can configure the corresponding function on the
relevant configuration page.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Spanning Tree
Enable or disable Spanning Tree.
• Protocol Compatibility
Select the compatibility mode of Spanning Tree. For example if you select RSTP, Spanning
Tree behaves like RSTP.
The following settings are available:
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP

Procedure
1. Select the "Spanning Tree" check box.
2. Select the compatibility mode from the "Protocol Compatibility" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

246 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

[Link] CIST General

Configuration CIST
The page consists of the following parts.
• The left-hand side of the page shows the configuration of the device.
• The central part shows the configuration of the root bridge that can be derived from the
spanning tree frames received by an device.
• The right-hand side shows the configuration of the regional root bridge that can be derived
from the MSTP frames received by an device. The displayed data is only visible if you have
enabled "Spanning Tree" on the "General" page and when "Protocol Compatibility" is set to
"MSTP". This also applies to the "Bridge Max Hop Count" parameter. If the device is a root
bridge, the information on the left and right matches.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Bridge Priority / Root Priority
Which device becomes the root bridge is decided based on the bridge priority . The bridge
with the highest priority becomes the root bridge. The lower the value, the higher the
priority. If several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose MAC address
has the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both parameters, bridge priority
and MAC address, together form the bridge identifier. Since the root bridge manages all path
changes, it should be located as centrally as possible due to the delay of the frames. The value
for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of 4096 with a range of values from 0 to 61440.
• Bridge Address / Root Address
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows the MAC
address of the root bridge.
• Root port
Shows the port over which the device communicates with the root bridge.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 247
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
• Topology Changes / Last Topology Change
The entry for the device shows the number of reconfiguration actions due to the spanning
tree mechanism since the last startup. For the root bridge, the time since the last
reconfiguration is displayed as follows:
– Seconds: "sec" unit after the number
– Minutes: "min" unit after the number
– Hour: "hr" unit after the number
• Bridge Hello Time[s] / Root Hello Time[s]
Each bridge regularly sends configuration frames (BPDUs). The interval between two such
frames is the Hello time. The default for this parameter is 2 seconds.
• Bridge Forward Delay[s] / Root Forward Delay[s]
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period
specified in the forward delay parameter. This ensures that operation is started with the new
topology only after all the bridges have the required information. The default for this
parameter is 15 seconds.
• Bridge Max Age / Root Max Age
Bridge Max Age defines the maximum "age" of a received BPDU for it to be accepted as valid
by the switch. The default for this parameter is 20 seconds.
• Bridge Max Hop Count
This parameter specifies how many MSTP nodes a BPDU may pass through. If an MSTP BPDU
is received and has a hop count that exceeds the value configured here, it is discarded. The
default for this parameter is 20.
• Regional root priority
For a description of the displayed values, see Bridge priority / Root priority
• Regional root address
Shows the MAC address of the regional root bridge.
• Regional Root Cost
Shows the path costs from this device to the regional root bridge.
• Region Name
Enter the name of the MSTP region to which this device belongs. By default, the MAC address
of the device is entered here. This value must be the same on all devices that belong to the
same MSTP region.
• Region Version
Enter the version number of the MSTP region in which the device is located. This value must
be the same on all devices that belong to the same MSTP region.
• Layer-2 Tunnel Admin Edge Port (Only available in access point mode)
Select this check box if there can be an end device on a layer 2 tunnel port. Otherwise, a
reconfiguration of the network will be triggered whenever a link to this port is modified. The
L2T clients should be interconnected.
• Layer-2 Tunnel Auto Edge Port (Only available in access point mode)
Select this check box if you want to detect automatically whether an end device is connected
at all layer 2 tunnel ports.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

248 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Procedure
1. Enter the data required for the configuration in the input boxes.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] CIST Port

Configuration of CIST ports

When the page is called, the table displays the current status of the configuration of the port
parameters.
To configure them, click the relevant cells in the port table.

Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Column 1
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
• Spanning Tree Status
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all ports. If "No Change" is selected, the entries of
the corresponding column in table 2 remain unchanged.
• Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 249
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Table 2 has the following columns:

• Port
Shows the available ports and interfaces.
• Spanning Tree Status
Specify whether the port is integrated in the spanning tree or not.
Note
If you disable the "Spanning Tree Status" option for a port, this may cause the formation of
loops. The topology must be kept in mind.

• Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
• Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation. If you enter the value "0" here, the automatically calculated
value is displayed in the "Path Cost" box.
• Path Cost
The path costs from this port to the root bridge. The path with the lowest value is selected as
the path. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest port
number will be selected.
If the "Cost Calc." box has the value "0", the automatically calculated value is shown.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc." box is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher the
achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

250 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• State
Displays the current state of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The "State" parameter depends on the configured protocol. The following is
possible for status:
– Disabled

The port only receives and is not involved in STP, MSTP and RSTP.
– Discarding
In the "Discarding" mode, BPDU frames are received. Other incoming or outgoing frames
are discarded.
– Listening

In this status, BPDUs are both received and sent. The port is involved in the spanning tree
algorithm.
– Learning

Stage prior to the forwarding status, the port is actively learning the topology (in other
words, the node addresses).
– Forwarding

Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network; it receives and
forwards data frames.
• Fwd. Trans
Specifies the number of changes from the "Discarding" status to the "Forwarding" status.
• Edge Type
Specify the type of edge port. You have the following options:
– "-"
Edge port is disabled. The port is treated as a "no EdgePort".
– Admin
Select this option when there is always an end device on this port. Otherwise a
reconfiguration of the network will be triggered each time a connection is changed.
– Auto
Select this option if you want a connected end device to be detected automatically at this
port. When the connection is established the first time, the port is treated as a "no Edge
Port".
– Admin/Auto
Select these options if you operate a combination of both on this port. When the
connection is established the first time, the port is treated as an Edge Port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 251
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• Edge
Shows the status of the port.
– Enabled

An end device is connected to this port.

– Disabled
There is a spanning tree or rapid spanning tree device at this port.
With an end device, a switch can switch the port faster without taking into account spanning
tree frames. If a spanning tree frame is received despite this setting, the port automatically
changes to the "Disabled" setting for switches.
• P.t.P. type
Select the required option from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the port that
is set.
– P.t.P.

Even with half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.

– Shared Media

Even with a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.

Note
Point-to-point link means a direct connection between two devices. A shared media
connection is, for example, a connection to a hub.

– "-"
Point-to-point is detected automatically. If the port is set to half duplex, a point-to-point
link is not assumed.
• P.t.P.
– Enabled
Shows that a point-to-point link exists.
– Disabled
Shows that no point-to-point link exists.
• Hello Time
Enter the interval after which the bridge sends configuration BPDUs. As default, 2 seconds is
set.
Range of values: 1-2 seconds
Note
The port-specific setting of the Hello time is only possible in MSTP compatible mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

252 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Procedure
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] MST General

Multiple Spanning Tree configuration

With MSTP, in addition to RSTP, several VLANs can be managed in a LAN with separate RSTP
trees.

Description
The page contains the following box:
• MSTP Instance ID
Enter the number of the MSTP instance.
Permitted values: 1 - 64
You can define up to 16 MSTP instances.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• MSTP Instance ID
Shows the number of the MSTP instance.
• Root Address
Shows the MAC address of the root bridge
• Root Priority
Shows the priority of the root bridge.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 253
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

• Bridge Priority
Enter the bridge priority in this box. The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of
4096 with a range of values from 0 to 61440.
• VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID. Here, you can also specify ranges with Start ID, "-", End ID. Several ranges
or IDs are separated by ",".
Permitted values: 1- 4094

Procedure
Creating a new entry
1. Enter the number of the MSTP instance in the "MSTP Instance ID" box.
2. Click the "Create" button.
3. Enter the identifier of the virtual LAN in the "VLAN ID" input box.
4. Enter the priority of the bridge in the "Bridge Priority" box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting entries
1. Use the check box at the beginning of the relevant row to select the entries to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button to delete the selected entries from memory. The entries are deleted
from the memory of the device and the display on this page is updated.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

254 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

[Link] MST Port

Configuration of the Multiple Spanning Tree port parameters

On this page, you set the parameters for the ports of the configured multiple spanning tree
instances.

Description
The page contains the following box:
• MSTP Instance ID
In the drop-down list, select the ID of the MSTP instance.
Table 1 has the following columns:
• Column 1
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
• MSTP Status
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all ports. If "No Change" is selected, the entries of
the corresponding column in table 2 remain unchanged.
• Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 255
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Table 2 has the following columns:

• Port
Shows all available ports and interfaces.
• MSTP instance ID
Shows the ID of the MSTP instance.
• MSTP Status
Click the check box to enable or disable this option.
• Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
• Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation in the input box. If you enter the value "0" here, the
automatically calculated value is displayed in the next box "Path Costs".
• Path Cost
The path costs from this port to the root bridge. The path with the lowest value is selected as
the path. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest port
number will be selected.
If the "Cost Calc." box has the value "0", the automatically calculated value is shown.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc." box is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher the
achievable transmission rate, the lower the value for the path costs will be.
Typical values for rapid spanning tree are as follows:
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.
• State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The following is possible for status:
– Discarding
The port exchanges MSTP information but is not involved in the data traffic.
– Blocked
In the blocking mode, BPDU frames are received.
– Forwarding
The port receives and sends data frames.
• Fwd. Trans.
Specifies the number of status changes Discarding - Forwarding or Forwarding - Discarding.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

256 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Procedure
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.6.4 DCP Forwarding

Applications
The DCP protocol is used by STEP 7 and SINEC PNI for configuration and diagnostics. In the
delivery state, DCP is enabled on all Ethernet ports; in other words, received DCP frames are
forwarded on all ports. With this option, you can disable the sending of frames for individual
ports, for example to prevent individual parts of the network from being configured with SINEC
PNI or to divide the full network into smaller parts for configuration and diagnostics.
All the ports of the device are displayed on this WBM page.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the available Ethernet ports.
• Setting
Specify whether the port should block or forward outgoing DCP frames. You have the
following options available:
– Forward
DCP frames are forwarded at this port.
– Block
No outgoing DCP frames are forwarded at this port. It is nevertheless still possible to
receive via this port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 257
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.6 "Layer 2" menu

Procedure
1. Specify whether the port blocks or forwards the DCP frames.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.6.5 LLDP

Identifying the network topology

LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is defined in the IEEE [Link] standard.
LLDP is a method used to discover the network topology. Network components exchange
information with their neighbor devices using LLDP.
Network components that support LLDP have an LLDP agent. The LLDP agent sends
information about itself and receives information from connected devices at periodic
intervals. The received information is stored in the MIB.

Applications
PROFINET uses LLDP for topology diagnostics. In the default setting, LLDP is enabled for all ports;
in other words, LLDP frames are sent and received on all ports. With this function, you have the
option of enabling or disabling sending and/or receiving per port.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

258 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the port.
• Setting
Specify the LLDP functionality. The following options are available:
– Tx
This port can only send LLDP frames.
– Rx
This port can only receive LLDP frames.
– Rx & Tx
This port can receive and send LLDP frames.
– "-" (Disabled)
This port can neither receive nor send LLDP frames.

Procedure
1. Select the required LLDP functionality from the drop-down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

6.7.1 Subnets

[Link] Overview
The page shows the subnets for the selected VLAN interface. This VLAN interface is also called
an IPv4 interface. A subnet always relates to an IPv4 interface. The IPv4 address is assigned in the
"Configuration" tab.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 259
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Interface
Select the interface on which you want to configure the subnet.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
This column is only shown if there are multiple interfaces.
• Interface
Shows the interface.
• TIA Interface
Shows whether or not the interface is used as TIA interface.
• Status
Shows the status of the interface.
• Interface Name
Shows the name of the interface.
• MAC Address
Shows the MAC address.
• IP Address
Shows the IPv4 address of the subnet.
• Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask.
• Address Type
Displays the address type. The following values are possible:
– Primary
The first IPv4 address that was configured on an IPv4 interface.
– Secondary
All other IPv4 addresses that were configured on an IPv4 interface.
• IP Assign Method
Shows how the IPv4 address is assigned. The following values are possible:
– Static
The IPv4 address is static. You enter the settings in "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask".
– Dynamic (DHCP)
The device obtains a dynamic IPv4 address from a DHCPv4 server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

260 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

• Address Collision Detection Status

If new IPv4 addresses become active in the network, the "Address Collision Detection"
function checks whether this can result in address collisions. The allows IPv4 addresses that
would be assigned twice to be detected.
Note
The function does not run a cyclic check.
This column shows the current status of the function. The following values are possible:
– Idle
The interface is not enabled and does not have an IPv4 address.
– Starting
This status indicates the start-up phase. In this phase, the device initially sends a query as
to whether the planned IPv4 address already exists. If the address is not yet been assigned,
the device sends the message that it is using this IP address as of now.
– Conflict
The interface is not enabled. The interface is attempting to use an IPv4 address that has
already been assigned.
– Defending
The interface uses a unique IPv4 address. Another interface is attempting to use the same
IPv4 address.
– Active
The interface uses a unique IPv4 address. There are no collisions.
– Not supported
The function for detection of address collisions is not supported.
– Disabled
The function for detection of address collisions is disabled.
• MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit)
Shows the packet size.

Procedure
1. Select the VLAN interface from the "Interface" drop-down list.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
3. Configure the subnet on the "Configuration" tab.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 261
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

[Link] Configuration
On this page, you configure the IPv4 interface.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Interface (Name)
Select the interface from the drop-down list.
• Status
Specify whether the interface is enabled or disabled.
– Enabled
The interface is enabled. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled Interface.
– Disabled
The interface is disabled.
• Interface Name
Enter the name of the interface.
• MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the selected interface.
• DHCP
Enable or disable the DHCP client for this IPv4 interface.
• IP Address
Enter the IPv4 address of the interface. The IPv4 addresses must not be used more than once.
• Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the subnet you are creating. Subnets on different interfaces must
not overlap.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

262 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

• Address Type
Shows the address type.
– Primary
The first subnet of the interface.
• TIA Interface
Select whether this interface should become the TIA interface. The TIA interface defines on
which VLAN the PROFINET functionalities are available. This mainly affects the device search
with or via DCP.
• MTU
MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) specifies the maximum size of the packet. If packets are
longer than the set MTU, they are fragmented. The MTU covers the IP headers and the
headers of the higher layers.
Range of values:
– With IPv4: 90 ... 1514
– With IPv6: 1280 ... 1514

Procedure
1. Select the interface from the "Interface (Name)" drop-down list.
2. Select the status of the interface in the "Status" drop-down list.
3. Enter a name for the Interface in "Interface Name".
4. Enter the IPv4 address of the subnet in the "IP Address" column or enable the "DHCP" option.
5. Enter the subnet mask belonging to the IPv4 address in the "Subnet Mask" column.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.

6.7.2 Static Routes

On this page, you specify the routes via which data exchange can take place between the various
subnets. Dynamic routing protocols are not supported, for example RIP, OSPF.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 263
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Destination Network
Enter the network address of the destination that can be reached via this route.
• Subnet Mask
Enter the corresponding subnet mask.
• Gateway
Enter the IPv4 address of the gateway via which this network address is reachable.
• Administrative Distance
Enter the metric for the route. The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, for
example speed, costs. If there are several equal routes, the route with the lowest metric value
is used.
If you do not enter anything, "not used" is entered automatically. The metric can be changed
later.
Range of values: 1 - 255 or -1 for "not used".
Here, 1 is the value for the best possible route. The higher value, the longer packets require
to their destination.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Destination Network
Shows the network address of the destination.
• Subnet Mask
Shows the corresponding subnet mask.
• Gateway
Shows the IPv4 address of the next gateway.
• Interface
Shows the interface of the route.
• Administrative Distance
Enter the metric for the route. When creating the route, "not used" is entered automatically.
The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, based for example on speed or costs.
If there are several equal routes, the route with the lowest metric value is used.
Range of values: 1 - 255
Here, 1 is the value for the best possible route. The higher value, the longer the packets
require to their destination.
• Status
Shows whether or not the route is active.

Procedure
1. Enter the network address of the destination in the "Destination Network" input box.
2. Enter the corresponding subnet mask in the "Subnet Mask" input box.
3. Enter the gateway in the "Gateway" input box.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

264 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

4. Enter the weighting of the route in "Administrative Distance".

5. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.

6.7.3 NAT

[Link] Masquerading

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

On this WBM page, you enable the rules for IP masquerading.

Note
Enabling IP masquerading on at least one VLAN enables NAPT.

Requirements
• "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set for "Base bridge mode".
• A second VLAN is set up and the IPv4 interface is configured, see "Subnets (Page 259)".

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Interface
Interface to which the setting relates. Only interfaces with a configured subnet are available.
• Enable Masquerading
When enabled, with each outgoing data packet sent via this interface, the source IP address
is replaced by the IP address of the interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 265
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

[Link] NAPT

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

On this WBM page, you can configure a port translation in addition to the address translation.
The following port translations are possible:
• From a single port to the same port:
If the ports are the same, the frames will be forwarded without port translation.
• From a single port to a single port
The frames are translated to the port.
• From a port range to a single port
The frames from the port range are translated to the same port (n:1).
• From a port range to the same port range
If the port ranges are the same, the frames will be forwarded without port translation.

Requirements
• IP masquerading is enabled.
• Under "Layer 2 > VLAN > Basic", "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set for "Base Bridge Mode".

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Source Interface
Select the interface on which the queries will arrive.
• Traffic Type
Specify the protocol for which the address assignment is valid.
• Use Interface IP from Source Interface
When enabled, the IP address of the selected interface is used for "Dest IP Address".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

266 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.7 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv4)"

• Destination IP Address
Enter the destination IP address. The frames are received at this IP address. Can only be edited
if "Use Interface IP from Source Interface" is disabled.
Note
The rule is only enabled if the IP address of the VLAN is the same.

• Destination Port
Enter the destination port. Incoming frames with this port as the destination port are
forwarded. If the setting is intended to apply to a port range, enter the range with start port
"-" end port, for example 30 - 40.
• Translated Destination IP
Enter the IP address of the node to which this frame will be forwarded.
• Translated Destination Port
Enter the number of the port. This is the new destination port to which the incoming frame
will be forwarded. If the setting is intended to apply to a port range, enter the range with start
port "-" end port, for example 30 - 40.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• Source Interface
Shows the interface from which the packets need to come. Only these packets are considered
for port forwarding.
• Traffic Type
Shows the protocol for which the address assignment applies.
• Interface IP
Shows whether the IP address of the interface is used.
• Destination IP
Shows the destination IP address. The frames are received at this IP address.
• Destination Port
Shows the destination port. Incoming frames with this port as the destination port are
forwarded.
• Translated Destination IP
Shows the IP address of the node to which the packets will be forwarded.
• Translated Destination Port
Shows the destination port to which the packets are translated.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 267
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"

6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"

6.8.1 Subnets

Configuration of the IP addresses

On this page, you enable IPv6 at the VLAN interface. This VLAN interface is also called an IPv6
interface. An IPv6 interface can have several IPv6 addresses.

Note
Update from V1.0 to V1.1
The configuration of the IPv6 addresses is not transferred with an update from V1.0 to V1.1.

Description
The page contains the following:
• Interface
Shows the VLAN interface on which IPv6 will be enabled.
• IPv6 Enable
Enable or disable IPv6 on the interface. When you enable the setting and accept it, the link-
local address is created automatically.
• IPv6 Address
Enter the IPv6 address. The input depends on the selected address type.
• Prefix Length
Enter the number of left-hand bits belonging to the prefix.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

268 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"

• IPv6 Address Type

Select the address type:
– Unicast
– Link Local: IPv6 address is only valid on the link.
• Address Configuration
Specify the mechanism for the address configuration:
– DHCPv6
Status dependent: Obtains the IPv6 address and the configuration file from the DHCPv6
server.
– SLAAC (Stateless Address Auto Configuration) (default)
Stateless autoconfiguration using NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol)
In Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the "Duplicate Address Detection Status" function
prevents IPv6 addresses from being assigned twice. The device can only use free IPv6
addresses during autoconfiguration.
– Static
Enter a static IPv6 address.
• DHCPv6 Rapid Commit
When enabled the procedure for the IPv6 address assignment is shortened. Instead of 4
DHCPv6 messages (SOLICIT, ADVERTISE, REQUEST, REPLY) only 2 DHCPv6 messages (SOLICIT,
REPLY) are used. You will find further information on the messages in RFC 3315.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• Interface Name
Shows the name of the VLAN interface.
• IPv6 Address
Shows the IPv6 address.
• Prefix Length
Shows the prefix length.
• IPv6 Address Type
Displays the address type. The following values are possible:
– Unicast
– Link Local

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 269
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"

• Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC)

Shows whether or not the function is enabled. The following values are possible:
– Enabled
– Disabled
• Duplicate Address Detection Status
When the "Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC)" function is enabled, the check via NDP takes
place automatically.
Note
The function does not run a cyclic check.
This column shows the current status of the function. The following values are possible:
– Tentative
This status indicates that the selected IPv6 address is being checked. The device sends a
neighbor solicitation message to the selected IPv6 address.
– Conflict
This status indicates that the IPv6 address is already being used. In this case, a neighbor
advertisement message with the selected IPv6 address is returned to the device. The
device forms a new IPv6 address and checks this again.
– Complete
This status indicates that the selected IPv6 address can be used. In this case, the device did
not receive feedback within a period of time and assumes that the IPv6 address is not yet
assigned.
– Down
This status indicates that the interface is not active. No check is carried out.

Procedure
Automatically form link-local address
1. Enable IPv6.
2. Click the "Set Values" button. In the table an entry with the interface is created and the
automatically formed link-local IPv6 address is displayed.
Assign link-local address
1. Enable IPv6.
2. In "IPv6 Address", enter the link-local address, e.g. FE80::21B:1BFF:FE40:9155
3. Enter "128" in "Prefix Length".
4. For "IPv6 Address Type" select the entry "Link Local".
5. For "Address Configuration" select the entry "Static".
6. Click the "Create" button. In the table an entry with the interface is created and the IPv6
address is displayed.
The automatically created link-local address is overwritten.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

270 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.8 Menu "Layer 3 (IPv6)"

6.8.2 Static Routes

On this page, you configure the IPv6 default route. The IPv6 default route is an IPv6 route, that
applies to all IPv6 addresses. The device only needs to know the default gateway and sends all
IPv6 packets to it.
The default gateway either knows all routes itself or has a default route to another default
gateway.

Description
The page contains the following:
• Destination Network
Destination Network (:: or [Link]) applies to all IPv6 addresses.
• Prefix Length
Enter the number of left-hand bits belonging to the prefix
• Gateway
Enter the IPv6 address of the gateway to which the IPv6 packets will be sent.
• Metric
Enter the metric for the route. The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, based
for example on speed or costs. If there are several equal routes, the route with the lowest
metric value is used.
Range of values: 1 - 254
• Interface
Specify the interface via which the network address of the destination is reached.
This table contains the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• Destination Network
Shows the network address of the destination.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 271
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Prefix Length
Shows the prefix length.
• Gateway
Shows the IPv6 address of the next gateway.
• Interface
Shows the Interface of the route.
• Metric
Enter the metric for the route. When creating the route, "not used" is entered automatically.
The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, based for example on speed or costs.
If there are several equal routes, the route with the lowest metric value is used.
Range of values: 1 - 254
• Status
Shows whether or not the route is active.

Steps in configuration
1. Enter the prefix length.
2. Enter the IPv6 address of the gateway.
3. Enter the metric of the route.
4. Select the interface through which the network address of the destination is reached.
5. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.

6.9 "Security" menu

6.9.1 Users

[Link] Local Users

Local users
On this page, you manage both local and external users that are defined on a RADIUS server and
the rights assigned to them.
When you create or delete a local user this change is also made automatically in the table
"External User Accounts". If you want to make change explicitly for the internal or external
user table, use the CLI commands.

Note
The values displayed depend on the rights of the logged-in user.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

272 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 273
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
The page contains the following:
• User Account
Enter the name for the user. The name must meet the following conditions:
– It must be unique.
– It must be between 1 and 250 characters long.
You can find information on permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
Note
User name cannot be changed
After creating a user, the user name can no longer be modified.
If a user name needs to be changed, the user must be deleted and a new user created.

Note
User names: admin
You can configure the device with this user name.
When you log in for the first time or log in after a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
are prompted to change the pre-defined password "admin". You can also rename the user
preset in the factory "admin" once. Afterwards, renaming "admin" is no longer possible.

• Password Policy
Shows which password policy is being used:
– High
Password length: At least 8 characters, maximum 32 characters
At least 1 uppercase letter
At least 1 special character
At least 1 number
– Low
Password length: at least 6 characters, maximum 128 characters
– Custom
You configure the password policy on the page "Security > Passwords > Options".
• Password
Enter the password. The strength of the password depends on its length and complexity.
You can find information on permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
Password Confirmation
Enter the password again to confirm it.
• Role
Select a role.
You can choose between system-defined and self-defined roles, refer to the page "Security >
Users > Roles".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

274 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

The table contains the following columns:

• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
Note
The preset users as well as logged in users cannot be deleted or changed.

• User Account
Shows the user name.
• Role
Shows the role of the user.
• Description
Displays a description of the user account. The description text can be up to 100 characters
long.

Procedure

Note
Changes in "Trial" mode
Even if the device is in "Trial" mode, changes that you carry out on this page are saved
immediately.

Creating users
1. Enter the name for the user.
2. Enter the password for the user.
3. Enter the password again to confirm it.
4. Select the role of the user.
5. Click the "Create" button.
6. Enter a description of the user.
7. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting users
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted and the page is updated.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 275
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] Roles

Roles
On this page, you create roles that are valid locally on the device.

Note
The values displayed depend on the rights of the logged-in user.

Description
The page contains the following:
• Role Name
Enter the name for the role. The name must meet the following conditions:
– It must be unique.
– It must be between 1 and 64 characters long.
You can find information on the permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
Note
Role name cannot be changed
After creating a role, the name of the role can no longer be changed.
If a name of a role needs to be changed, the role must be deleted and a new role created.

The table contains the following columns:

• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
Note
Predefined roles and assigned roles cannot be deleted or modified.

• Role
Shows the name of the role.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

276 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Function Right
Select the function rights of the role:
– 1
Users with this role can read device parameters but cannot change them. Users with this
role can only change their own password.
– 15
Users with this role can both read and change device parameters.

Note
Function right cannot be changed
If you have assigned a role, you can no longer change the function right of the role.
If you want to change the function right of a role, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Delete all assigned users.
2. Change the function right of the role.
3. Assign the role again.

• Description
Enter a description for the role. With predefined roles a description is displayed. The
description text can be up to 100 characters long.

Procedure
Creating a role
1. Enter the name for the role.
2. Click the "Create" button.
3. Select the function rights of the role.
4. Enter a description for the role.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting a role
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted and the page is updated.

[Link] Groups

User groups
On this page you link a group with a role.
For example, the group "Administrators" is linked to the "admin" role. The group is defined
on a RADIUS server. The role is defined locally on the device. When a RADIUS server

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 277
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

authenticates a user and assigns the user to the "Administrators" group, this user is given
rights of the "admin" role.

Note
The values displayed depend on the rights of the logged-in user.

Description
The page contains the following:
• Group Name
Enter the name of the group. The name must match the group on the RADIUS server.
The name must meet the following conditions:
– It must be unique.
– It must be between 1 and 64 characters long.
You can find information on the permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
The table contains the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
• Group
Shows the name of the group.
• Role
Select a role. Users who are authenticated with the linked group on the RADIUS server receive
the rights of this role locally on the device.
You can choose between system-defined and self-defined roles, refer to the page "Security >
Users > Roles.".
• Description
Enter a description for the link of the [Link] a role. The description text can be up to 100
characters long.

Procedure
Linking a group to a role
1. Enter the name of a group.
2. Click the "Create" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

278 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

3. Select a role.
4. Enter a description for the link of a [Link] a role.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting the link between a group and a role
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted and the page is updated.

6.9.2 Passwords

Configuration of the passwords

Note
If you are logged in via a RADIUS server, you cannot change any passwords.

On this page, you can change passwords. If you are logged in with the right to change device
parameters, you can change the passwords for all user accounts. If you are logged in as user,
you can only change your own password.

Description of the displayed boxes

• Current User
Shows the user that is currently logged in.
• Current User Password
Enter the password for the currently logged in user.
• User Account
Select the user whose password you want to change.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 279
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Password Policy
Shows which password policy is being used when assigning new passwords.
Note
Checking the password policy of existing users
The set password policy is used when assigning new passwords. Existing passwords are not
checked. If you change the password policy from "Low" to "High", the previously used
passwords remain valid. As an important measure for increasing security, change the
passwords used up to now.

– High
Password length: at least 8 characters, maximum 128 characters
At least 1 uppercase letter
At least 1 special character
At least 1 number
– Low
Password length: at least 6 characters, maximum 128 characters
– Custom
You configure the password policy on the page "Security > Passwords > Options".
• New Password
Enter the new password for the selected user.
You can find information on the permitted characters in Appendix G of the WBM (Page 353).
• Password Confirmation
Enter the new password again to confirm it.

Procedure
1. From the "User Account" drop-down list, select the user whose password you want to change.
2. Enter the valid password for the currently logged in user in the "Current User Password" input
box.
3. Enter the new password for the selected user in the "New Password" input box.
4. Repeat the new password in the "Password Confirmation" input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The factory settings for the passwords when the devices ship are as follows:
• admin: admin
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", with
the preset user "aadmin" you will be prompted to change the password.

Note
Changing the password in Trial mode
Even if you change the password in Trial mode, this change is saved immediately.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

280 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] Options
On this page, you specify which password policy will be used when assigning new passwords.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 281
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
• Password Policy
Shows which password policy is currently being used.
• New Password Policy
Select the required setting from the drop-down list.
– High
Password length: at least 8 characters, maximum 128 characters
At least 1 number
At least 1 special character
At least 1 uppercase letter
– Low
Password length: at least 6 characters, maximum 128 characters
– User-defined
Configure the desired password requirements under "Password Policy Details".
• Password Policy Details
When you have selected the "High" or "Low" password policy, the relevant password
requirements are displayed.
When you have selected the "User-defined" password policy, you can configure the relevant
password requirements.
– Minimum Password Length
Specifies the minimum length of a password.
– Minimum Number of Numeric Characters
Specifies the minimum number of numeric characters in a password.
– Minimum Number of Special Characters
Specifies the minimum number of special characters in a password.
– Minimum Number of Uppercase Letters
Specifies the minimum number of uppercase characters in a password.
– Minimum Number of Lowercase Letters
Specifies the minimum number of lowercase characters in a password.

6.9.3 AAA

[Link] General

Login of network nodes

The designation "AAA" stands for "Authentication, Authorization, Accounting". This feature is
used to identify and allow network nodes, to make the corresponding services available to them
and to specify the range of use.
On this page, you configure the login.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

282 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:

Note
To be able to use the login authentication "RADIUS", "Local and RADIUS" or "RADIUS and fallback
Local", a RADIUS server must be stored and configured for user authentication.

• Login Authentication
Specify how the login is made:
– Local
The authentication must be made locally on the device.
– RADIUS
The authentication must be handled via a RADIUS server.
– Local and RADIUS
The authentication is possible both with the users that exist on the device (user name and
password) and via a RADIUS server.
The user is first searched for in the local database. If the user does not exist there, a RADIUS
request is sent.
– RADIUS and fallback Local
The authentication must be handled via a RADIUS server.
A local authentication is performed only when the RADIUS server cannot be reached in
the network.

[Link] RADIUS-Client

Authentication over an external server

The concept of RADIUS is based on an external authentication server.
Each row of the table contains access data for one server. In the search order, the primary
server is queried first. If the primary server cannot be reached, secondary servers are queried
in the order in which they are entered.
If no server responds, there is no authentication.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 283
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• RADIUS Authorization Mode
For the login authentication, the RADIUS authorization mode specifies how the rights are
assigned to the user with a successful authentication.
– Standard
In this mode the user is logged in with administrator rights if the server returns the value
"Administrative User" to the device for the attribute "Service Type". In all other cases the
user is logged in with read rights.
– Vendor Specific
In this mode the assignment of rights depends on whether and which group the server
returns for the user and whether or not there is an entry for the user in the table "External
User Accounts".
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the row you want to delete.
• Auth. Server Type
Shows which authentication method the server will be used for.
– Login
The server is used only for the login authentication.
• RADIUS Server Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the RADIUS server.
• Server Port
Here, enter the input port on the RADIUS server. As default, input port 1812 is set. The range
of values is 1 to 65535.
• Shared Secret
Enter your access ID here. The range of values is 1...128 characters.
• Shared Secret Conf.
Enter your access ID again as confirmation.
• Max. Retrans.
Enter the maximum number of retries for an attempted query.
The initial connection attempt is repeated the number of times specified here before another
configured RADIUS server is queried or the login counts as having failed. As default 3 retries
are set, this means 4 connection attempts. The range of values is 1 to 5.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

284 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Timeout[s]
Specify how long the RADIUS client waits for a response from the RADIUS server before
attempting login again.
• Primary Server
Using the options in the drop-down list, specify whether or not this server is the primary
server. You can select one of the options "yes" or "no".
• Test
With this button, you can test whether the credentials of the specified RADIUS user are on the
server.
The authentication test is performed once. If there is a failed login to the RADIUS server, this
event is logged.
• Test Result
Shows whether or not the RADIUS server is available:
– Not reachable
The IP address is not reachable.
The IP address is reachable, the RADIUS server is, however, not running.
– Reachable, key not accepted
The IP address is reachable, the RADIUS server does not, however accept the shared secret.
– Reachable, key accepted
The IP address is reachable, the RADIUS server accepts the specified shared secret.

Steps in configuration
Entering a new server
1. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
The following default values are entered in the table:
– RADIUS Server Address: [Link]
– Server Port: 1812
– Max. Retrans.: 3
– Primary server: No
2. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– RADIUS Server Address
– Server Port
– Shared Secret
– Shared Secret Conf
– Max. Retrans.: 3
– Primary server: No
3. If necessary check the reachability of the RADIUS server.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server you want to enter.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 285
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Modifying servers
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– RADIUS Server Address
– Server Port
– Shared Secret
– Shared Secret Conf
– Max. Retrans.
– Primary Server
2. If necessary check the reachability of the RADIUS server.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server whose entry you want to modify
Deleting servers
1. Click the check box in the first column before the row you want to delete to select the entry
for deletion.
Repeat this for all entries you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The data is deleted from the memory of the device and the page is
updated.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

286 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

6.9.4 Brute Force Prevention

Brute Force Prevention (BFP) refers to the protection of the device from unauthorized access by
trying a sufficiently large number of passwords. The number of incorrect login attempts within a
specific time period is limited for this purpose.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• User Specific BFP is Enabled. / User Specific BFP is Disabled.
– Enabled:
With login authentication, the "Local" or "Local and RADIUS" mode is set and the
maximum number of invalid login attempts is greater than 0.
– Disabled:
With login authentication, the "RADIUS" or "RADIUS and fallback Local" mode is set or the
maximum number of invalid login attempts is 0.
You configure the login authentication under "Security > AAA > General > Login
Authentication".
• Acceptable Invalid Login Attempts Per User
The maximum number of invalid login attempts for a user accepted by the device. Further
login attempts for this user are blocked for a specific time.
The users that are not configured as local users for the device are summarized under the user
name "UnknownUser".
0: User Specific BFP is Disabled.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 287
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• IP Specific BFP is Enabled. / IP Specific BFP is Disabled.

Shows whether the IP-specific Brute Force Prevention is enabled.
• Acceptable Invalid IP Login Attempts Per IP
The maximum number of invalid login attempts for an IP address accepted by the device.
Further login attempts for this IP address are blocked for a specific time.
0: IP Specific BFP is Disabled.
• BFP Trigger Interval [min]
The time in minutes that is relevant for counting invalid login attempts.
If the maximum number of invalid login attempts is exceeded during this time, the device
blocks login for a specific period of time.
Invalid login attempts per user and per IP address are handled independently of one
another.
• BFP Automatic Reset Timer[min]
Time in minutes for which the device blocks login because the maximum number of invalid
login attempts was exceeded.
0: The timer is disabled.
The User Specific BFP table has the following columns:
• User
The users configured locally on the device. The users that are not locally configured on the
device are summarized under the user name "UnknownUser".
• Failed Logins
The number of failed login attempts.
• Last Failed[s]
Time in seconds since the last failed login attempt. To display the current value, click the
"Refresh" button.
• Blocked[s]
The time in seconds until the blocking will be removed. To display the current value, click the
"Refresh" button.
When a blocked user attempts to log in before the timer expires, the timer restarts.
• Delete
Ends blocking for the user and resets the displays in the "Last Failed[s]" and "Blocked[s]"
boxes.
The IP Specific BFP table has the following columns:
• IP
The IP address of the device for the login attempt.
• Failed Logins
The current number of failed login attempts.
• Last Failed[s]
Time in seconds since the last failed login attempt. To display the current value, click the
"Refresh" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

288 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Blocked[s]
The time in seconds until the blocking will be removed. To display the current value, click the
"Refresh" button.
When a blocked IP address attempts to log in before the timer expires, the timer restarts.
• Delete
Ends blocking for the IP address and resets the displays in the "Last Failed[s]" and "Blocked[s]"
boxes.

6.9.5 WLAN

[Link] Basic (Access Point)

Safety levels
To make the network secure, authentication and encryption are used. On this page, you specify
the security settings.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Port
Shows the available ports.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 289
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Authentication Type
Select the type of authentication. The selection depends on the operating mode and the
transmission standard.
– Open System
There is no authentication.
– WPA (RADIUS)
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a method specified by the Wi-Fi Alliance to close security
gaps in WEP. Authentication using a server (802.1x) is mandatory. The dynamic exchange
of keys at each data frame introduces further security.
– WPA-PSK
WPA Pre Shared Key (WPA-PSK) is a weakened form of WPA. In this method, authentication
is not carried out by a server but is based on a password. This password is configured
manually on the client and server.
– WPA2 (RADIUS)
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) is a further development of WPA and implements the
functions of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. However, WPA authentication works with
the RADIUS server.
– WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK is based on the 802.11i standard. However, WPA authentication works without
a RADIUS server. Instead of this, a key (pass phrase) is stored on each client and access
point. The pass phrase is used for authentication and further encryption.
– WPA/WPA2-AUTO-PSK
First try to connect with WPA2. If the client is not WPA2-enabled, the connection is made
using WPA.
– WPA/WPA2 AUTO (RADIUS)
First try to connect using WPA2 (RADIUS). If the client is not WPA2-enabled, the
connection is made using WPA (RADIUS).
– WPA3-SAE
Only configurable in WLAN mode "802.11ax"
WPA3 replaces WPA2 and uses the Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) to
authenticate access points and clients. With SAE, keys are mutually stored and
exchanged, but the pass phrase is not made public, so attackers cannot find the keys
through brute force dictionary attacks. With WPA3, PMF must be negotiated for all WPA3
connections, which offers additional protection against deauthentication and
disassociation attacks.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

290 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Cipher
– AUTO
Either AES or TKIP is automatically selected, depending on the capability of the other
station.
– TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical stream encryption method with the RC4 (Ron’s Code 4) algorithm. In
contrast to the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing keys derived from a main key.
TKIP can also recognize corrupted data frames.
– AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that further
improves the functions of TKIP.
• Key
Enter a key here. This key must be known on both the client and the access point and is
entered by the user at both ends.
– For a key with 8 to 63 characters, you can only use the following readable ASCII
characters: 0x20 - 0x7e.
– For a key with precisely 64 characters, you can use the following ASCII characters: 0 - 9,
a - f and A - F.
• Key Confirmation
Confirm the key entered above.
• PMF (Protected Management Frames)
Can only be used with the following:
– WLAN mode: IEEE 802.11n/ac/ax
– Authentication type: WPA2-PSK, WPA2 (RADIUS) and WPA3-SAE
With this setting, the management frames are cryptographically protected. This prevents, for
example, the WLAN client being separated from the access point due to corrupted
disassociation / deauthenticate frames. You can find more information on this in the IEEE
802.11w standard.
The following settings are possible:
– disabled
The management frames are not encrypted.
– required
The management frames are always encrypted. A connection of the WLAN clients to the
access point is only possible when these also support PMF. With the WPA3-SAE
authentication type, this setting is always selected and cannot be configured.
– optional
The management frames are encrypted or unencrypted depending on support of the
WLAN client.

Procedure
1. Select the required security settings.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 291
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] Basic (Client)

Safety levels
To make the network secure, authentication and encryption are used. On this page, you specify
the security settings.

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

292 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Security Context
Shows the security context.
• Authentication Type
Select the type of authentication. The selection depends on the operating mode and the
transmission standard.
– Open System
There is no authentication.
– WPA (RADIUS)
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a method specified by the Wi-Fi Alliance to close security
gaps in WEP. Authentication using a server (802.1x) is mandatory. The dynamic exchange
of pass phrases at each data frame introduces further security.
Note
Make the relevant RADIUS settings initially on the page "Security > WLAN > Client RADIUS
Supplicant".

– WPA-PSK
WPA Pre Shared Key (WPA-PSK) is a weakened form of WPA. In this method, authentication
is not carried out by a server but is based on a password. This password is configured
manually on the client and server.
– WPA2 (RADIUS)
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) is a further development of WPA and implements the
functions of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. However, WPA authentication works with
the RADIUS server.
Note
Make the relevant RADIUS settings initially on the page "Security > WLAN > Client RADIUS
Supplicant".

– WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK is based on the 802.11i standard. However, WPA authentication works without
a RADIUS server. Instead of this, a key (pass phrase) is stored on each client and access
point. The pass phrase is used for authentication and further encryption.
– WPA3-SAE
Only configurable in WLAN mode "802.11ax"
WPA3 replaces WPA2 and uses the Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) to
authenticate access points and clients. With SAE, pass phrases are mutually stored and
exchanged, but the pass phrase is not made public, so attackers cannot find the pass
phrases through brute force dictionary attacks. With WPA3, PMF must be negotiated for
all WPA3 connections, which offers additional protection against deauthentication and
disassociation attacks.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 293
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Cipher
– AUTO
Either AES or TKIP is automatically selected, depending on the capability of the other
station.
– TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical stream encryption method with the RC4 (Ron’s Code 4) algorithm. In
contrast to the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing pass phrases derived from a
main pass phrase. TKIP can also recognize corrupted data frames.
– AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that further
improves the functions of TKIP.
Note
To provide better protection of your data against attacks, use WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with AES.

• Pass Phrase
Enter a pass phrase here for authentication with the WPA2-PSK or WPA3-SAE . This pass
phrase must be known on both the client and the access point and is entered by the user at
both ends.
For a pass phrase with 8 to 63 characters, you can only use the following readable ASCII
characters: 0x20 - 0x7e.
For a pass phrase with precisely 64 characters, you can use the following ASCII characters: 0
- 9, a - f and A - F.
Note
New pass phrase when the authentication type is changed
When the authentication type is changed, the previous pass phrase is deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

294 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Pass Phrase Confirmation

Confirm the pass phrase entered above.
• PMF (Protected Management Frames)
Can only be used with the following:
– WLAN mode: IEEE 802.11n/ac/ax
– Authentication type: WPA2-PSK, WPA2 (RADIUS) and WPA3-SAE
With this setting, the management frames are cryptographically protected. This prevents, for
example, the WLAN client being separated from the access point due to corrupted
disassociation / deauthenticate frames. You can find more information on this in the IEEE
802.11w standard.
The following settings are possible:
– disabled
The management frames are not encrypted.
– required
The management frames are always encrypted. A connection of the WLAN clients to the
access point is only possible when these also support PMF. With the WPA3 authentication
type, this setting is preset and cannot be configured.
– optional
The management frames are encrypted or unencrypted depending on support of the
access point.

Procedure
1. Select the required security settings. The settings that are possible depend on the set
"Authentication Type".
2. Click the "Set Values" button.

[Link] AP RADIUS Authenticator

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 295
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Configuration of the RADIUS server

On this WBM page, you define the RADIUS servers and the RADIUS authentication of the access
point. You can enter data for two RADIUS servers.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Reauthentication Mode
Specify who sets the time after which the clients are forced to reauthenticate.
– - (disabled)
The reauthentication mode is disabled.
– Server
Enables time management on the server.
– Local
Enables local time management. Set the validity period for "Reauthentication Interval".
• Reauthentication Interval [s]
If time management is local, enter the period of validity of the authentication in seconds. The
minimum time is 1 minute (enter 60), the maximum time is 12 hours (enter 43200). The
default is one hour (3,600 seconds).
The table has the following columns:
• Server IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the RADIUS server.
• Server Port
Here, enter the input port on the RADIUS server.
• Shared Secret
Enter the password of the RADIUS server.
For the password, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
• Shared Secret Conf
Confirm the password.
• Max. Retransmissions
Enter the maximum number of connection attempts.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

296 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Primary Server
Specify whether or not this server is the primary server.
– Yes: Primary server
– No: Backup server
• Status
With this check box, you can enable or disable the RADIUS server.

Procedure
Entering a new server
To display a new server, follow the steps below:
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– IP address or FQDN of the RADIUS server
– Port number of the input port
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Modifying servers
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– IP address or FQDN of the RADIUS server
– Port number of the input port
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
2. Select the "Status" check box to enable the RADIUS server.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server whose entry you want to modify.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 297
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] Client RADIUS Supplicant

Client Supplicant
On this WBM page, you configure the settings for the RADIUS authorization of the client.

Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.

Description
• Minimum TLS Version
Specify the minimum TLS version to be used for WLAN RADIUS authentication.
Note
RADIUS Server
This is only possible when the RADIUS Server supports the TLS version.

Note
Minimum TLS version must be appropriate to the security level of the SSL certificates
Authentication attempts with WLAN client and server certificates whose encryption
mechanisms do not correspond to the requirements of the selected min. TLS version fail.
Select a suitable minimum TLS version.
Example: The SHA1 signature algorithm is not supported by TLS V1.2 as of version V3.0. If
you want to use SHA1 certificates, the min. TLS version cannot be higher than V1.1. You can
find information on the supported security mechanisms with RADIUS authentication in the
WBM, appendix "Ciphers used > RADIUS (Page 347)".

The table has the following columns:

• Security Context
Shows the security context.
• Dot1x User Name
Enter the user name with which you want to log in to the RADIUS server.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

298 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Dot1x User Password

Enter the password for the user name selected above. The client logs on with the RADIUS
server using this combination.
For password assignment, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
• Dot1x User Password Confirmation
Confirm the password.

Note
Dot1X user name and Dot1X user password
With WPA (RADIUS), WPA2 (RADIUS), EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP the Dot1X user name and the
Dot1X user password must be configured.
With the setting "Auto" either the certificate must be loaded or the Dot1X user name and the
Dot1X user passport must be configured.

• Verifying tghe Dot1X server certifcate

Specify whether or not the RADIUS server identifies itself to the client using a certificate.
Note
Using certificates
Renew the certificate before it expires. If you do not renew the certificate in time, it will not
be possible to establish a connection after expiry.

• Dot1x EAP Types

Specify the authentication methods. The following methods exist:
– Auto
Client offers RADIUS server all methods.
– EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol - Transport Layer Security
Uses certificates for authentication.
– EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol - Tunnel Transport Layer Security
After setting up the TLS tunnel, MS-CHAPv2 is used for internal authentication.
– PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol
Alternative draft protocol of IETF for EAP-TTLS

Procedure
1. Enter the necessary values in the input boxes.
2. Select the required entry in the "Dot1x EAP Types" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 299
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] 802.11r
On this WBM page, you configure the setting for Fast BSS Transition.

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

You can find additional information under "Description > IEEE 802.11r".

Requirement
• The access points are members of the same mobility domain.
• Only possible with WPA2 (WPA2-PSK and WPA2 RADIUS) and WPA3 encryption.

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
• Port
Shows the VAP interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

300 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

• Fast BSS Transition

When enabled, the "Fast BSS Transition" function is supported. Can only be enabled when the
mobility domain is entered.
Note
Restriction of the Fast BSS Transition function
The access point and the client only support "Fast Transition over the Air".

• Mobility Domain ID
Enter the ID of the mobility domain. The access points with the same ID are members of one
mobility domain. Based on the ID, the WLAN client recognizes whether the access point is a
member of the same mobility domain and can therefore log on without delay.

6.9.6 Inter AP Blocking

[Link] Basic

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.
This function can only be enabled when the CLP 2GB W700 AP iFeatures (6GK5
907-8UA00-0AA0) is inserted in the device and the configuration has been applied.

When should Inter AP blocking be used?

The clients connected to an access point can normally communicate with all devices of the
cabled layer 2 network.
With inter AP blocking, the communication of the clients connected to the access point can
be restricted. Only the devices whose IP addresses are configured in "Allowed Addresses"
on the access point are accessible to the clients. Communication with other nodes in the
network is therefore prevented.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 301
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

Description
The page contains the following box:
• Update interval [s]
Enter the update interval for the ARP resolution of the allowed IP addresses. The resolved
MAC addresses are displayed under "Information > Security > Inter AP Blocking".
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
• Port
Shows the VAP interface to which the settings relate.
• Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band to which the settings relate.
• SSID
Shows the SSID to which the settings relate.
• Enable
When enabled, the access restriction is used. You configure which devices are accessible to
the clients in "Security > Inter AP Blocking > Allowed Addresses".
• Block Gratuitous ARP Requests
When enabled, gratuitous ARP packets from this VAP interface are not forwarded to Ethernet.
• Block Non-IP Frames
When enabled, there is no exchange of non-IP packets, for example layer 2 packets between
the client and the devices configured on the access point as permitted communications
partners.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

302 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.9 "Security" menu

[Link] Allowed Addresses

Note
This WBM page is only available in access point mode.

On this WBM page, you specify which devices are accessible to the clients.

Description
The page contains the following boxes:
• Port
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
• IP Address
Enter the IP address of the devices accessible to the client.
The table has the following columns:
• Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted
• Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate
• Port
Specifies the VAP interface to which the settings relate

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 303
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

• IP Address
The IP Address of the devices accessible to the client. If necessary, you can change the IP
address.
• Resolver IP Address
The IP address that the access point uses to resolve the allowed IP address. The entry is
necessary when the management IP address of the access point is located in a different
subnet.
If the IP address "[Link]" is configured for "Resolver IP Address", the management IP address
is used for resolution.

Procedure
Creating an entry
1. Select a port from the "Port" drop-down list.
2. In the "IP Address" box, enter the IP address accessible for the client.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is created in the table.
Deleting an entry
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.

6.10 "iFeatures" menu

6.10.1 iPCF-2
On this page, you can enable iPCF-2.
iPCF-2 is recommended for use in environments that use automation protocols. With iPCF-2,
cyclic data exchange between the access point and its logged-on clients is defined and
maintained, provided that a dedicated free channel with sufficient reception strength is
available for iPCF-2. In addition, depending on the application, no DFS channel should be
used.

Note
This page is only available in connection with the inserted CLP iFeatures. For more detailed
information, refer to the section "Configuration License PLUG (CLP) (Page 29)".

Note
Mutual interlock of iFeatures
iPRP and iPCF-2 are not compatible with each other and cannot be used at the same time on a
device.
During dual operation of an access point, an iFeature cannot be enabled on a WLAN interface if
an iFeature has already been enabled on the other interface.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

304 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

Requirements for enabling iPCF-2

• WLAN mode on the affected interface is set to 802.11ax.
• VAP x.1 is configured and enabled.
• The authentication type on the VAP x.1 is "Open System" or "WPA2-PSK".
• The function PMF on the VAPx.1 is disabled.

When should iPCF-2 be used?

iPCF-2 enables tested real-time communication in various scenarios and will be developed
further in the future firmware versions. Tested and released scenarios are described in the
document "Areas of Operation for Industrial Wireless LAN in a PROFINET IO Environment"; see
the following entry ID:
22681042 ([Link]

'LVSOD\LQDFFHVVSRLQWPRGH

'LVSOD\LQFOLHQWPRGH

Description
The table has the following columns:
• Radio
Shows the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
• Enable iPCF-2
Enable or disable iPCF-2 mode.
A message about changes in the settings is displayed.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 305
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

Procedure
1. Select the "Enable iPCF-2" option for the required WLAN interface.
2. Click the "Update" button.

Result
iPCF-2 mode is enabled. Enabling this results in the following changes on the WLAN interface:
• VAPx.1 is enabled on the page "Interface > WLAN > AP". All other VAPs are disabled on the
respective interface.
• If the authentication type on VAP x.1 is "WPA2-PSK", the settings on the page "Security >
WLAN > 802.11r" are configured as follows:
– The Mobility Domain ID is automatically generated on VAPx.1 based on the last two SSID
characters. The value is applied for VAPx.1.
– Fast BSS Transition is enabled on VAP x.1.

6.10.2 iPRP
On this page, you can enable iPRP.

Note
This page is only available in connection with the inserted CLP iFeatures. For more detailed
information, refer to the section "Configuration License PLUG (CLP) (Page 29)".

Note
Mutual interlock of iFeatures
iPRP and iPCF-2 are not compatible with each other and cannot be used at the same time on a
device.
During dual operation of an access point, an iFeature cannot be enabled on a WLAN interface if
an iFeature has already been enabled on the other interface.

Requirements for using iPRP

• The Base Bridge Mode "802.1Q VLAN Bridge" is set.
• The VLANs have been created.
• Access Point mode: The VAP interfaces are enabled. The first two VAP interfaces per radio
interface can be configured for iPRP.
• Client mode:
– "Layer 2 Tunnel" is set for "MAC Mode".
– Either "Always" or "Disabled" is set for "Background Scan Mode".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

306 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

Note
SCALANCE W700 IEEE802.11ax firmware does not support synchronization of the clients during
scanning and roaming operations. Therefore, simultaneous scanning and roaming operations,
which can result in brief transfer interruptions, can occur.

When should iPRP be used?

Note
iPRP with oversize frames (jumbo frames)
To be able to use oversize frames, oversize frames (jumbo frames) must be configured on all
devices in the network.
Agent VLAN (management VLAN) with iPRP
The iPRP VLAN can be used as the agent VLAN. This depends where the device is located.
• If the device is located in the PRP network A or PRP network B, use the VLAN that PRP A or PRP
B is assigned to as the agent VLAN.
• If the access points are located in both PRP networks, you can use one of the two VLANs as
the agent VLAN. As an alternative you can also use other VLANs as agent VLANs. The division
into PRP networks A and B must remain. A single management VLAN for all devices in
network A and B is not possible without further measures.

With the "industrial Parallel Redundancy Protocol" (iPRP), the PRP technology can be used
in wireless networks. With IPRP the PRP frames are transferred parallel via two wireless
links. The parallel transfer allows disruptions of the transfer on one wireless link to be
compensated on the other.
With transfer paths that are not the same, iPRP reduces the number of duplicated and
out-of-order packets. The application/protocol used must be able to handle the remaining
duplicates and out-of-order packets.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 307
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

'LVSOD\LQDFFHVVSRLQWPRGH

'LVSOD\LQFOLHQWPRGH

Description
The page contains the following:
• Ethernet interface (only with SCALANCE WxM763)
Select the required Ethernet interface P1 ... P4 on which you want to enable iPRP.
• PRP A
Select the VLAN assignment for PRP A.
• PRP B
Select the VLAN assignment for PRP B.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

308 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

The table contains the following columns:

• Port
Shows the available ports in the access point or the available interface in the client.
• Frequency Band (only in access point mode)
Shows the frequency band.
– 2.4 GHz
– 5 GHz
• Enable iPRP
Enable or disable iPRP for the required port.
• PRP Network
Specify the PRP network in which the port is a member.
Note that both VAP interfaces of a radio interface cannot be used for the same iPRP network.

Procedure
1. For "PRP A", select the VLAN assignment for PRP A.
2. For "PRP B", select the VLAN assignment for PRP B.
3. Specify the PRP network in which the port is a member.
4. Select the "Enable iPRP" setting. Click the "Set Values" button.
The appropriate VLAN settings are made automatically.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 309
Configuring with Web Based Management
6.10 "iFeatures" menu

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

310 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Upkeep and maintenance 7
7.1 Firmware update - via WBM

Requirement
• The device has an IP address.
• The user is logged in with administrator rights.

Firmware update via HTTP

1. Click "System > Load&Save" in the navigation area. Click the "HTTP" tab.
2. Click the "Load" button in the "Firmware" table row.
3. Go to the storage location of the firmware file.
4. Click the "Open" button in the dialog. The file is uploaded.

Firmware update - via TFTP

1. Click "System > Load&Save" in the navigation area. Click the "TFTP" tab.
2. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server Address" input box.
3. Enter the port of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server Port" input box.
4. Click the "Load file" button in the "Firmware" table row.
5. Go to the storage location of the firmware file.
6. Click the "Open" button in the dialog. The file is uploaded.

Firmware update via SFTP

1. Click "System > Load&Save" in the navigation area. Click the "SFTP" tab.
2. Enter the IP address of the SFTP server in the "SFTP Server Address" input box.
3. Enter the port of the SFTP server in the "SFTP Server Port" input box.
4. If required, enter the user name and password.
5. Click the "Load file" button in the "Firmware" table row.
6. Go to the storage location of the firmware file.
7. Click the "Open" button in the dialog. The file is uploaded.

Result
The firmware has been transferred completely to the device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 311
Upkeep and maintenance
7.2 Embedding firmware in ConfigPack.

On the "Information > Versions" there are the entries "Firmware" and "Firmware Running".
Firmware Runningshows the version of the current firmware. "Firmware" shows the firmware
version stored after loading the firmware. To activate this firmware, restart the device with
"System > Restart".

7.2 Embedding firmware in ConfigPack.

Please not the additional information and security notes in the operating instructions of your
device.
With the the ConfigPack with embedded firmware file you can install a device configuration
including the firmware belonging to it on one or more devices.

Creating ConfigPack with embedded firmware

To embed the firmware in a ConfigPack, you need to make a setting in the Command Line
Interface (CLI). To do this, follow the steps outlined below:

Note
Using configurations with DHCP
If you want to use the ConfigPack with embedded firmware to commission multiple devices with
the same configuration and firmware, create a ConfigPack only from device configurations that
use DHCP. Otherwise, disruptions will occur in network operation due to multiple identical IP
addresses.
You assign fixed IP addresses extra following the basic installation.

1. Start the remote configuration using Telnet (CLI) and log on with a user with the "admin" role.
2. Change to the global configuration mode with the command "configure terminal".
3. You change to the loadsave configuration mode with the "loadsave" command.
4. Enter the "firmware-in-configpack" command without parameters.
The firmware currently on this device is now included as a separate file in the ConfigPack
when you save it.
Note
Embedding firmware in ConfigPack.
When the device is restarted this functionality is lost again and must be reactivated.

If you save a ConfigPack in the WBM or CLI, the firmware is embedded. The file can be
supplied with a password before download. To load the file into the device successfully, use
the specified password.
Refer to the information in the section Load & Save (Page 129).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

312 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Upkeep and maintenance
7.3 Device configuration with PRESET-PLUG

Installing ConfigPack with embedded firmware

Note
Installing ConfigPack with DHCP options 66, 67
You can also install the ConfigPack using DHCP with options 66 and 67 activated.
You activate the options in the menu "System > DHCP > DHCP Client".
Password-protected ConfigPack and DHCP options 66.67
If the file is password-protected, you cannot install the file via DHCP with options 66 and 67.

If you install a ConfigPack using WBM or CLI, firmware stored there is also installed.

Procedure in the WBM

1. Connect to the WBM of the device on which you want to install the ConfigPack as
administrator.
2. Go to the menu "System > Load&Save".
3. In the row "ConfigPack", click the "Load" button
4. Select the ConfigPack you want to install.
5. Restart the device with "System > Restart".
If there is a different firmware version on the device to be installed compared with that in the
ConfigPack, an upgrade/downgrade of the firmware is performed. You can recognize this by
the red F-LED flashing (flashing interval; 2 sec on/0.2 sec off). Afterwards the device is
restarted and the device configuration incl. users and certificates stored in the ConfigPack is
transferred to the device.
6. Wait until the device has fully started up.
(the red F-LED is off)
7. You can log on the device again or exit the WBM.

7.3 Device configuration with PRESET-PLUG

Please not the additional information and security notes in the operating instructions of your
device.

NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a PLUG during operation
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 313
Upkeep and maintenance
7.3 Device configuration with PRESET-PLUG

Note
Support of PRESET-PLUG functionality
SCALANCE W700ax supports PRESET-PLUG functionality as of firmware version V1.0. SCALANCE
W1700ac supports PRESET-PLUG functionality as of firmware version V1.1.

With the PRESET-PLUG, you can install the same device configuration (start configuration,
user accounts, certificates) including the corresponding firmware on multiple devices.
The PRESET PLUG is write-protected.
You configure the PRESET PLUG using the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Creating a PRESET-PLUG
You create the PRESET PLUG using the Command Line Interface (CLI). You can create a PRESET-
PLUG from any PLUG. To do this, follow the steps outlined below:

Note
Using configurations with DHCP
Create a PRESET-PLUG only from device configurations that use DHCP. Otherwise disruptions will
occur in network operation due to multiple identical IP addresses.
You assign fixed IP addresses extra following the basic installation.

Requirement
• A CLP on which you want to configure the PRESET-PLUG functionality is inserted in the device.

Procedure
1. Start the remote configuration using SSH (CLI) and log in as a user with the "admin" role.
2. Switch to the global configuration mode with the command "configure terminal".
3. You change to the PLUG configuration mode with the "plug" command.
4. Create the PRESET-PLUG with the "presetplug" command.
The firmware version of the device and the current device configuration incl. user accounts
and certificates are stored on the PLUG and the PLUG is then write protected.
5. Turn off the power to the device.
6. Remove the PRESET-PLUG.
7. Start the device either with a new CLP inserted or with the internal configuration.

Procedure for installation with the aid of the PRESET-PLUG

1. Turn off the power to the device.
2. If it is inserted, remove the CLP from the slot. You can find additional information on this in
the operating instructions of your device.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

314 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Upkeep and maintenance
7.4 Restoring the factory settings

3. Insert the PRESET-PLUG correctly oriented into the slot. The PRESET-PLUG is correctly inserted
when it is completely inside the device and does not jut out of the slot.
4. Turn on the power to the device again.
If there is a different firmware version on the device to be installed compared with that on the
PRESET-PLUG, an upgrade/downgrade of the firmware is performed. You can recognize this
by the red F-LED flashing (flashing interval: 2 sec on/0.2 sec off). Afterwards the device is
restarted and the device configuration incl. users and certificates on the PRESET-PLUG is
transferred to the device.
5. Wait until the device has fully started up.
(the red F-LED is off)
6. Turn off the power to the device after the installation.
7. Remove the PRESET-PLUG.
8. Start the device either with a new CLP inserted or with the internal configuration.

Note
Restore factory defaults and restart with a PRESET PLUG inserted
If you reset the device to the factory defaults, when the device restarts an inserted PRESET PLUG
is formatted and the PRESET PLUG functionality is lost. You then need to create a new PRESET
PLUG. The keys stored on the KEY-PLUG for releasing functions are retained.
We recommend that you remove the PRESET PLUG before you reset the device to the factory
settings.

Formatting a PRESET-PLUG (resetting the preset function)

You format the PRESET PLUG using the Command Line Interface (CLI) to reset the preset
function. To do this, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Start the remote configuration using SSH (CLI) and log in with a user with the "admin" role.
2. Switch to the global configuration mode with the command "configure terminal".
3. You change to the PLUG configuration mode with the "plug" command.
4. Enter the command "factoryclean".
The PRESET-PLUG is formatted and the preset function is reset.
5. Write the current configuration of the device with the "write" command.

7.4 Restoring the factory settings

NOTICE
Previous settings
If you reset, all the settings you have made will be overwritten by factory defaults.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 315
Upkeep and maintenance
7.4 Restoring the factory settings

NOTICE
Inadvertent reset
An inadvertent reset can cause disturbances and failures in a configured network with further
consequences.

With the reset button

When pressing the button, make sure you observe the information in the "Reset button" section
in the operating instructions.
Follow the steps below to reset the device parameters to the factory settings:
1. Turn off the power to the device.
2. Loosen the screws of the cover.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Now press the Reset button and reconnect the power to the device while holding down the
button.
5. Hold down the button until the red fault LED (F) stops flashing after approximately 10
seconds and is permanently lit.
6. Now release the button and wait until the fault LED (F) goes off again.
7. The device then starts automatically with the factory settings.

With SINEC PNI

Follow the steps below to reset the device parameters to the factory settings with the SINEC PNI:
1. Select the device whose parameters you want to reset.
2. Click the "Reset device" button.
3. Select the "Reset to factory settings" option in the following dialog.

Via the configuration

You will find detailed information on resetting the device parameters using the WBM and CLI in
the configuration manuals:
• Web Based Management, section "Restart (Page 124)"
• Command Line Interface, section "Reset and Defaults"

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

316 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Troubleshooting/FAQ 8
8.1 Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible

Cause
If there is a power failure during the firmware update, it is possible that the device is no longer
accessible using Web Based Management or the CLI.
When pressing the button, be sure to read the information in the "Reset button" section of
the operating instructions.

Solution
You can then also assign firmware to a SCALANCE W using TFTP.
Follow the steps below to load new firmware using TFTP:
1. Turn off the power to the device.
2. Now press the Reset button and reconnect the power to the device while holding down the
button.
3. Hold down the button until the red fault LED (F) starts to flash after approximately 2 seconds.
4. Now release the button. The bootloader waits in this state for a new firmware file that you can
download by TFTP.
5. Connect a PC to the SCALANCE W over the Ethernet interface.
6. Assign an IP address to the SCALANCE W with the SINEC PNI.
7. Open a DOS box and change to the directory where the file with the new firmware is located
and then execute the command "tftp -i <ip address> PUT <firmware>". As an alternative, you
can use a different TFTP client.
8. Close the cover to ensure that the device is closed and water and dust proof.

Note
Use of CLI and TFTP in Windows 10
If you want to access the CLI or TFTP in Windows 10, make sure that the relevant functions are
enabled in Windows 10.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 317
Troubleshooting/FAQ
8.2 Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being too high

Result
The firmware is transferred to the device.

Note
Please note that the transfer of the firmware can take several minutes. During the transmission,
the red error LED (F) flashes.

Once the firmware has been transferred completely to the device, the device is restarted
automatically.

8.2 Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being

too high

Causes and effects of excessive received power

If the received power at the input of a SCALANCE W device is too high, this overdrives the
amplifier circuit. Overdrive can occur on clients and access points. If the received power on the
SCALANCE W device is greater than -35 dBm, this can result in disrupted communication.
Information about the signal strength [in dBm] is displayed in WBM in the following tabs:
Access point mode:
• Information > WLAN > Client List
Client mode:
• Information > WLAN > Available AP
The power of the input signal on the SCALANCE W device is influenced by the following
factors:
• Distance between the WLAN partners
• Reflections of the electromagnetic waves by parts of the building
• Setting of the "max. Tx Power" and the antenna settings used (Interfaces > WLAN > Antennas
& Power)

Solution
If communication is disrupted by an excessive signal strength (greater than -35 dBm), you can
eliminate the problem in the following ways:
• Increase the distance between the transmitter and receiver.
• Reduce the transmit power of the IWLAN partner with suitable settings in WBM or CLI.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

318 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Troubleshooting/FAQ
8.3 Instructions for secure network design

8.3 Instructions for secure network design

Note the information below to protect your network against attacks:
• Use a secure connection with HTTPS
In contrast to HTTP, HTTPS allows you secure access for configuring the WLAN clients and the
access points using Web Based Management. For more detailed information, refer to the
section "Load & Save (Page 129)".
• Use WPA2/ WPA2-PSK / WPA3-SAE with AES
Use only WPA2/ WPA2-PSK / WPA3-SAE with AES to prevent password misuse. These
authentication methods in combination with AES encryption offer the greatest security. For
more detailed information, refer to the section "WLAN (Page 289)".
• Protect your network from man-in-the-middle attacks
To protect your network from man-in-the-middle attacks, a network setup is recommended
that makes it more difficult for the attacker to access the communications path between two
end devices.
– You can, for example, protect devices by arranging so that the Agent IP is only accessible
via a single management VLAN. For more detailed information, refer to the section "Menu
"Layer 3 (IPv4)" (Page 259)".
– A further option is to install a separate HTTPS certificate on the WLAN client / access point.
The HTTPS certificate checks the identity of the device and controls the encrypted data
exchange. You can install the HTTPS certificate via HTTP. For more detailed information,
refer to the section "Load & Save (Page 129)".
• Use SNMPv3
SNMPv3 provides you with highest possible security when accessing the devices via SNMP.
For more detailed information, refer to the section "SNMP (Page 156)".

NOTICE
Changing the default password after configuring with STEP 7
If a device in the default status is configured only with STEP 7, it is not possible to change the
default password. This change must be made directly on the device using WBM or CLI.
Otherwise the default password is retained and any user could log in using the default
password.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 319
Troubleshooting/FAQ
8.3 Instructions for secure network design

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

320 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix A "Supported MIB Modules" A
A.1 Supported MIB files

MIB files available for the SCALANCE W device

The following table shows the MIB files available for a SCALANCE W device:

MIB Root OID Reference

AUTOMATION-SYSTEM-MIB (Siemens) 1)
.[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.2 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-SN-SYSTEM-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.[Link].2 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-SN-AUTH-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2)
.[Link].4.1.4329.[Link].3 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-SNTP (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.11 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-SMTP (Siemens) 1) 2)
.[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.9 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-TELNET (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.8 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-TIME-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.3 Vendor specific
AUTOMATION-PS-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2)
.[Link].4.1.4329.6.3.5 Vendor specific
IF-MIB .[Link].2.1.2 RFC 2863
EtherLike-MIB .[Link].[Link].2 RFC 3635
MAU-MIB .[Link].2.1.26 RFC 4836
ENTITY-MIB .[Link].2.1.47 RFC 4133
Q-BRIDGE-MIB .[Link].[Link] RFC 2674q
P-BRIDGE-MIB .[Link].[Link] RFC 2674p
BRIDGE-MIB .[Link].2.1.17 RFC 4188
IPV6-MIB .[Link].2.1.55 RFC 2465
SNMPv2-MIB .[Link].2.1.1 RFC 3418
SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB .[Link].6.3.18 RFC 3584
SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB .[Link].6.3.15 RFC 3414
SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB .[Link].6.3.16 RFC 3415
SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB .[Link].6.3.13 RFC 3413
SNMP-TARGET-MIB .[Link].6.3.12 RFC 3413
SNMP-MPD-MIB .[Link].[Link].1 RFC 3412
RADIUS-ACC-CLIENT-MIB .[Link].[Link].2 RFC 2620
RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB .[Link].[Link].2 RFC 2618
RMON-MIB .[Link].2.1.16 RFC 2819
IP-MIB .[Link].2.1.4 RFC 4292
TCP-MIB .[Link].2.1.6 RFC 4022
UDP-MIB .[Link].2.1.7 RFC 4113
DNS-RESOLVER-MIB .[Link].[Link] RFC 1612
IEEE802dot11-MIB .1.2.840.10036 IEEE 802.11
IEEE 802.1AB 2005 LLDP-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2)
.1.0.8802.1.1.2 Vendor specific

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 321
Appendix A "Supported MIB Modules"
A.1 Supported MIB files

MIB Root OID Reference

LLDP-EXT-DOT1-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .1.0.8802.[Link].5.32962 Vendor specific
LLDP-EXT-DOT3-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .1.0.8802.[Link].5.4623 Vendor specific
LLDP-EXT-PNO-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2)
.1.0.8802.[Link].5.3791 Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-SNMP-MIB (Siemens) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.[Link] Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-SCW-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.[Link].[Link] Vendor specific
.19.3
SN-MSPS-SCW-MIB (Siemens) 1) 2) .[Link].4.1.4329.[Link].[Link] Vendor specific
0

1)
Part of the [Link]
You can download the [Link] for SCALANCE W from Siemens Industry Auto‐
mation and Drives Service & Support under the entry ID 67637278 (https://
[Link]/cs/ww/en/view/67637278)
2)
Part of the private MIB file "Scalance_w_msps.mib". You can download the file in the WBM
with the "Save" button under "System > Load & Save > HTTP > MIB".

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

322 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix B "Private MIBs" B
B.1 Private MIB variables

Downloading the MIB of the SCALANCE W via WBM

You can download the MIB of the SCALANCE W in WBM under "System > Load&Save > HTTP >
MIB" using the "Save" button.

OID
The private MIB variables of the SCALANCE W have the following object identifier:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4). enterprises(1)
siemens(4329) industrialComProducts(20) iComPlatforms(1)
simaticNet(1) snMsps(1) snMspsCommon(1)

WLAN-specific MIB variables

The WLAN-specific MIB variables can be found in "snMspsWlan". You will find further
information about the settings and values in the MIB file.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 323
Appendix B "Private MIBs"
B.1 Private MIB variables

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

324 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix C "Underlying Standards" C
C.1 Underlying standards

Standards met by SCALANCE W devices completely or partly

The following table lists some of the standards for SCALANCE W devices.

Name of the standard Topic

IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
IEEE 802.1D-1998 Media Access Control (MAC), bridges
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridged LANs (VLAN Tagging, Port Based VLANs)
IEEE 802.1W-2004 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
IEEE 802.1X Port Based Network Access Control
IEEE 802.3-2002 Ethernet
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.11 Wireless Local Area Network
IEEE 802.11a Wireless standard for use of the 5 GHz frequency band
IEEE 802.11b/g Wireless standard for use of the 2.4 GHz frequency band
IEEE 802.11e Quality of Service (QoS)
IEEE 802.11 h Expansion of the spectrum and transmit power for use of the 5 GHz fre‐
quency range in Europe.
IEEE 802.11i Encryption of WLANS
IEEE 802.11n Standard for high transmission rates
IEEE 802.11ax Wi-Fi6
IEEE 802.11ac Standard for very high transmission rates in the 5 GHz frequency band

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 325
Appendix C "Underlying Standards"
C.1 Underlying standards

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

326 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix D "Log Messages" D
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages during system startup (general)

Message Description
Warm start performed, Ver: V02.00.00 - event/ Type of startup and the loaded firmware version
status summary after startup.
Power supply: Status of the power supplies line 1 and line 2
• L1 is connected
• L2 is not connected
• PoE is connected
• PoE is not connected
No line is monitored. Information about monitoring the power supply from the signaling system
Spanning Tree disabled. Information on the status of the Spanning Tree protocol
Spanning Tree enabled.
No Fault states pending after startup. Fault status following system start
Scheduled restart cancelled. The scheduled restart was aborted.
Scheduled restart in xx seconds. The device restarts in xx seconds.

Status of the power supply

You enable or disable the "Power Change" event in "System > Events".

Message Description
Power up on line 1 / 2 / PoE. Power supply available on line 1, line 2 or PoE
Power down on line 1 / 2 / PoE. Power supply interrupted on line 1, line 2 or PoE

Status of the Ethernet interface

You enable or disable the "Link Change" event in "System > Events".

Message Description
Link up on P1. There is a connection on the Ethernet interface
Link down on P1. There is no connection on the Ethernet interface
Link up on P1: <Speed> The speed that is currently present is >= 100 Mbps and full duplex (FD)
New Fault state: "Result of autonegotiation on P1: The speed is < 100 Mbps or half duplex (HD)
<Speed>
Result of autonegotiation on P1: <Speed>
Link up on P1: <Speed>

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 327
Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Status of the WLAN interface (in access point mode only)

Messages
Link down up VAP X.Y. The VAP interface Y on the WLAN interface X is enabled.
Link down on VAP X.Y. The VAP interface Y on the WLAN interface X is disabled.
Overlap-AP found on WLAN X: AP <System Name> A further access point was detected on the channel set for the WLAN
<MAC Address> found on channel <channel num‐ interface X or on a neighboring channel.
ber> <RSSI value>
Overlap-AP aged out on WLAN X: AP <System The overlapping access point could not be detected during the configured
Name> <MAC Address> on channel <channel aging time and was removed from the "Overlap AP" list.
number> <RSSI value>
DFS: Radar interference detected on WLANX at If the access point discovers a radar signal on the current channel, it noti‐
channel <channel number> (frequency <frequen‐ fies the clients of the channel change. It then automatically switches to an
cy> MHz) alternative DFS channel and the current channel is blocked for 30 minutes.
DFS: start DFS scan on WLANX at channel <chan‐
nel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz)
DFS: finished DFS scan on WLANX at channel
<channel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz)
DFS: channel <channel number> (frequency <fre‐ No radar signal detected on the channel any longer. The channel was
quency> MHz) aged out from NOL at WLANX and removed from the list of blocked channels and can be used again.
can be used again
DFS: Radar interference detected on WLANX at There is no free channel available, the WLAN interface X will be deactiva‐
channel <channel number> (frequency <frequen‐ ted until one of the channels becomes available.
cy> MHz)
DFS: No Channels are available al WLANX.

Status of the WLAN interface (in client mode only)

Messages Description
Link up on WLAN X. The WLAN interface X is enabled.
Link down on WLAN X. The WLAN interface X is disabled.

Messages on configuration

Messages Description
WBM/SSH/Telnet: User {user name} failed to log in An incorrect password was entered during login. The event can be enabled
from {ip address}. or disabled in "System -> Events" (Authentication Failure).
Restart requested. Restart due to a user request. The event can be enabled or disabled in
"System -> Events" (Cold/Warm Start).
Device configuration changed. The configuration was changed.
WBM/SSH/Telnet: User {user name} is locked for The user / IP address was locked for the duration (in minutes) after the
%d minutes after %d unsuccessful login attempts. failed login.
WBM/SSH/Telnet: The session of user {user name} The session was ended.
was closed after %d seconds of inactivity.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

328 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages on log files

Message Description
Log file cleared. The log entries are deleted.

Status about DNS server entries

Message Description
Update DNS: empty nameservers list. No DNS server has been created.

Messages about TCP events

Messages Description
Messages about sleep mode:
Device changed to Sleep Mode for %d minutes. Sleep mode was triggered on the device for the duration (in minutes).
DI/DO messages:
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - wrong The format of the TCP packet does not match.
TCP packet format
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - wrong Wrong user name or password specified
username or password
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - internal Save failed due to an internal error
storage failed
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - incorrect Invalid action
action
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - wrong Invalid command
command code
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - incorrect Invalid action for digital output
Digital Out action
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - invalid Invalid sleep mode duration
Sleep Mode duration
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted - invalid Invalid action for sleep mode
Sleep Mode action
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 incoming - Digital The digital output has been activated.
Out activated
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 incoming - Digital The digital output has been deactivated.
Out deactivated
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 incoming - Sleep The sleep mode has been activated.
Mode activated
TCP Event {ip address} Result: 1 aborted The action failed.
Messages on WLAN roaming:
WLAN roaming triggered by TCP Event A connection transition to another access point was initiated.
WLAN roaming by TCP Event: Client is already con‐ The client has already logged in on the access point.
nected to BSSID: <BSSID>

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 329
Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages for file upload/download

Messages Description
File upload via HTTP(S): load of FileType <File Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful. A restart is required.
type> OK
→ restart required
File upload via HTTP(S): load of FileType<File Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful.
type> OK
File upload via HTTP(S): validation of FileType <File Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful. The file is identical to the
type> IDENTICAL existing file.
File upload via HTTP(S): validation of FileType <File Loading the file via HTTP(S) failed. The file contains errors or is invalid.
type> FAILED
File upload via TFTP: load of FileType <File type> Loading the file using TFTP was successful. A restart is required.
OK
→ restart required
File upload via TFTP: load of FileType <File type> Loading the file using TFTP was successful.
OK
File upload via TFTP: validation of FileType <File Loading the file using TFTP was successful. The file is identical to the ex‐
type> IDENTICAL isting file.
File upload via TFTP: validation of FileType <File Loading the file using TFTP failed. The file contains errors or is invalid.
type> FAILED
File upload via TFTP: file transfer of FileType <File Loading the file using TFTP failed. The file name is incorrect or the file does
type> FAILED not exist on the server.
File upload via TFTP: file transfer of FileType <File Loading the file using TFTP failed. The TFTP server cannot be reached or
type> failed. Cannot connect to given IP address the settings are incorrect.
File download via TFTP: file transfer of FileType Saving the file using TFTP failed. The TFTP server cannot be reached or the
<File type> failed. Cannot connect to given IP ad‐ settings are incorrect.
dress

Messages error status

You configure the events in "System > Events".
You configure the monitoring of the power supply and the link on the Ethernet port in
"System > Fault Monitoring".

Messages Description
New Fault state: <Fault description> Incoming fault
<Fault description>: "Warm start performed." Not all events automatically lead to a fault. On the "Events" WBM page, you
"Cold start performed." "Link down on P1." "Link up specify which events will be logged, for example device restart, changed
on P1." "Power down on line L1 (L2)" "DFS: No link on the Ethernet port.
channels are available at WLAN2".
Fault state gone: <Fault description> Outgoing fault
<Fault description>: "Warm start performed."
"Cold start performed." "Link down on P1." "Link up
on P1." "Power down on line L1 (L2)" "DFS: No
channels are available at WLAN2" "PLUG not ac‐
cepted. See System PLUG mask for details."

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

330 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages Description
New Fault state (reconfiguration): <Fault descrip‐ Incoming fault
tion> The event was triggered due to a change in the configuration.
<Fault description>: "Link down on P1." "Link up on
P1." "Power down on line L1 (L2)".
Fault state gone (reconfiguration): <Fault descrip‐ Outgoing fault
tion> The event was triggered due to a change in the configuration.
<Fault description>: "Link down on P1." "Link up on
P1." "Power down on line L1 (L2)".
Fault state: <Fault description> cleared. Fault was acknowledged by the user.
<Fault description>: "Warm start performed" "Cold
start performed".

Messages for backup restore

Messages Description
Backup Restore: Loaded file type <File type> (re‐ The file was successfully loaded after restoring the configuration backup to
start required). the device. A restart is required.
Possible file types:
• Config
• ConfigPack
• WBMFav
• Users
Backup Restore: Loaded file type <File type> which The file was successfully loaded after restoring the configuration backup to
is identical. the device. The file is identical to the existing file.

Spanning Tree messages

Enable or disable the "Spanning Tree" event under "System > Events"

Messages Description
Spanning Tree: topology change detected. The topology of the network has changed; the network will be reorgan‐
ized.
Spanning Tree: new root bridge <MAC address> The topology of the network has changed; there is a new root bridge in the
detected. network.

Messages about security

Messages Description
RADIUS: Access accepted / rejected for client <MAC The authentication of the client was successful or not successful.
Adress>.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 331
Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages about message system

Messages Description
Syslog-Server not reachable! The configured Syslog server is not accessible.
Unable to send messages to syslog server. Please The syslog server configuration is incomplete.
check syslog socket configuration.
Unable to send e-mail(s) because of IP connection Sending of e-mail(s) failed. SMTP server cannot be reached (e.g. network
failure. connection interrupted).
Unable to send e-mail(s) because of SMTP authen‐ Sending of e-mail(s) failed. Authentication of the client on the SMTP serv‐
tication failure. er incorrect.
Unable to send e-mail(s) because SMTP message Sending of e-mail(s) failed. SMTP server accessible, configuration incom‐
transfer failed. plete or faulty (e.g. receiver e-mail address wrong / not available).
SNMP: Authentification failure. Authentication of an SNMP client failed; access not possible (e.g.
SNMPv1/v2 read-only configured or Read Community String incorrectly
configured).
IP communication is possible. Remote logging ac‐ IP communication is possible. Remote logging is activated.
tivated.
IP communication is not possible. Remote logging IP communication is not possible. Remote logging is deactivated. Check
deactivated. Please check IP configuration and net‐ whether or not the device has an IP address.
work connectivity.

Messages about the time server

Messages Description
Connected to <Server name> server with IP ad‐ The connection to the time server was established.
dress <IP address>.
Time synchronized via '<Server name>' with serv‐ The time is synchronized.
er IP '<IP address>:<Port>'.
NTP:Client: SecureNTP key updated for the associ‐ The NTPsecure authentication key for the NTP server with the relevant NTP
ation id <NTP Server Index> server index is updated.

Messages on the status of the digital input and output

Messages Description
Digital output is closed. The digital output is closed (conductive).
Digital output is open. The digital output is opened (not conductive).
Value of digital input is 0. The voltage at the digital input is -30 to +3 V DC.
Value of digital input is 1. The voltage at the digital input is +10 to +30 V DC.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

332 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.1 Messages in the event log

Messages during system startup (PLUG)

Alarm Description
Startup configuration: Internal storage There is no PLUG inserted.
PLUG: Not present
Startup configuration: Internal storage There is no PLUG inserted. Functions are configured on the device for
PLUG: Missing which a PLUG License (CLP) is required.
PLUG: License missing
Startup configuration: Internal storage Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
PLUG: Configuration not accepted Functions are configured on the device for which a PLUG License (CLP) is
PLUG: License missing required.
Startup configuration: Internal storage The PLUG license (CLP) is wrong.
PLUG: Configuration accepted
PLUG: License wrong
Startup configuration: Internal storage Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
PLUG: Configuration not accepted
PLUG: License accepted
Startup configuration: Internal storage The internal configuration was written successfully to an empty PLUG Li‐
PLUG: Factory clean → filled with internal configu‐ cense (CLP).
ration
PLUG: Configuration accepted
PLUG: License accepted
Startup configuration: Internal storage The internal configuration was written successfully to an empty PLUG
PLUG: Factory clean → filled with internal configu‐ Configuration (CLP).
ration
PLUG: Configuration accepted
Startup configuration: PLUG storage The configuration was loaded successfully from the PLUG License (CLP).
PLUG: Configuration accepted
PLUG: License accepted
Startup configuration: PLUG storage The configuration was loaded successfully from the PLUG Configuration
PLUG: Configuration accepted (CLP).

Messages about PLUG

Messages Description
Factory default PLUG found. There is an empty or formatted PLUG in the device.
PLUG: Filled PLUG was found. The PLUG in the device has been emptied. The current device configura‐
PLUG: Configuration Accepted tion was written to the PLUG.
PLUG: Removed at runtime. The PLUG License (CLP) or the PLUG Configuration (CLP) was removed
during operation.
PLUG accepted. PLUG was accepted.
PLUG: Different device type found. Different device type

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 333
Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.2 Messages in the WLAN Authentication Log

D.2 Messages in the WLAN Authentication Log

Messages in access point mode

Message Description
Client <MAC address> <System Name> associated success‐ The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
fully.
Client <MAC address> <System Name> disassociated with The client was logged off from the access point.
reason <reason description>.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> failed to associate; sta‐ The connection of the client to the VAP has failed. The reason is
tus (<text>). displayed as text.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> disassociated with rea‐ The client was successfully disconnected from the VAP. The rea‐
son (<text>). son is displayed as text.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> deauthenticated with The client was logged off from the AP. The reason is displayed as
reason (<text>). text.
VAP<Nummer> Client <MAC address> failed to authenti‐ The authentication of the client failed. The reason is displayed as
cate; status (<text>). text.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> failed to disassociate; The connection of the client could not be terminated. The reason
status (<text>). is displayed as text.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> associated successfully. The client has connected successfully to the VAP or the client has
logged on successfully to the VAP.
VAP<Num>: Client <MAC address> associated successful‐ The client has connected successfully to the VAP or the client has
ly using FT Over-the-air. logged on successfully to the VAP.
Fast BSS Transition "Over-the-air" was used for the connection
transition.
RADIUS: Access rejected for client <MAC address>. The RADIUS server denies the client access.
RADIUS: Access accepted for client <MAC address>. The RADIUS server allows the client access.

Messages in client mode

Message Description
Associated successfully to AP <MAC address> <System The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
Name> at channel <Channel number> (frequency <fre‐ If the client is not connected to any access point and then logs on
quency> MHz). to an access point for the first time, a WLAN Authentication Log
is output. Example:
Associated successfully to AP [Link] at channel 40
(frequency 5200 MHz).
Associated successfully to AP <MAC address> <System The client has logged in successfully on the access point. The
Name> at channel <Channel number> (frequency <fre‐ roaming time is specified on switching of access points.
quency> MHz) roaming time <time> ms.
Associated successfully to AP <MAC address> <System The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
Name> using FT Over-the-air at channel <Channel number> Fast BSS Transition "Over-the-air" was used for the connection
(frequency <frequency> MHz) roaming time <time> ms. transition. The roaming time is specified.
Associated successfully to AP <BSSID> using FT Over-the-air The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
at channel <Channel number> (frequency <frequency> Fast BSS Transition "Over-the-air" was used for the connection
MHz) roaming time <time> ms. transition. The roaming time is specified.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

334 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.2 Messages in the WLAN Authentication Log

Message Description
Disassociated from AP <MAC address> <System Name> The client was logged off from the access point.
with reason (Disassociated because sending STA is leaving
(or has left) BSS).
Deauthenticated from AP <MAC address> with reason The client was logged off from the access point. The reason is
(<text>). displayed as text.
Failed to authenticate to AP <MAC address>; status (<text>). The authentication of the client with the access point failed. The
reason is displayed as text.
Failed to disassociate from AP <MAC address>; status The connection of the client to the access point could not be
(<text>). terminated. The reason is displayed as text.
Failed to associate to AP <MAC address>; status (<text>). The connection of the client to the access point has failed. The
reason is displayed as text.
4-Way handshake to AP <MAC address> failed (Info element An error occurred during authentication in the four-stage hand‐
in 4-Way Handshake different from (Re)Association Request/ shake procedure. The info element is different in the various
Probe Response/Beacon frames of the access point for the 4-way handshake.

Expansion of messages on the roaming operation in the access point and client mode

Expansion Description
roaming time <time> ms Additional information in the messages "Associated successfully"
and "Reassociated successfully":
Specifies the WLAN roaming time that is measured from the log‐
ical start of the login procedure in the client until receipt of the
first positive response for connection.
roaming time including authorization <time> ms Additional information in the messages "Authorized successful‐
ly":
Specifies the WLAN roaming time that is measured from the log‐
ical start of the login procedure in the client until the end of key
exchange.

Messages on log files

Message Description
Log file cleared. The log entries are deleted.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 335
Appendix D "Log Messages"
D.2 Messages in the WLAN Authentication Log

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

336 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix E "Syslog Messages" E
E.1 Format of the syslog messages
The devices generate Syslog messages (UDP default port 514) according to RFC 5424 that
contain the following boxes.
HEADER
• TIMESTAMP according to RFC 3339
• Host name
• APPNAME, PROCID and MSGID: If no information is known, the "-" character is output.
PRIORITY
PRIORITY contains the coded priority of the Syslog message broken down into a Severity and
Facility box.
• Facility
• Severity
VERSION
• Set to 1.
HOSTNAME_CONTENT:
• IPv4 address according to RFC1035: Each byte is represented in decimal, with a dot
separating it from the previous one. [Link]
• IPv6 address according to RFC4291 Section 2.2
STRUCTURED DATA
• timeQuality block
MESSAGE:
• ASCII string in English

Note
Additional information about the meaning of the boxes is available in RFC 5424 (https://
[Link]/doc/html/rfc5424).

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 337
Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.2 Parameters in Syslog messages

E.2 Parameters in Syslog messages

The Syslog messages can contain the following parameters:

Parameter Description Possible values or example

ip address IPv4 or IPv6 address IP address according to
RFC1035 or RFC4291 Sec‐
tion 2.2
src port Port that is shown as decimal number. 0 ... 65535
dest port Format: %d
client mac MAC address [Link]
dest mac Format: %02x:%02x:%02x;%02x:%02x:%02x
src mac
protocol Name of the service that has generated this event Possible entries of:
or of the Layer 4 protocol used. UDP | TCP | WBM | Telnet |
Format: %s SSH | Console | TFTP | SFTP
group String that identifies the group based on its name it-service
Format: %s
user name String that identifies the authenticated user based maier
on his/her name
without spaces
Format: %s
action user name Identifies the user based on his/her name This is not [Link]
the authenticated user.
Format: %s
role Symbolic name for the group role Administrator
Format: %s
time minute Number of minutes 44
timeout Format: %d
time second Number of seconds 44
Format: %d
failed login count Number of failed logins 10
Format: %d
max sessions Number of sessions 10
Format: %d
vap Symbolic name of the virtual access point interface VAP1.1
Format: (%s) or (%s %s)
status reason Additional status information as legible string. It (Invalid group cipher) (Un‐
can contain multiple words. The string must start known peer)
with " and end with " so that it can be analyzed.
wlan interface Symbolic name of the WLAN interface WLAN1
Format: %s
ssid SSID in ASCII representation MyWLAN
any number of spaces
Format: %s
channel Name of the channel 12
Format: %s

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

338 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Parameter Description Possible values or example

signal strength Signal strength 12
Format: %d
version Name of the version V1.0.3SP1
without spaces
Format: %s
length Length of the network packet (in bytes) 52
Format: %d
network interface Symbolic name of a network interface vlan 1
Format: %s

E.3 Syslog messages

This section describes selected Syslog messages. The selection is based on IEC 62443-3-3. This
means you can integrate these events into a central monitoring system (SIEM).

Identification and authentication of human users

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} logged in from {ip address}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.1
Description Valid login information that is specified during remote login.
Example WBM: User admin logged in from [Link].
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Default user {user name} logged in from {ip address}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: n/a (NERC-CIP 007-R5)
Description User logged in with default user name and password.
Example SSH: Default user admin logged in from [Link].
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} logged out from {ip address}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.1
Description User session completed - logged out.
Example SSH: User admin logged out from [Link].
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} failed to log in from {ip address}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.1

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 339
Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Description Incorrect user name or incorrect password (login information) specified during
remote login.
Example SSH: User testuser failed to log in from [Link].
Severity Warning
Facility local0

User account management

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} changed own password.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.3
Description User has changed own password.
Example WBM: User admin changed own password.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} changed password of user {action user name}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.3
Description User has changed other password.
Example WBM: User admin changed password of user test.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} created user-account {action user name}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.3
Description The administrator created a new account.
Example WBM: User admin created user-account joachim.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} deleted user-account {action user name}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.3
Description The administrator deleted an existing account.
Example WBM: User admin deleted user-account joachim.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Management of the identifiers

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} created group {group} and assigned to role {role}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.4
Description The administrator has created a group and assigned it to a role.
Example WBM: User admin created group it-service and assigned to role service.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

340 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text User {user name} deleted group {group} and the role {role} assignment.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.4
Description The administrator has deleted an existing group and the role assignment.
Example WBM: User admin deleted group it-service and the role service assignment.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Failed login attempts

Log text User {user name} account is locked for {time} minutes after {failed login count}
unsuccessful login attempts.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR1.11
Description If there are too many failed logins, the corresponding user account was locked for a
specific period of time.
Example User admin account is locked for 10 minutes after 30 unsuccessful login attempts.
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Usage control of wireless connections (connection over WLAN)

Log text {vap}: Client {client mac} associated successfully.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description WLAN client connected to AP.
Example VAP1.1: Client [Link] associated successfully.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text Overlap-AP found on {wlan interface}: AP {ssid} {ap mac} found on channel {chan-
nel} rssi {signal strength}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description Radio frequency is already in use.
Example Overlap-AP found on WLAN 1: AP scalance [Link] found on channel 11
rssi 12.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {vap}: Client {client mac} disassociated with reason {reason}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description WLAN client disconnected from AP.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 341
Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Example VAP1.1: Client [Link] disassociated with reason (Disassociated because

sending STA is leaving or has left BSS).
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {vap}: Client {client mac} failed to associate, status {status}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description WLAN client connection to AP denied.
Example VAP1.1: Client [Link] failed to associate, status (Invalid group cipher).
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Log text {vap}: Client {client mac} failed to authenticate, status {status}.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description The WLAN client was not able to authenticate itself.
Example VAP1.1: Client [Link] failed to authenticate, status (Invalid group ci‐
pher).
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Log text RADIUS: {ip address} - No response from the RADIUS server.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR 2.2
Description RADIUS server not found.
Example RADIUS: [Link] - No response from the RADIUS server.
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Session lock

Log text The session of user {user name} was closed after {time} seconds of inactivity.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR2.5
Description The current session was locked due to inactivity.
Example The session of user admin was closed after 60 seconds of inactivity.
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Limiting the number of simultaneous sessions

Log text {protocol}: The maximum number of {max sessions} concurrent login session ex‐
ceeded.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR2.7
Description The maximum number of parallel connections is exceeded.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

342 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Example WBM: The maximum number of 8 concurrent login session exceeded.

Severity Warning
Facility local0

Non-deniability (change configuration)

Log text Device configuration changed.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR2.12
Description The device configuration has been changed permanently.
Example Device configuration changed.
Severity Info
Facility local0

Data backup in automation system (backup)

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} saved file type ConfigPack
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.3
Description Backup completed
Example WBM: User admin saved file type ConfigPack..
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Saved file type ConfigPack.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.3
Description Backup completed
Example TFTP: Saved file type ConfigPack
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} failed to save file type ConfigPack.
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.3
Description Backup failed
Example WBM: User admin failed to save file type ConfigPack.
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Failed to save file type ConfigPack.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.3
Description Backup failed
Example TFTP: Failed to save file type ConfigPack.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 343
Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Severity Warning
Facility local0

Restoration of the automation system

Log text {protocol}: Loaded file type Firmware {version} (restart required).
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description Firmware update was successfully uploaded.
Example TFTP: Loaded file type Firmware V02.00.00 (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} loaded file type Firmware {version} (restart required).
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description Firmware update was successfully uploaded.
Example WBM: User admin loaded file type Firmware V02.00.00 (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Failed to load file type Firmware.

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description Error loading the firmware update.
Example WBM: Failed to load file type Firmware.
Severity Warning
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Loaded file type Config (restart required).

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description The configuration is applied.
Example TFTP: Loaded file type Config (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: Loaded file type ConfigPack (restart required).

Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description The configuration is applied.
Example TFTP: Loaded file type ConfigPack (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

344 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} loaded file type Config (restart required).
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description The configuration is applied.
Example WBM: User admin loaded file type Config (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

Log text {protocol}: User {user name} loaded file type ConfigPack (restart required).
Standard IEC 62443-3-3 Reference: SR7.4
Description The configuration is applied.
Example WBM: User admin loaded file type ConfigPack (restart required).
Severity Info
Facility local0

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 345
Appendix E "Syslog Messages"
E.3 Syslog messages

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

346 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)" F
The following tables list the encryption methods (ciphers) used by the SCALANCE W device.

F.1 WLAN security mechanisms

The following table shows the encryption methods and authentication that the SCALANCE W
devices support.

Encryption method
None ✓
WPA-TKIP ✓
WPA-AES ✓

Authentication
Password / PSK ✓
Password / SAE ✓
IEEE 802.1X EAP PEAP ✓
IEEE 802.1X EAP TLS ✓
IEEE 802.1X EAP TTLS ✓
IEEE 802.1X EAP others -
EAP protocol: MS-CHAPv2 ✓
EAP protocol: TLS ✓
EAP protocol: GTC ✓

F.2 RADIUS
The following table shows cipher suites and signature algorithms that SCALANCE W devices
support for RADIUS authentication.
Default setting TLS 1.2

Table F-1 WPA/WPA2 RADIUS authentication

Cipher suite Signature algorithm

TLS 1.0/1.1
AES256-GCM-SHA384 ECDSA with SHA256
AES128-GCM-SHA256 ECDSA with SHA384
AES256-SHA256 ECDSA with SHA512
AES128-SHA256 ECDSA with SHA224
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA ECDSA with SHA1

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 347
Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)"
F.2 RADIUS

Cipher suite Signature algorithm

ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA SHA224 with RSA
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA SHA1 with RSA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA DSA with SHA224
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA DSA with SHA1
DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA EdDSA ed25519
AES256-SHA EdDSA ed448
AES128-SHA RSASSA-PSS with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 RSASSA-PSS with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 RSASSA-PSS with SHA512
DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA512
DHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 SHA256 with RSA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 SHA384 with RSA
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 SHA512 with RSA
DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 DSA with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384 DSA with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384 DSA with SHA512
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
TLS 1.2
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 EdDSA ed25519
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 EdDSA ed448
DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 RSASSA-PSS with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS with SHA512
DHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 RSASSA-PSS (rsaEncryption) with SHA512
DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 SHA256 with RSA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384 SHA384 with RSA
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384 SHA512 with RSA
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA256 DSA with SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256 DSA with SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256 DSA with SHA512
DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256 ECDSA with SHA256
ECDSA with SHA384
ECDSA with SHA512

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

348 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)"
F.3 SSL

F.3 SSL

HTTPS WBM Server

Category IANA name Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption suite TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 1301 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 1303 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 1302 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_S c02f ✓
HA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_S c030 ✓
HA384
Protocol version TLSv1.2 - ✓
Protocol version TLSv1.3 - ✓

SMTP Client (secure)

Category IANA name Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption suite TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 1301 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 1303 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 1302 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02c ✓
SA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02b ✓
SA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_S c02f ✓
HA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_S c030 ✓
HA384
Protocol version TLSv1.2 - ✓
Protocol version TLSv1.3 - ✓

Syslog Client TLS

Category IANA name Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption suite TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 1301 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 1303 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 1302 ✓
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02c ✓
SA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02b ✓
SA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 349
Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)"
F.3 SSL

Category IANA name Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_S c02f ✓
HA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_S c030 ✓
HA384
Protocol version TLSv1.2 - ✓
Protocol version TLSv1.3 - ✓

RADIUS Client

Category IANA name Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02c ✓
SA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_S c030 ✓
HA384
Encryption suite TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA 009f ✓
384
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_CHA‐ cca9 ✓
CHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_CHA‐ cca8 ✓
CHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CHA‐ ccaa ✓
CHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c02b ✓
SA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_S c02f ✓
HA256
Encryption suite TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA 009e ✓
256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c024 ✓
SA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SH c028 ✓
A384
Encryption suite TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA 006b ✓
256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_ECD‐ c023 ✓
SA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
Encryption suite TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SH c027 ✓
A256
Encryption suite TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA 0067 ✓
256
Protocol version TLSv1.2 - ✓

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

350 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)"
F.4 SSH CLI

F.4 SSH CLI

SSH CLI Client

Category Process Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption method aes256-ctr - ✓
(enc)
Host key ecdsa-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256@[Link] - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp384 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
MAC hmac-sha2-256 - ✓
Protocol version SSHv2.0 - ✓

SSH Server

Category Process Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption method aes256-ctr - ✓
(enc)
Host key ecdsa-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256@[Link] - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp384 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
MAC hmac-sha2-256 - ✓
Protocol version SSHv2.0 - ✓

SFTP Client

Category Process Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Encryption method aes256-ctr - ✓
(enc)
Host key ecdsa-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
Host key ecdsa-sha2-nistp256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) curve25519-sha256@[Link] - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp256 - ✓
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp384 - ✓

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 351
Appendix F "Encryption methods used (ciphers)"
F.5 NTP client (secure)

Category Process Hexadecimal Enabled by

value default
Key exchange (kex) ecdh-sha2-nistp521 - ✓
MAC hmac-sha2-256 - ✓
Protocol version SSHv2.0 - ✓

F.5 NTP client (secure)

The following table shows supported hash algorithms that the device can use for authentication
to the secure NTP server.

Hash algorithm
DES ✓
MD5 ✓
SHA1 ✓
SHA256 ✓

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

352 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Appendix G "Permitted characters in names,
passwords and descriptions" G
G.1 Permitted characters

Passwords
Observe the following rules when creating or changing the passwords:

Allowed characters of a character set according to 0123456789

ANSI X 3.4-1986 A...Z a...z
.-_#+~^!%&=\<>@,
Space
Permitted in addition, except in passwords on the '*$/{([])}`
pages "System > Load@Save" and "System > System
time > NTP client"
Characters not allowed :;"|€´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Length of the password At least 8 characters and maximum 128 characters

Note
Passwords
To improve security, make sure that passwords are as long as possible.
Passwords must be at least 8 characters long and contain special characters, upper and
lowercase characters as well as numbers.

User names
Observe the following rules when creating or changing the user names:

Allowed characters of a character set according to 0123456789

ANSI X 3.4-1986 A...Z a...z
.-_#+'*~^!$%&/{([])}=\ `<>@,
Characters not allowed :;"|€´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Space
Length of the user name 1 to 30 characters

Note
User names
To improve security, make sure that user names are as long as possible.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 353
Appendix G "Permitted characters in names, passwords and descriptions"
G.1 Permitted characters

Role names
Observe the following rules when creating or changing the role names:

Allowed characters of a character set 0123456789

A...Z a...z
.-_#+'*~^!$%&/{([])}=\ `<>@,:
Space
Characters not allowed ;"|€´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Length of the role name 1 ... 64 characters

Group names
Observe the following rules when creating or changing the group names:

Allowed characters of a character set 0123456789

A...Z a...z
.-_#+'*~^!$%&/{([])}=\ `<>@:
Space
Characters not allowed ;",|€´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Length of the group name 1 ... 64 characters

User, role and group descriptions

Observe the following rules when creating or modifying descriptions:

Allowed characters of a character set 0123456789

A...Z a...z
.-_#+'*~^!$%&/{([])}=\ `<>@,
Space
:;"| CLI only
Characters not allowed WBM :;"|€´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
CLI €´?§32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Length of description 1 ... 100 characters

File names
When creating or changing the file names, remember the following rules:

Allowed characters of a character set according to 0123456789

ANSI X 3.4-1986 A...Z a...z
.-_#+'~^!$%&/{([])}= `@,
Characters not allowed \ /:;"|€´?§* < >32°µ ä ö ü Ä Ö Ü
Space
Length of the file name 1 to 30 characters

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

354 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Appendix G "Permitted characters in names, passwords and descriptions"
G.1 Permitted characters

Note
User names
To improve security, make sure that user names are as long as possible.

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 355
Appendix G "Permitted characters in names, passwords and descriptions"
G.1 Permitted characters

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

356 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
Index
DST
Daylight saving time, 170, 171
A
Access point
Overlapping channels, 102
E
Overview, 98 Error status, 79
Overview of associated stations, 100 Ethernet statistics
Aging Interface statistics, 84
Dynamic MAC Aging, 245 Event
Article number, 73 Log table, 76
Authentication, 159 Event log table, 76
Available system functions, 26

F
B Factory defaults, 315
Backup, 125, 198 Factory setting, 315
Basic MAC address, 73 Fault monitoring
BFP, 287 Connection status change, 186
Bridge priority, 42 File name
Brute Force Prevention, 287 Permitted characters and length, 354
Forward Delay, 248
Fragments, 87
C
Client
Available access points, 105
G
Overview, 103 Geographic coordinates, 120
Client Supplicant, 298 Group name
CLP Permitted characters, 354
Formatting, 192 Groups, 277
Saving the configuration, 192
Collisions, 87
Configuration manuals, 316 H
Configuration mode, 118
Hardware version, 73
Configuring the network via Ethernet
HTTP
Connecting to network, 54
Port, 116
CRC, 87
Server, 116
HTTPS
Port, 116
D Server, 116
DCP Discovery, 195
DCP server, 116, 257
Default routes I
IPv6 routes, 271
Information
DHCP
ARP table, 74
Client, 154
Groups, 96
DNS Client, 123
Inter AP blocking, 97
Documentation on the Internet, 10
IPv6 Neighbor Table, 75

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 357
Index

LLDP, 88 MSTP, 253

Log tables, 76 Port, 249
Role, 96 Port parameters, 255
Security, 92, 95 MSTP instance, 255, 256
SNMP, 91 Multichannel configuration, 49
Spanning Tree, 80 Multiple Spanning Tree, 249, 253
Start page, 66
Versions, 72
Inter AP blocking N
Allowed Addresses, 303
NAPT
Basic, 302
Configuring, 266
Configuration, 301
NAT
Information, 97
Configuring, 265
IP address
Masquerading, 46
Assignment with STEP 7, 57
Negotiation, 205
IP mapping, 107
NTP
iPCF
Client, 177
How it works, 37
iPCF-2
Enable, 305
How it works, 37
O
iPRP Overview
Configuration, 307 Access point, 98
Information, 113 Associated stations, 100
IPv4 routing Available access points, 105
Routing table, 89 Clients, 103
IPv6 Overlap APs, 102
Notation, 58 Overlapping channels, 102
IPv6 routing
Default routes, 271
Routing table, 90 P
Packet error statistics, 86
Password, 279
J Options, 282
Jabbers, 87 Permitted characters and length, 353
Permitted characters and length, 353
Ping, 194
L PLUG, 189
PLUG License, 193
LLDP, 88, 258
PLUG License
Local users, 272
iFeatures, 193
Location, 120
point-to-point, 43
Log tables
Port
WLAN authentication log, 78
Port configuration, 204, 207
Logging in, 63
Port configuration, 207
Login, 287
Power supply
Logout
Monitoring, 185
Automatic, 182
PROFINET, 35, 187
PROFINET IO, 35
M
Maintenance data, 73

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

358 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08
 Index

SSH
Port, 115
R Server, 115
Standalone configuration, 47
RADIUS, 283
Start page, 66
Redundant networks, 247
STEP 7, 257
Reset, 124
Subnets
Reset device, 315
Configuration (IPv4), 262
Reset timer BFP, 287
Syslog, 183
Restart, 124
Client, 116
Restore Factory Defaults, 315
System
Role name
Configuration, 113
Permitted characters, 354
General information, 119
Roles, 276
System event log
Root bridge, 42
Agent, 183
Routing, 263
System events
IPv4 routing table, 89
Configuration, 145
IPv6 routing table, 90
Severity filter, 149
Static routes, 263
System manual, 11
System Time, 168
S
Security settings, 162 T
Serial number, 73
Telnet
SFTP
Server, 115
Load/save, 141
TFTP
SHA algorithm, 162
Load/save, 138
Signal recorder, 227
Time, 117
SINEC PNI, 257
Time of day
SMTP
Manual setting, 169
Client, 116
SIMATIC Time Client, 181
SNMP, 40, 117, 156, 162
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), 174
Groups, 161
System time, 168
Overview, 91
Time zone, 177, 180
SNMPv1, 40
Time-of-day synchronization, 174
SNMPv2c, 40
UTC time, 177, 180
SNMPv3, 40
Trigger interval BFP, 287
Trap, 166
SNMPv3
Access, 162
Groups, 161
U
Notifications, 166 User groups, 277
Users, 158 User name
Views, 164 Permitted characters and length, 353
Software revision, 73
Source NAT
Masquerading, 46 V
Spanning Tree
Vendor, 73
Information, 80
Vendor ID, 73
Rapid Spanning Tree, 43
VLAN, 35
Port VID, 244

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08 359
Index

Priority, 243
Tag, 243

W
Web Based Management, 62
Wireless access, 48
WLAN statistics
Bad data frames, 109
Received frames, 111
Sent frames, 111

SCALANCE W700 according to IEEE 802.11ax Web Based Management V2.4

360 Configuration Manual, 07/2024, C79000-G8976-C618-08